The URL can be used to link to this page

Spec. Book Tigard Public Works Water Building Renovation 8777 SW Burnham Street Tigard, Oregon PROJECT MANUAL PROJECT NO. 206262 February 5, 2007 ED ARC City of Tigard ,j 13125 SW Hall Blvd. ,...� Tigard, Oregon 97223 r DN • 9�� '�� LRS Architects, Inc. �'i '�j 1121 SW Salmon Street, Suite 100 Portland, Oregon 97205 503-221-1121 Tigard Public Works Table of Contents: 00 0110 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 000110 Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Invitation to Bid Attachment A- Bid Form Attachment B-Acknowledgment of Addenda Attachment C—Bid Certifications Attachment D—First Tier Disclosure Form Attachment E—City of Tigard Public Improvement Agreement Template DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1100 Summary of Work 012300 Alternates 01 2500 Substitution Procedures Substitution Request Form 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 01 2900 Payment Procedures 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 01 3516 Alteration Project Procedures 01 4115 Design-Build Requirements 01 4200 Definitions and Reference Standards 01 4500 Quality Control 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 7329 Cutting and Patching 017400 Cleaning 01 7419 Construction Waste Management 01 7700 Closeout Procedures DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Demolition DIVISION 05 METALS 055000 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 064000 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 078413 Penetration Firestopping 078443 Fire-Resistant Joint Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Table of Contents: 00 0110 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 081213 Hollow Metal Frames 081400 Wood Doors 083100 Access Doors and Panels 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing 089000 Louvers and Vents DIVISION 09 FINISHES 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies 093000 Tiling 095100 Acoustical Ceilings 096500 Resilient Flooring 096813 Tile Carpeting 098110 Acoustic Insulation and Sealant 099000 Painting DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 102813 Toilet Accessories 104400 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11 3100 Residential Appliances DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 122113 Louver Blinds DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 1300 Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 220500 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods 220548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 221005 Plumbing Piping 221006 Plumbing Piping Specialties 224000 Plumbing Fixtures LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Table of Contents: 00 0110 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 230500 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230713 Duct Insulation 230719 HVAC Piping Insulation 230913 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC 230923 Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 232300 Refrigerant Piping 233100 HVAC Ducts and Casings 233300 Air Duct Accessories 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators 233700 Air Outlets and Inlets 234000 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices 235400 Furnaces 237313 Energy Recovery Ventilation Units DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260001 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 260519 Conductors and Connectors 260526 Grounding 260533 Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings 260553 Identification. 262000 Secondary Distribution System 262726 Wiring Devices 262816 Disconnect Switches 265100 Lighting DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 270500 Common Work Results For Communications 271000 Structured Cabling DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 281000 Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321313 Concrete Paving END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS LRS Architects, Inc. Revision Date: Feb. 5,2007 CITY OF TIGARD OREGON INVITATION TO BID TIGARD PUBLIC WORKS WATER BUILDING RENOVATION DATE DUE: Tuesday,March 8,2007 TIME DUE: 2:00 PM Envelopes must be sealed and marked with ITB Title. Bidders must submit one (1) original and three (3) copies of their Bid. If a bid exceeds$100,000,Respondents must submit a First Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Form to the City no later than 4:00 PM,Tuesday,March 8,2007. A mandatory pre-bid walkthrough/meeting will be held at 2:00 PM,Tuesday,February 27,2007 at the City of Tigard Water Building located at 8777 SW Burnham Street,Tigard, Oregon 97223. PROJECT MANAGER. ITB QUESTIONS: Rob Murchison, Project Engineer Joe Barrett,Buyer City of Tigard,Public Works City of Tigard, Financial&Information Services Phone: (503) 718-2699 Phone: (503) 718-2477 Fax: (503) 684-7297 Fax: (503) 684-7297 Email: robm and-or. ov Email: Joseph c and-or. ov SUBMIT BIDS TO: Joe Barrett, Buyer City of Tigard—Information Desk 13125 SW Hall Blvd. Tigard, Oregon 97223 2007 ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 1 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM PUBLIC NOTICE INVITATION TO BID TIGARD PUBLIC WORKS WATER BUILDING RENOVATION The City of Tigard is requesting sealed bids from firms qualified to provide an construction services to the City for facility upgrades to Tigard's Water Building. Firms are invited to submit a sealed bid for the requested services as outlined in the City's Invitation to Bid packet. A mandatory pre-bid walkthrough and meeting will be held at 2:00 PM Pacific Standard Time (PST), Tuesday, February 27, 2007 at the City of Tigard Water Building located at 8777 SW Burnham Street,Tigard, Oregon 97223. Any firm wishing to bid on the project must be represented at the pre-bid walkthrough or their bid will be deemed nonresponsive. Sealed bids will be received by Joe Barrett,Buyer at Tigard City Hall's Information Desk located at 13125 SW Hall Blvd.,Tigard, Oregon 97223 no later than 2:00 PM PST on Tuesday,March 8,2007 with public opening to immediately follow. If a bid is submitted for an amount exceeding$100,000, the Bidder shall submit a First Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Form included in the Bid Packet to the City no later than 4:00 PM PST on Tuesday, March 8, 2007 to the attention of Joe Barrett, Buyer, at the Tigard City Hall Information Desk. A ten percent bid security must accompany a firm's bid. Facsimile and electronic (email) bids will not be accepted. Bids will not be accepted after the stated opening date and time and late bids will be returned to the vendor unopened. The City intends to enter into a contract with the successful Bidder to provide the required services. Bid packets may be downloaded from httg://www.tigard-or.gov, obtained from Ford Graphics by calling (503) 227-3424, or by calling Joe Barrett, Buyer at (503) 718-2477. Bids must be submitted on the bid form provided in the bid package. No bid will be received or considered by the City unless the bid contains, or is accompanied by, a statement that the provisions contained in ORS 279C.840 and ORS 279C.845 pertaining to prevailing wages shall be met. All bidders are required to certify that they have (or will have) a drug-testing program in place at the time of execution of a contract with the successful bidder and will continue the program for the duration of the contract. The City may reject any bid not in compliance with all prescribed public bidding procedures and requirements, and may reject for good cause any or all bids upon a finding of the City if it is in the public interest to do so. Published: Daily Journal of Commerce Date: February 8,2007 Published: The Oregonian Date: February 8,2007 ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 2 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE PAGE TidePage,--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Public Notice.__________ Table of Content 3 SECTION Section 1 Introduction 4 Section 2 Bid Preparation------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5 ------------------------------ Section 3 Bid Submission and Opening--------------------------------------------------------------------------6 Section 4 General Information------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-8 Section 5 Bid Evaluation and Award 9 Section 6 Special Bid Instructions------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-10 Section 7 Detailed Specifications.------------------------------------------------------- 10 ATTACHMENTS AttachmentA Bid Form--------------------------------------------------------------------------•----------------------11-13 Attachment B Acknowledgement of Addenda Attachment C Bid Certifications ____________15 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Attachment D First Tier Disclosure Form----------------------------------------------------------------------------16 Attachment E City of Tigard Public Improvement Agreement Template._______________________17-38 ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 3 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM f SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION The City of Tigard is requesting sealed bids from firms qualified to provide an construction services to the City for facility upgrades to Tigard's Water Building. Firms are invited to submit a sealed bid for the requested services as outlined in the City's Invitation to Bid packet. A mandatory pre-bid walkthrough and meeting will be held at 2:00 PM Pacific Standard Time (PST), Tuesday, February 27, 2007 at the City of Tigard Water Building located at 8777 SW Burnham Street,Tigard, Oregon 97223. Any firm wishing to bid on the project must be represented at the pre-bid walkthrough or their bid will be deemed nonresponsive. Sealed bids will be received by Joe Barrett, Buyer at Tigard City Hall's Information Desk located at 13125 SW Hall Blvd.,Tigard, Oregon 97223 no later than 2:00 PM PST on Tuesday, March 8, 2007 with public opening to immediately follow. If a bid is submitted for an amount exceeding$100,000, the Bidder shall submit a First Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Form included in the Bid Packet to the City no later than 4:00 PM PST on Tuesday, March 8, 2007 to the attention of Joe Barrett, Buyer, at the Tigard City Hall Information Desk. A ten percent bid security must accompany a firm's bid. Facsimile and electronic (email) bids will not be accepted. Bids will not be accepted after the stated opening date and time and late bids will be returned to the vendor unopened. The City intends to enter into a contract with the successful Bidder to provide the required services. No bid will be received or considered by the City unless the bid contains, or is accompanied by, a statement that the provisions contained in ORS 279C.840 and ORS 279C.845 pertaining to prevailing wages shall be met. All bidders are required to certify that they have (or will have) a drug-testing program in place at the time of execution of a contract with the successful bidder and will continue the program for the duration of the contract. The City may reject any bid not in compliance with all prescribed public bidding procedures and requirements, and may reject for good cause any or all bids upon a finding of the City if it is in the public interest to do so. SECTION 2 BID PREPARATION 1. EXECUTION OF BID Bids must be typewritten or prepared in ink. Bids shall be submitted on the "Bid Form" furnished by the City and must be signed in ink by an authorized representative of the bidder. 2. CONFORMANCE TO BID REQUIREMENTS Bids must conform to the requirements of the Invitation to bid,which are hereby made a part of this contract. All requested attachments (references, descriptive literature, etc.) must be submitted with the bid and in the required format. Bid prices must be for the unit indicated on the bid. Failure to comply with all requirements may result in bid rejection. 3. BID MODIFICATION Modifications or erasures made before bid submission must be initialed in ink by the person the person signing the bid. Bids once submitted may be modified in writing before the time and date set for bid closing. Any modifications shall be prepared on company letterhead, signed by an authorized representative, and state that the new document supersedes or modifies the prior bid. Modification must be submitted in a sealed envelope clearly marked "Bid Modification" and identify the bid and closing date. Bidders may not modify bids after bid closing time. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 4 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM 4. BID WITHDRAWALS Bids may be withdrawn in writing on company letterhead signed by an authorized representative and received by the Purchasing Division or in person upon presentation of appropriate identification prior to bid closing time. Unopened bids withdrawn may be released to the bidder after voiding any date and time stamp used. Requests to withdraw mailed bids shall be marked "Bid Withdrawal" and shall clearly state bid title. 5. PROTEST OF SPECIFICATIONS OR TERMS A bidder who believes any specifications or terms detailed in the bid packet or sample contract (Attachment E) are unnecessarily restrictive or limit competition may submit a protest in writing, to the Purchasing Office. A protest may be submitted via facsimile. Any such protest shall include the reasons for the protest and shall detail any proposed changes to the specifications or terms. The Purchasing Office shall respond to any protest and, if necessary, shall issue any appropriate revisions, substitutions, or clarification via addenda to all interested Bidders. To be considered, protests must be received at least five- (5) days before the bid closing date. The City shall not consider any protest against award due to the content of bid specifications or contract terms submitted after the established protest deadline. All protests should be directed to Joe Barrett, Buyer and be marked as follows: ITB Specification/Term Protest Bid Name and Closing Date City of Tigard Attn: Joe Barrett, Buyer 13125 SW Hall Blvd. Tigard, Oregon 97223 If a bid protest is received in accordance with section above, the bid opening date may be extended if necessary to allow consideration of the protest and issuance of any necessary addenda to the bid documents. 6. ADDENDUM The City may modify the ITB by issuance of an "Addendum" to all prospective bidders within a reasonable time prior to bid closing to allow bidders to consider them in preparing their bids, but in no case less than 72 hours before the bid closing. If an Addendum is necessary after that time, the City,at its discretion, can extend the closing date. Any Addendum issued, as a result of any change in the RFP, must be acknowledged by submitting the "Acknowledgment of Addendum" (Attachment B) with a proposal. Only questions that are answered by formal written addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 7. RECYCLABLE PRODUCTS Bidders shall use recyclable products to the maximum extent economically feasible in the performance of the contract set forth in this document. 8. CITY'S PROJECT MANAGER The City's Project Manager for this work will be Rob Murchison, Project Engineer, who can be reached by phone at (503) 718-2699 or by email at robm&dgard-or.gov. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 5 Close—Tuesday,,March 8,2007,2:00 PM SECTION 3 . BID SUBMISSION AND OPENING 1. SUBMISSION One (1) original and three (3) copies of the sealed Bid must be received before the stated closing time at the address listed below. To assure that your bid receives priority treatment,please mark as follows. Tigard Public Works Water Building Renovation Due: March 8,2007 City of Tigard—Information Desk Attn: Joe Barrett,Buyer 13125 SW Hall Blvd. Tigard, Oregon 97223 Bidders shall include their firm name and address on the outside of the envelope. It is the bidder's responsibility to ensure that bids are received prior to the stated closing time. The City shall not be responsible for the proper identification and handling of any bids submitted incorrectly. Late bids, late modification, or late withdrawals will not be accepted after the stated bid opening date and time and will be returned unopened. Facsimile and electronic (email) bids will not be accepted. 2. BID OPENING Bids will be opened 2:00 PM on Tuesday, March 8, 2007 in the Tigard City Hall's Conference Room. Bidders may be present;however,award decisions will not be made at the opening. 3. FIRST TIER SUBCONTRACTOR DISCLOSURE If a bid exceeds $100,000, Bidders must submit a First Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Form, provided in this packet at Exhibit D, to the City no later than 4:00 PM,Tuesday, March 8, 2007. 4. BID SECURITY Pursuant to Tigard Public Contracting Rule 30.055, all bidders must submit a bid security to the City along with their bid in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of their base bid. The bid must be in one of the following forms: A. Surety bond from surety company authorized to do business in the State of Oregon;or B. Cashier's check, certified check, or savings and loan secured check. A Bidders bid security shall be forfeited if the Bidder fails to execute the contract promptly and properly if so awarded. The bid security of all unsuccessful bidders shall be returned after a contract has been executed or all bids have been rejected. SECTION 4 GENERAL INFORMATION 1. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of these specifications,the following definitions shall apply: A. LV shall mean City of Tigard; B. Contractor shall mean the lowest responsive and responsible bidder awarded the contract; C. Contract or Contract Documents the written agreement between the City and Contractor which includes the Purchase Order, Invitation to Bid, any Addenda issued, describing the work to be done and the obligations of the parties. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 6 Close—Tuesday,tilarch 8,2007,2:00 PM 2. CONTRACT After the award, the Contractor and the City will enter into a public improvement contract incorporating the terms and conditions of the ITB document and the bid response. Vendors taking exception to any of the contract terms shall submit a protest or request for change in accordance with Section 2.5 "Protest of Specifications or Terms" or their exceptions will be deemed waived. 3. ANTICIPATED TERM OF CONTRACT The Contract period shall begin on or around April 2, 2007 and end on or around July 20, 2007 with Substantial Completion achieved by July 1, 2007. This timeframe may be revised slightly prior to contract execution. In accordance with Tigard Public Contracting Rules the total duration of the Contract may not exceed five (5)years. 4. CONTRACT PRICING ADJUSTMENTS Prices shall remain firm through the initial term of the subsequent Contract, with the following exceptions: A. City shall be given immediate benefit of any price decreases. B. Contractor shall promptly notify the City of amount and effective date of any decreases. C. Any decrease shall apply to any work requested on or after the effective date of decrease. The City may consider a price increase for any Contract extension if the increased pricing remains advantageous to the City. Pricing increases must be received at the City at least forty-five (45) days prior to any extension of the Contract. Contractor shall provide documentation for price increase; failure to provide sufficient documentation shall result in rejection of increases. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any increases. In case of errors in pricing, unit prices shall govern. 5. BUSINESS TAX AND FEDERAL ID NO REQUIRED The City of Tigard Business Tax is required from successful Bidder. Chapter 5.4 of the Tigard Municipal Code states any business doing business in the City of Tigard shall pay a City of Tigard Business Tax. No contracts shall be signed prior to the obtaining of the City of Tigard Business Tax. Upon award of proposal, contractor shall complete a Federal W-9, Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Certification Form for the City. 6. RESIDENT BIDDER ORS 279C.365(h) requires every bidder on a public improvement contract to indicate whether they are a resident bidder as defined in ORS 279A.120. A resident bidder means a bidder that has paid unemployment taxes or income taxes in this state during the 12 calendar months immediately preceding submission of the bid and has a business address in the State of Oregon. This City requires all Bidders, regardless of the form of the subsequent contract, to indicate if they are a resident bidder or not (see Attachment C.) As a public contracting agency, the City shall prefer goods or services that have been manufactured or produced in this state if price, fitness, availability and quality are otherwise equal. I'IB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 7 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM 8. PUBLIC RECORDS All bid material submitted by bidder shall become the property of the City and is public record unless otherwise specified. A bid that contains any information that is considered trade secret under ORS 192.501(2) should be segregated and clearly identified as such. This information will be kept confidential and shall not be disclosed except in accordance with the Oregon Public Records Law, ORS 192. The above restrictions may not include cost or price information, which must be open to public inspection. 9. BILLING REQUIREMENTS Invoices shall be sent to City of Tigard,Attn:Accounts Payable, 13125 SW Hall Blvd.,Tigard,Oregon 97223. Payment terms shall be a net 30 following the date the invoice is received. 10. TERMINATION OF CONTRACT Contract may be terminated by mutual consent of both parties or by the City at its discretion with a 30 days' written notice. The City may cancel an order for goods at any time with written notice to Contractor, stating the extent and effective date of termination. If the contract is so terminated, Contractor shall be paid in accordance with the terms of the contract for goods delivered and accepted to the date of termination which cannot be mitigated by resale as provided in the Uniform Commercial Code (ORS 72.7060). 11. PREVAILING WAGE The provisions of ORS Chapters 279A and 279C and all other Oregon and Federal provisions pertaining to minimum salaries and wages shall be incorporated by reference as if fully set forth in any contract resulting from this Invitation to Bid. The successful bidder shall agree that the workmen in each trade or occupation required for the work to be done pursuant to the resulting contract, employed in the performance of the resulting contract, either by the successful bidder or any subcontractor or other person doing or contracting to do any part of the work contemplated by the Contractor shall be paid not less than the prevailing, minimum hourly rate of wage specified by the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor,and attached hereto. For contracts $50,000 or greater, the Contractor shall pay a fee equal to one-tenth of one percent (.001) of the price of the contract. The fee shall be paid on or before the first progress payment or 60 days from the date work first began on the contract,whichever comes first. The fee is payable to the Bureau of Labor and Industries and shall be mailed or otherwise delivered to the Bureau at the following address: Bureau of Labor and Industries Wage and Hours Division Prevailing Wage Unit 800 NE Oregon Street, # 32 Portland, Oregon 97232 Contractor shall provide proof to the City prior to the beginning of any of the work that the Contractor has filed a public works bond with a corporate surety in the amount of$30,000 with the Construction Contractors Board as required under Oregon PWR law. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 8 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM SECTION 5 BID EVALUATION AND AWARD 1. BID VALIDITY TIMEFRAME All bids submitted shall be valid and binding for sixty (60) calendar days from bid closing date, unless extended by mutual consent of all parties. 2. EVALUATION CRITERIA Bids will be awarded based upon the evaluation criteria detailed in the Invitation to Bid. Ordinarily, bids will be evaluated to identify the "lowest responsive and responsible bidder"who has substantially complied with all requirements and specifications of the ITB and who can be expected to deliver promptly and perform reliably. 3. RECIPROCAL PREFERENCE In determining the "lowest responsible bidder," the City shall add a percent increase to each out-of- state bidder's bid price which is equal to the percent given to local bidders in that bidder's home state. This is pursuant to ORS 279A.120(2)(b). 4. DELIVERY DELAYS Significant delays in delivery may be considered in determining award if early delivery is required. 5. METHOD OF AWARD The City reserves the right to make the award by item, groups of items or entire bid,whichever is in the best interest of the City. 6. ERRORS IN BIDS When an error(s) is made in extending total prices, the unit bid price will govern. Bidders are cautioned to recheck their bid for possible error(s). Error(s) discovered after opening cannot be corrected and the contractor will be required to perform if their bid is accepted. 7. BID REJECTION The City may reject any bid not in compliance with all prescribed public bidding procedures and requirements and may reject for good cause any or all bids upon a finding of the City that it is in the public interest to do so. 8. MINOR INFORMALITIES The City reserves the right to waive any and all minor informalities that may arise in relation to this bid process. SECTION 6 SPECIAL BID INSTRUCTIONS 1. TIME TABLE Thursday, February 8 2007 Public Notice& Invitation to Bid Release Tuesday,March 8,2007 at 2:00 PM ITB Closing Date&Time Tuesday, March 8, 2007 at 4:00 PM 1 t Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Due March 12,2007 through March 16 2007 Evaluation (Interviews if Ne(essary) Monday,March 26,2007 Award of Contract by Local Contract Review Board Sunday, April 1,2007 Contract Commencement Date ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 9 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM 2. REQUESTED INFORMATION Please include a cover letter which includes a brief corporate history, how long in business,number of employees,when registered to do business in Oregon,etc. 3. BIDDERS QUALIFICATIONS AND REFERENCES All bidders must fully complete and submit the "Bidder Qualifications and Reference Form" on page 16-17 of this ITB. Bidders must include at least three (3) references will be considered for this project. Failure to provide complete the information may be cause for bid rejection. 4. CONTRACTOR CONTACTS Contractor shall designate one (1) primary and one (1) backup person responsible for the contractor's work under this contract. Contractor shall provide to City the names, addresses and telephone numbers, including after hours/emergency numbers of such persons and shall keep this information current with the City Contract Administrator at all times. 5. CONSORTIUMS / PARTNERSHIPS / SUBCONTRACTORS The City will not consider bids submitted by a consortium,or by multiple firms submitting as partners or joint ventures. Bidders shall not consider the use of sub-contractors for this bid proposal. Contractor must have sufficient resources to perform all services required by this contract. The City reserves the right to approve the use of sub-contractors during the term of this contract as special circumstances dictate. 6. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT Bidder certifies that this bid/proposal has been arrived at independently and has been submitted without collusion designed to limit independent bidding or competition. 7. BILLING METHOD Each invoice shall include adequate detail to identify each good or service purchased. At a minimum this detail shallinclude: A. Total number of man hours for the billing period; B. Detailed pricing and specification for any goods purchased; C. Details regarding the status of the project, i.e. completion percentage,revised estimated time of completion, etc.; and D. Payment due date. 8. QUANTITIES The City does not bind itself to purchase the full quantities stipulated in the proposal as estimates. The quantities shown as estimates are not exact. They represent past purchasing activity and estimates of future usage and are given for comparing bids on a uniform basis. Payment shall be made only for quantities ordered, delivered and accepted, whether greater or less than the stated amounts. Quantities listed on proposal are based on a one-year estimate. SECTION 7 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS Work shall include, but shall not be limited to the following: Tenant improvement renovations as indicated in the Drawings and as specified in the Project Manual. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 10 Close—Tuesday,Nfarch 8,2007,2:00 PM ATTACHMENT A CITY OF TIGARD TIGARD PUBLIC WORKS WATER BUILDING RENOVATION BID FORM The Bidder,whose legal signature binding the Bidder to the bid prices indicated on these pages,hereby bids as follows: TOTAL$ The following itemization is for owner's reference only: NISI( T»l" DES 1 I {3NOF ITEM _ERIE. UTAL, RTC . DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Demolition DIVISION 05 METALS 055000 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 WOOD,PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 064000 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 078413 Penetration Firestopping 07 8443 Fixe-Resistant Joint Firestoppin 079200 oint Sealants DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 081213 Hollow Metal Frames 081400 ood Doors 083100 ccess Doors and Panels 084113Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazin 089000 Louvers and Vents DIVISION 09 FINISHES 092116 —Gypsum Board Assemblies 093000 ilin 096500 Resilient Flooring 096813 Tile Carpeting ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 11 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM 098110 Acoustic Insulation and Sealant 099000 Painting DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 102813 Toilet Accessories 104400 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 113100 Residential Appliances DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 122113 Louver Blinds DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 1300 Fire*-Suppression Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 220500 Basic Plumbin Materials and Methods 220548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 221005 Plumbing Piping 221006 Plumbing Piping Specialties 224000 Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING(HVAC) 230500 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods 230593 Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing for HVAC 230713 Duct Insulation 230719 HVAC Piping Insulation 230913 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC 230923 Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC 232300 Reffierant Piping 233100 HVAC Ducts and Casings 233300 Air Duct Accessories 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators 233700 Air Outlets and Inlets 234000 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices 235400 Furnaces 237313 Energy Recovery Ventilation Units ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 12 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260001 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 260519 Conductors and Connectors 260526 Grounding 260533 Conduits,Raceways,Boxes,Fittings 260553 Identification 26 2000 Secondary Distribution System 262726 Wiring Devices 262816 Disconnect Switches 265100 Li htin DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 270500 Common Work Results For Communications 271000 Structured Cabling DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 281000 Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321313 Concrete Paving NOTE-If bid requires more table space to Gstpricrng detail Bidder is to submit information on additional copy of this form. Bidders Signature Print Corporate Name of Bidding Firm: Print Bidder Rep. Name and Title: Bidder Representative Signature: ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 13 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM ATTACHMENT B ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF ADDENDA CITY OF TIGARD, OREGON INVITATION TO BID TIGARD PUBLIC WORKS WATER BUILDING RENOVATION CLOSE:TUESDAY,MARCH 8,2007,2:00 PM I/WE HAVE RECEIVED THE FOLLOWING ADDENDA: knone received, write `None Received" 1. 3. 2. 4. Date Signature of Proposer Title Corporate Name ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 14 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM ATTACHMENT C BID CERTIFICATIONS Non-discrimination Clause The Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any client, employee or applicant for employment or for services, because of race, color,religion, sex,national origin,handicap or age with regard to,but not limited to, the following: employment upgrading, demotion or transfer;recruitment or recruitment advertising;layoffs or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; selection for training; rendition of services. It is further understood that any contractor who is in violation of this clause shall be barred from receiving awards of any purchase order or contract from the City, unless a satisfactory showing is made that discriminatory practices have terminated and that a recurrence of such acts is unlikely. Agreed by: Firm Name: Address: Resident Certificate Please Check One: ❑ Resident Vendor:Vendor has paid unemployment taxes and income taxes in this state during the last twelve calendar months immediately preceding the submission of this proposal. Or ❑ Non-resident Vendor:Vendor does not qualify under requirement stated above. (Please specify your state of residence: Officer's signature: Type or print officer's name: ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 15 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM ATTACHMENT D CITY OF TIGARD INVITATION TO BID FIRST TIER SUBCONTRACTOR DISCLOSURE FORM PROJECT NAME: BID#: •BID CLOSING:Date: Time: This form must be submitted at the location specified in the Invitation to Bid on the advertised bid closing date and within two working hours after the advertised bid closing time. List below the name of each subcontractor that will be fiuYiishing labor or will be furnishing labor and materials in connection with the public improvement and that is required to be disclosed,the category of work that the subcontractor will be performing and the dollar value of the subcontract. Enter "None" if there are no subcontractors that need to be disclosed. (Attach additional sheets if they are needea). NAME DOLLAR VALUE CATEGORY OF WORK 1) $ 2) $ 3) $ 4) $ Failure to submit this form by the disclosure deadline will result in a nonresponsive bid. A nonresponsive bid will not be considered for award. Form submitted by(Bidder's name): Contact Individual: Phone#: ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 16 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM ATTACHMENT E CITY OF TIGARD, OREGON PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT CONTRACT PROJECT TITLE THIS CONTRACT, made and entered into this (Day) day of(Month), (Year), by and between the City of Tigard, a municipal corporation of the State of Oregon, hereinafter called "City" and (Full Name & Address of Firm or Individual) hereinafter called "Contractor",duly authorized to perform such services in Oregon. RECITALS WHEREAS, the City requires services which Contractor is capable of providing,under terms and conditions hereinafter described;and WHEREAS, time is of the essence in this contract and all work under this contract shall be completed within the time period stated in the Bid Proposal; TERMS OF AGREEMENT THEREFORE,in consideration of the promises and covenants contained herein, the parties hereby agree as follows: 1. Services Contractor's services under this Agreement shall consist of the following: (Enter General Description of the Work and Include Sentences that Incorporate all Attached Documents (i.e. Detailed Scope of Work,Contractor's Bid, etc.) 2. Prevailing Wage The provisions of ORS Chapters 279A and 279C and all other Oregon and Federal provisions pertaining to minimum salaries and wages are incorporated herein by reference as if fully set forth. The Contractor agrees that the workmen in each trade or occupation required for the work to be done pursuant to the contract, employed in the performance of the Contract, either by the Contractor or Subcontractor or other person doing or contracting to do any part of the work contemplated by the Contractor shall be paid not less than the prevailing, minimum hourly rate of wage specified by the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor, and attached hereto. For contracts $50,000 or greater, the Contractor shall pay a fee equal to one-tenth of one percent (.001) of the price of the contract. The fee shall be paid on or before the first progress payment or 60 days from the date work first began on the contract,whichever comes first. The fee is payable to the Bureau of Labor and Industries and shall be mailed or otherwise delivered to the Bureau at the following address: Bureau of Labor and Industries Wage and Hours Division Prevailing Wage Unit 800 NE Oregon Street, # 32 Portland, Oregon 97232 Contractor shall provide proof to the City prior to the beginning of any of the work that the Contractor has filed a public works bond with a corporate surety in the amount of$30,000 with the Construction Contractors Board as required under Oregon PWR law. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 17 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM 3. Contract Documents The Contractor is hereby bound to comply with all requirements of this agreement, the Contractor's proposal, the detailed specifications and requirements, the drawings, and the special conditions and modifications in conditions as set forth in the documents prepared by the City Engineer and the performance pertaining to this contract, in the City of Tigard, Oregon, and by this reference made a part hereof to the same legal force and effect as if set forth herein in full. 4. City's Representative For purposes hereof, the City's authorized representative will be the City Engineer, 13125 SW Hall Blvd.,Tigard, Oregon 97223;Telephone: 639-4171. 5. Contractor's Representative For purpose hereof, the Contractor's authorized representative will be (Enter Representative's Name). 6. Contractor Identification Contractor shall furnish to the City the Contractor's employer identification number, as designated by the Internal Revenue Service,or Contractor's social security number,as City deems applicable. 7. Compensation A. Progress Payments: City agrees to pay Contractor (Enter amount in written form) Dollars ($Enter amount in numerical form) for performance of those services provided hereunder, which payment shall be based upon the following applicable terms: Payment shall be based upon the unit prices bid by the Contractor, as listed in attached proposal. Contractor shall prepare and submit each month to the City Engineer, 13125 SW Hall Blvd., Tigard, Oregon 97223, a statement of services rendered, (indicating the description of each service used in the proposal and the dollar amount of each service completed through the stated date), together with a request for payment duly verified by the Contractor's Representative. Payment by the City shall release the City from any further obligation for payment to Contractor for services performed or expenses incurred as of the date of the statement of services. Payment of installments shall not be considered acceptance or approval of any work or waiver of any defects therein. City certifies that sufficient funds are available and authorized for expenditure to finance costs of this contract. Contractor shall include proof of payment to any and all subcontractors and suppliers with each statement submitted to the City. The City shall retain the right to withhold payments if required proof of payment to subcontractor and suppliers is not included with a statement. As required under State of Oregon Prevailing Wage Rate (PWR) Law, the City shall withhold 25% of any progress payment amounts owed to Contractor if Contractor has failed to file certified payrolls sheets with the City IZB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 18 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM B. Timing of Payments: Progress payments, less a five percent retainage as authorized by ORS 279C.555, shall be made to the Contractor within twenty (20) days of the City's receipt of the statement of services. The Contractor agrees that the "Time of Completion" is defined in the Bid Proposal, and agrees to complete the work by said date. The Contractor and City agree that the City will suffer damages each day the work remains uncompleted after the Time of Completion and that the amounts of those damages are difficult to calculate. Contractor and City agree that a reasonable amount of damages for late completion is S per day and Contractor agrees to pay damages in that amount if the work is not completed by the Time of Completion. C. Final Payment: The Contractor shall notify the City in writing when the Contractor considers the project complete, and the City shall, within 15 days after receiving the written notice, either accept the work or notify the Contractor of work yet to be performed on the contract. Upon acceptance by the City, the entire balance due to the Contractor,including the retained percentage, shall be paid to the Contractor, by the City within 30 days after the date of said final acceptance. The City shall pay to the Contractor interest at the rate of one and one-half percent per month on the final payment due the Contractor, to commence 30 days after the work under the Contract has been completed and accepted and to run until the date when final payment is tendered to the Contractor. If the City does not, within 15 days after receiving written notice"of completion, notify the Contractor of work yet to be performed to fulfill contractual obligations, the interest provided by this subsection shall commence to run 30 days after the end of the 15-day period. As a further conditions of final acceptance, the City may require the Contractor to submit evidence, satisfactory to the City's Representative, that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the project have been paid, except that in case of any disputed indebtedness or liens, the Contractor may submit in lieu of evidence of payment, a surety bond satisfactory to the City guaranteeing payment of all such disputed amounts when adjudicated in cases where such payment has not already been guaranteed by surety bond. 8. Status Of Contractor As Independent Contractor Contractor certifies that: A. Contractor acknowledges that for all purposes related to this Agreement, Contractor is and shall be deemed to be an independent Contractor as defined by ORS 670.600 and not an employee of City, shall not be entitled to benefits of any kind to which an employee of City is entitled and shall be solely responsible for all payments and taxes required by law. Furthermore, in the event that Contractor is found by a court of law or any administrative agency to be an employee of City for any purpose, City shall be entitled to offset compensation due, or to demand repayment of any amounts paid to Contractor under the terms of this Agreement, to the full extent of any benefits or other remuneration Contractor receives (from City or third party) as a result of said finding and to the full extent of any payments that City is required to make (to Contractor or to a third party) as a result of said finding. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 19 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM B. The undersigned Contractor hereby represents that no employee of the City, or any partnership or corporation in which a City employee has an interest, has or will receive any remuneration of any description from Contractor, either directly or indirectly, in connection with the letting or performance of this Agreement, except as specifically declared in writing. C. If this payment is to be charged against Federal funds, Contractor certifies that he or she is not currently employed by the Federal Government and the amount charged does not exceed his or her normal charge for the type of service provided. D. Contractor and its employees, if any, are not active members of the Oregon Public Employees Retirement System and are not employed for a total of 600 hours or more in the calendar year by any public employer participating in the Retirement System. E. Contractor certifies that it currently has a City business license or will obtain one prior to delivering services under this Agreement. F. Contractor is not an officer, employee, or agent of the City as those terms are used in ORS 30.265. 9. Subcontracts -Assignment&Delegation Contractor shall submit a list of Subcontractors for approval by the City, and Contractor shall be fully responsible for the acts or omissions of any Subcontractors and of all persons employed by them, and neither the approval by City of any Subcontractor nor anything contained herein shall be deemed to create any contractual relation between the Subcontractor and City. This agreement, and all of the covenants and conditions hereof, shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the City and the Contractor respectively and their legal representatives. Contractor shall not assign any rights nor delegate any duties incurred by this contract, or any part hereof without the written consent of City, and any assignment or delegation in violation hereof shall be void. Any and all subcontracts issued by the contractor shall contain a provision that workers shall be paid not less that the PVR Law specified minimum wage. 10. Contractor- Payment of Benefits - Hours of Work A. The Contractor shall: 1) Make payment promptly, as due, to all persons supplying to such Contractor labor or material for the prosecution of the work provided for in this contract; 2) Pay all contributions or amounts due the under the Industrial Accident Fund form the Contractor or subcontractor incurred in the performance of this Agreement; 3) Pay to the Department of Revenue all sums withheld from employees pursuant to ORS 316.167. 4) Not permit any lien or claim to be filed or prosecuted against the City of Tigard, on account of any labor or material fiiriiished; ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 20 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM B. The Contractor or the Contractor's Surety and every Subcontractor or the Subcontractor's Surety shall file certified statements with the City in writing in form prescribed by the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries, certifying the hourly rate of wage paid each worker which the Contractor or the Subcontractor has employed upon such public work, and fin-ther certifying that no worker employed upon such public work has been paid less than the prevailing rate of wage, which certificate and statement shall be verified by the oath of the Contractor or the Contractor's Surety or Subcontractor or the Subcontractor's Surety that the Contractor or Subcontractor has read- such statement and certificate and knows the contents thereof and that the same is true to the Contractor's or Subcontractor's knowledge. 1) The certified statements shall set out accurately and completely the payroll records for the prior week, including the same and address of each worker, the worker's correct classification, rate of pay, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. 2) Each certified statement required herein shall be delivered or mailed by the Contractor or Subcontractor to the City. A true copy of the certified statements shall also be filed at the same time with the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries. Certified statements shall be submitted as follows: a) For any project 90 days or less from the date of the award of the contract to the date of completion of work under the contract, the statements shall be submitted once before the first payment is made, and once before final payment is made of any sum due on account of the contract. b) For any project exceeding 90 days from the date of the award of the contract to the date of completion of work under contract, the statements shall be submitted once before the first payment is made, at 90 day intervals thereafter, and once before final payment is made of any sum due on account of the contract. C) Each Contractor or Subcontractor shall preserve certified statements for a period of three years from the date of completion of the contract. C. The Contractor agrees that if the Contractor fails, neglects or refuses to make prompt payment of any claim for labor or services furnished to the Contractor or a Subcontractor by any person in connection with this contract as such claim becomes due, the proper office of the City of Tigard may pay such claim to the person furnishing the labor or services and charge the amount of the payment against funds due or to become due to the Contractor by reason of such contract. Payment of a claim in this manner shall not relieve the Contractor or the Contractor's Surety from obligation with respect to any unpaid claims. D. Contractor agrees that no person shall be employed for more than eight (8) hours in any one day, or forty (40) hours in any one week, except in cases of necessity, emergency or where the City of Tigard absolutely requires it, and in such cases the laborer shall be paid at least time and a half pay for all overtime in excess of eight (8) hours a day and for work performed on Saturday and on any legal holiday as specified in ORS 279C.540. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 21 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM E. No City employee shall be required to work overtime or on a Saturday, Sunday or holiday in the fulfillment of this contract except where the Contractor agrees to reimburse the City in the amount of money paid the employee for such work as determined by state law, the.City's personnel rules or union agreement. The Contractor shall require every Subcontractor to comply with this requirement. F. If Contractor or any first-tier subcontractor fails to pay a person furnishing labor or material within 30 days after receipt of payment form the City or from the Contractor to a subcontractor, the Contractor or first-tier subcontractor shall owe the person the amount due plus interest commending at the end of the 10 day period that the payment is due under ORS 2790,580, unless payment is subject to a good-faith dispute. The interest rate shall be as specified in ORS 279C.505(2). If the Contractor or any subcontractor fails, neglects, or refuses to pay a person furnishing labor or material, the person may file a complaint with the Construction Contractors Board, unless the payment is subject to a good faith dispute as defined in ORS 279C.580. G. Contractor shall include a clause in each contact with a subcontractor a requirement that the contractor pay the subcontractor for satisfactory performance within 10 days of receipt of payment from the City for the work. Contractor shall include in contracts with subcontractors an interest provision for such payments in compliance with ORS 279C.580. Contractor shall include a clause in each contract with a subcontractor requiring the subcontractor to meet the same payment and interest standards as required by ORS 279C.580 (4). 11. Drug Testing Program ORS 279C.505 requires that all public improvement contracts contain a provision requiring contractors to demonstrate that an employee drug-testing program is in place. The Contractor demonstrates that a drug-testing program is in place by signing of the contact. The drug testing program will apply to all employees and will be maintained for the duration of the Contract awarded. Failure to maintain a program shall constitute a material breach of contract. 12. Contractor's Employee Medical Payments Contractor agrees to pay promptly as due, to any person, co-partnership, association or corporation famishing medical, surgical, and hospital care or other needed care and attention incident to sickness or injury to the Contractor's employees, all sums which the Contractor agreed to pay for such services and all money and sums which the Contractor collected or deducted from employee wages pursuant to any law, contract or agreement for providing or paying for such service. 13. Earjy Termination A. This agreement may be terminated without cause prior to the expiration of the agreed upon term by mutual written consent of the parties and for the following reasons: 1) If work under the Contract is suspended by an order of a public agency for any reason considered to be in the public interest other than by a labor dispute or by reason of any third party judicial proceeding relating to the work other than a suit or action filed in regard to a labor dispute;or 2) If the circumstances or conditions are such that it is impracticable within a reasonable time to proceed with a substantial portion of the Contract. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 22 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM B. Payment of Contractor shall be as provided by ORS 279C.660 and shall be prorated to and include the day of termination and shall be in full satisfaction of all claims by Contractor against City under this Agreement. C. Tern ination under any provision of this paragraph shall not affect any right, obligation, or liability of Contractor or City which accrued prior to such termination. 14. Cancellation with Cause A. City may terminate this Agreement effective upon delivery of written notice to Contractor, or at such later date as may be established by City,under any of the following conditions: 1) If City funding from federal, state, local, or other sources is not obtained and continued at levels sufficient to allow for the purchase of the indicated quantity of services. This Agreement may be modified to accommodate a reduction in funds, 2) If Federal or State regulations or guidelines are modified, changed, or interpreted in such a way that the services are no longer allowable or appropriate for purchase under this Agreement, 3) If any license or certificate required by law or regulation to be held by Contractor, its subcontractors, agents, and employees to provide the services required by this Agreement is for any reason denied,revoked, or not renewed, or 4) If Contractor becomes insolvent,if voluntary or involuntary petition in bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, if a receiver or trustee is appointed for Contractor, or if there is an assignment for the benefit of creditors of Contractor. Any such termination of this agreement under paragraph (a) shall be without prejudice to any obligations or liabilities of either party already accrued prior to such termination. B. City, by written notice of default (including breach of contract) to Contractor, may terminate the whole or any part of this Agreement: 1) If Contractor fails to provide services called for by this agreement within the time specified herein or any extension thereof,or 2) If Contractor fails to perform any of the other provisions of this Agreement, or so fails to pursue the work as to endanger performance of this agreement in accordance with its terms, and after receipt of written notice from City, fails to correct such failures within ten (10) days or such other period as City may authorize. The rights and remedies of City provided in the above clause related to defaults (including breach of contract) by Contractor shall not be exclusive and are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this Agreement. If City terminates this Agreement under paragraph (b), Contractor shall be entitled to receive as full payment for all services satisfactorily rendered and expenses incurred,an amount which bears the same ratio to the total fees specified in this Agreement as the services satisfactorily rendered by Contractor bear to the total services otherwise required to be performed for such total fee; provided, that there shall be deducted from such amount the amount of damages, if any, sustained by City due to breach of contract by Contractor. Damages for breach of contract shall be those allowed by Oregon law, reasonable and necessary attorney fees, and other costs of litigation at trial and upon appeal.3 ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 23 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM 15. Access to Records City shall have access to such book, documents, papers and records of Contractor as are directly pertinent to this Agreement for the purpose of making audit, examination,excerpts,and transcripts. 16. Work is Property of Citi All work performed by Contractor under this Agreement shall be the property of the City. 17. Adherence to Law A. Contractor shall adhere to all applicable laws governing its relationship with its employees, including but not limited to laws, rules, regulations, and policies concerning workers' compensation, and minimum and prevailing wage requirements. B. To the extent applicable, the Contractor represents that it will comply with Executive Order 11246 as amended, Executive Order 11141, Section 503 of the Vocational Rehabilitation Act of 1973 as amended and the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, and all rules and regulations issued pursuant to the Acts. C. As provided by ORS 279C.525, all applicable provisions of federal, state or local statutes, ordinances and regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of natural resources that affect the work under this contract are by reference incorporated herein to the same force and affect as if set forth herein in full. If the Contractor must undertake additional work due to the enactment of new or the amendment of existing statutes, ordinances or regulations occurring after the submission of the successful bid, the City shall issue a Change Order setting forth the additional work that must be undertaken. The Change Order shall not invalidate the Contract and there shall be, in addition to a reasonable extension,if necessary, of the contract time, a reasonable adjustment in the contract price, if necessary, to compensate the Contractor for all costs and expenses incurred,including overhead and profits, as a result of the delay or additional work. 18. Changes City may at any time, and without notice, issue a written Change Order requiring additional work within the general scope of this Contract, or any amendment thereto, or directing the omission of or variation in work. If such Change Order results in a material change in the amount or character of the work, an equitable adjustment in the Contract price and other provisions of this Contract as may be affected may be made. Any claim by Contractor for and adjustment under this section shall be asserted in writing within thirty (30) days from the date of receipt by Contractor of the notification of change or the claim will not be allowed. Whether made pursuant to this section or by mutual agreement, no change shall be binding upon City until a Change Order is executed by the Authorized Representative of City, which expressly states that it constitutes a Change Order to this Contract. The issuance of information, advice, approvals, or instructions by City's Representative or other City personnel shall not constitute an authorized change pursuant to this section. Nothing contained in this section shall excuse the Contractor from proceeding with the prosecution of the work in accordance with the Contract,as changed. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 24 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM 19. Force Majeure Neither City nor Contractor shall be considered in default because of any delays in completion of responsibilities hereunder due to causes beyond the control and without fault or negligence on the part of the party so disenabled, including, but not restricted to, an act of God or of a public enemy, volcano, earthquake, fire, flood, epidemic, quarantine, restriction, area-wide strike, freight embargo, unusually severe weather or delay of Subcontractor or suppliers due to such cause; provided that the party so disenabled shall within ten (10) days from the beginning of such delay, notify the other party in writing of the causes of delay and its probable extent. Such notification shall not be the basis for a claim for additional compensation. Each party shall, however, make all reasonable efforts to remove or eliminate such a cause of delay or default and shall, upon cessation of the cause, diligently pursue performance of its obligation under Contract. 20. Nonwaiver The failure of the City to insist upon or enforce strict performance by Contractor of any of the terms of this contract or to exercise any rights hereunder shall not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment to any extent of its right to assert or rely upon such terms or rights on any future occasion. 21. Warranties All work shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one year after the date of final acceptance of the work by the Owner. Contractor warrants that all practices and procedures, workmanship, and materials shall be the best available unless otherwise specified in the profession. Neither acceptance of the work nor payment therefore shall relieve Contractor from liability under warranties contained in or implied by this contract. 22. Attorney's Fees In case suit or action is instituted to enforce the provisions of this contract, the parties agree that the losing party shall pay such sum as the Court may adjudge reasonable attorney's fees and court costs including attorney's fees and court costs on appeal. 23. Governing Law The provisions of this Agreement shall be construed in accordance with the provisions of the laws of the State of Oregon. Any action or suits involving any questions arising under this Agreement must be brought in the appropriate court of the State of Oregon. 24. Conffict Between Terms It is further expressly agreed by and between the parties hereto that should there be any conflict between the terms of this instrument and the proposal of the Contractor, this instrument shall control and nothing herein shall be considered as an acceptance of the said terms of said proposal conflicting herewith. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 25 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM 25. Indemnification Contractor warrants that all its work will be performed in accordance with generally accepted professional practices and standards as well as the requirements of applicable federal, state and local laws, it being understood that acceptance of a contractor's work by City shall not operate as a waiver or release. Contractor agrees to indemnify and defend the City, its officers, agents and employees and hold them harmless from any and all liability, causes of action, claims,losses, damages,judgments or other costs or expenses including attorney's fees and witness costs and (at both trial and appeal level, whether or not a trial or appeal ever takes place) that may be asserted by any person or entity which in any way arise from, during or in connection with the performance of the work described in this contract, except liability arising out of the negligence of the City and its employees. If any aspect of this indemnity shall be found to be illegal or invalid for any reason whatsoever, such illegality or invalidity shall not affect the validity of the remainder of this indemnification. 26. Insurance Contractor and its subcontractors shall maintain insurance acceptable to City in full force and effect throughout the term of this contract. Such insurance shall cover all risks arising directly or indirectly out of Contractors activities or work hereunder,including the operations of its subcontractors of any tier. Such insurance shall include provisions that such insurance is primary insurance with respect to the interests of City and that any other insurance maintained by City is excess and not contributory insurance with the insurance required hereunder. The policy or policies of insurance maintained by the Contractor and its subcontractor shall provide at least the following limits and coverages: A. Commercial General Liability Insurance: Contractor shall obtain, at contractor's expense, and keep in effect during the term of this contract, Comprehensive General Liability Insurance covering Bodily Injury and Property Damage on an "occurrence" form (1996 ISO or equivalent). This coverage shall include Contractual Liability insurance for the indemnity provided under this contract. The following insurance will be carried: Coverage Limit General Aggregate $2,000,000 Products-Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000 Personal&Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Fire Damage (Any one fire) $50,000 Medical Expense (Any one person) $5,000 B. Commercial Automobile Insurance: Contractor shall also obtain, at contractor's expense, and keep in effect during the term of the contract, "Symbol 1" Commercial Automobile Liability coverage including coverage for all owned, hired, and non-owned vehicles. The Combined Single Limit per occurrence shall not be less than $1,000,000. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 26 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM C. Workers' Compensation Insurance: The Contractor, its subcontractors, if any, and all employers providing work, labor or materials under this Contract are subject employers under the Oregon Workers' Compensation Law and shall comply with ORS 656.017, which requires them to provide workers' compensation coverage that satisfies Oregon law for all their subject workers. Out-of-state employers must provide Oregon workers' compensation coverage for their workers who work at a single location within Oregon for more than 30 days in a calendar year. Contractors who perform work without the assistance or labor of any employee need not to obtain such coverage." This shall include Employer's Liability Insurance with coverage limits of not less than$100,000 each accident. D. Additional Insured Provision: The City of Tigard, Oregon, its officers, directors, and employees shall be added as additional insureds with respect to this contract. All Liability Insurance policies will be endorsed to show this additional coverage. E. Notice of Cancellation: There shall be no cancellation, material change, exhaustion of aggregate limits or intent not to renew insurance coverage without 30 days written notice to the City. Any failure to comply with this provision will not affect the insurance coverage provided to the City. The 30 days notice of cancellation provision shall be physically endorsed on to the policy. F. Insurance Carrier Rating: Coverage provided by the Contractor must be underwritten by an insurance company deemed acceptable by the City. The City reserves the right to reject all or any insurance carriers)with an unacceptable financial rating. G. Certificates of Insurance: As evidence of the insurance coverage required by the contract, the contractor shall fiunish a Certificate of Insurance to the City. No contract shall be effected until the required certificates have been received and approved by the City. The certificate will specify and document all provisions within this contract. A renewal certificate will be sent to the above address 10 days prior to coverage expiration. H. Independent Contractor Status: The service or services to be rendered under this contract are those of an independent contractor. Contractor is not an officer, employee or agent of the City as those terms are used in ORS 30.265. I. Primary Coverage Clarification: All parties to this contract hereby agree that the contractor's coverage will be primary in the event of a loss. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 27 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM J. Cross-Liability Clause: A cross-liability clause or separation of insureds clause will be included in all general liability, professional liability, pollution and errors and omissions policies required by this contract. Contractor's insurance policy shall contain provisions that such policies shall not be canceled or their limits of liability reduced without thirty (30) days prior notice to City. A copy of each insurance policy, certified as a true copy by an authorized representative of the issuing insurance company, or at the discretion of City, in lieu thereof, a certificate in form satisfactory to City certifying to the issuance of such insurance shall be forwarded to: City of Tigard Atm: Joe Barrett,Buyer 13125 SW Hall Blvd. Tigard, Oregon 97223 Such policies or certificates must be delivered prior to commencement of the work. Ten days cancellation notice shall be provided City by certified mail to the name at the address listed above in event of cancellation or non-renewal of the insurance. The procuring of such required insurance shall not be construed to limit contractor's liability hereunder. Notwithstanding said insurance, Contractor shall be obligated for the total amount of any damage,injury,or loss caused by negligence or neglect connected with this contract. 27. Method and Place of Giving Notice, Submitting Bills and Making Payments All notices, bills and payments shall be made in writing and may be given by personal delivery or by mail. Notices,bills and payments sent by mail should be addressed as follows: City of Tigard Contractor's Firm Name): Atm: name&title of person letting contract) Atm: insert contract manager's name) 13125 SW Hall Blvd.,Tigard, Oregon 97223 Address: insert contract manager's address) Phone: 503-639-4171 ext. insert#) Phone: insert#) Fax: insert#) Fax: insert#) Email Address: insert address) Email Address: insert address) and when so addressed, shall be deemed given upon deposit in the United States mail, postage prepaid. In all other instances,notices, bills and payments shall be deemed given at the time of actual delivery. Changes may be made in the names and addresses of the person to whom notices, bills and payments are to be given by giving written notice pursuant to this paragraph. 28. Hazardous Materials Contractor shall supply City with a list of any and all hazardous substances used in performance of this Agreement. That list shall identify the location of storage and use of all such hazardous substances and identify the amounts stored and used at each location. Contractor shall provide City with material safety data sheets for all hazardous substances brought onto City property, created on City property or delivered to City pursuant to this Agreement. For the purpose of this section, "hazardous substance" means hazardous substance as defined by ORS 453.307(4). Contractor shall complete the State Fire Marshall's hazardous substance survey as required by ORS 453.317 and shall assist City to complete any such survey that it may be required to complete because of substances used in the performance of this Agreement. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 28 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM 29. Hazardous Waste If, as a result of performance of this Agreement, Contractor generates any hazardous wastes, Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of any such hazardous wastes in compliance with all applicable federal and state requirements. Contractors shall provide City with documentation, including all required manifests, demonstrating proper transportation and disposal of any such hazardous wastes. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless City for any disposal or storage of hazardous wastes generated pursuant to this Contract and any releases or discharges of hazardous materials. 30. Severability In the event any provision or portion of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable or invalid by any court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect and shall in no way be affected or invalidated thereby. 31. Demolition—Salvage and Recycling As required by ORS 279C.510, Contractor shall salvage or recycle any construction and demolition debris if feasible and cost-effective. 32. Complete Agreement This Agreement and attached exhibits constitutes the entire Agreement between the parties. No waiver, consent, modification, or change of terms of this Agreement shall bind either party unless in writing and signed by both parties. Such waiver, consent, modification, or change if made, shall be effective only in specific instances and for the specific purpose given. There are no understandings, agreements, or representations, oral or written, not specified herein regarding this Agreement. Contractor, by the signature of its authorized representative, hereby acknowledges that he has read this Agreement,understands it and agrees to be bound by its terms and conditions. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused this agreement to be executed by its duly authorized undersigned officer, acting pursuant to authorization of the City Council, duly passed at the regular meeting held on the (Day) day of(Month), (Year), and the Contractor has executed this agreement on the date herein above first written. CITY OF TIGARD CONTRACTOR Signature Signature Printed Name dam'Title Printed Name dam'Title Date Date ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 29 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM CITY OF TIGARD, OREGON PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, (Official Name dam'Form of Organisation) Whose address is: (StreetAddress) as Principal, and, (City) (State) (gyp) (Name of Surety) (Street Address of Surety) (City) (State) i (Zp) (Pant-Agent/ Contact Name) (Phone Number) a corporation duly authorized to conduct a general surety business in the State of Oregon, as Surety,are jointly and severally held and bound unto the City of Tigard, Oregon, a municipality of the State of Oregon, hereinafter called Obligee,in the sum of and /100 DOLLARS ($ ) (The Bare Contract Price,Both in i�ords dam'Figures) ' lawful money of the United State of America, for the payment of which we, as Principal, and as Surety,jointly and severally bind ourselves, our successors and assigns firmly by these presents, F THE CONDITIONS OF THIS BOND AND OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT WHEREAS, on the (Day) day of(Month), (Year), (Name of Contractor) the Principal herein, entered into a contract with the City of Tigard, Oregon, the Obligee herein, for the furnishings of materials, labor, and equipment and other requirements for the performance of certain improvements as more fully set forth in contract documents as described in said contract all of which are by reference made a part hereof, ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM Page 30 NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal herein shall faithfully and truly observe and comply with the terms of the contract and shall not permit any lien or claim to be filed or prosecution against the City on account of any labor or material fiunished, and shall promptly pay all contributions or amounts due the State Unemployment Compensation Trust Fund incurred to the performance of said contract and shall promptly, as due, make payments to the person, co-partnership, association, or corporation entitled thereto of the money and sums mentioned in Section 2790,600 of the Oregon Revised Statutes, and shall promptly pay over to the Oregon State Tax Commission all sums required to be deducted and retained from wages of employees of the Principal and his sub-Contractors, pursuant to the Section 316.711, Oregon Revised Statues, then this obligation is to be void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The total amount of the Surety's liability under this bond both to the Obligee and to the persons furnishing labor or materials, provisions and goods to any person or persons, shall in no event exceed the penalty thereof. Provided, however, that the conditions of this obligation shall not apply to any money loaned or advanced to the Principal or to any sub-Contractor or other person in the performance of any such work, whether specifically provided for in the contract or not. This bond is executed for the purpose of complying with Chapter 279 of Title 26, Oregon Revised Statutes, the provisions of which are hereby incorporated herein and made a part hereof. Said Surety for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alternation, or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in anywise affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or the specifications. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 31 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Bond to be executed in Portland, Oregon, this (Day) day of(Month), (Year). Contractor Principal Signature Principal Printed Name Witnesses: Surety (A true copy of the Power of Attorney must be attached to the original of this bond) Surety Attorney of Fact Countersigned: Resident Agent ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 32 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM CITY OF TIGARD,OREGON PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, (Official Name dam'Form of OqaniZation) Whose address is: (StreetAddrers) (City) (State) (zip) as Principal,and, (Name ofSurety) (StreetAddress of Surety) (City) (State) (Zip) (Print-Agent/ Contact Name) (Phone Number) a corporation duly authorized to conduct a general surety business in the State of Oregon,as Surety,are jointly and severally held and bound unto the City of Tigard, Oregon, a municipality of the State of Oregon, hereinafter called Obligee,in the sum of and /100 DOLLARS ($ ), (The Bare Contract Price, Bab in Wlords dam'Figures) lawful money of the United State of America, for the payment of which we, as Principal, and as Surety,jointly and severally bind ourselves, our successors and assigns firmly by these presents, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS BOND AND OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT WHEREAS, on the (Day) day of(Month), (Year), (Name of Contractor) the Principal herein, entered into a contract with the City of Tigard, Oregon, the Obligee herein, for the fiunishings of materials, labor, and equipment and other requirements for the performance of certain improvements as more fully set forth in contract documents as described in said contract all of which are by reference made a part hereof, ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 33 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal herein shall faithfully and truly observe and comply with the terms of the contract and shall not permit any lien or claim to be filed or prosecution against the City on account of any labor or material furnished, and shall promptly pay all contributions or amounts due the State Unemployment Compensation Trust Fund incurred to the performance of said contract and shall promptly, as due, make payments to the person, co-partnership, association, or corporation entitled thereto of the money and sutras mentioned in Section 279C.600 of the Oregon Revised Statutes, and shall promptly pay over to the Oregon State Tax Commission all sums required to be deducted and retained from wages of employees of the Principal and his sub-Contractors, pursuant to the Section 316.711, Oregon Revised Statues, then this obligation is to be void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The total amount of the Surety's liability under this bond both to the Obligee and to the persons furnishing labor or materials, provisions and goods to any person or persons, shall in no event exceed the penalty thereof Provided, however, that the conditions of this obligation shall not apply to any money loaned or advanced to the Principal or to any sub-Contractor or other person in the performance of any such work, whether specifically provided for in the contract or not. This bond is executed for the purpose of complying with Chapter 279 of Title 26, Oregon Revised Statutes, the provisions of which are hereby incorporated herein and made a part hereof. Said Surety for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alternation, or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in anywise affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or the specifications. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 34 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Bond to be executed in Portland, Oregon, this (Day) day of(Month), (Year). Contractor Principal Signature Principal Printed Name Witnesses: Surety (A true copy of the Power of Attorney must be attached to the original of this bond) Surety Attorney of Fact Countersigned: Resident Agent ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 35 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM ENGINEER'S SIGNATURE AND SEAL The Special Provisions contained herein have been prepared by or under the direction of the following Registered Engineer. ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 36 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM SPECIAL PROVISIONS (For Template Agreement) ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 37 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM DRAWINGS (For Template Agreement) ITB—Tigard Public Works,Water Building Renovation Page 38 Close—Tuesday,March 8,2007,2:00 PM Tigard Public Works Summary of Work: 01 1100 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Scope of work. 2. Type of Contract. 3. Work of Other Contracts. 4. Use of premises. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification formats and conventions. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Project Identification: Tigard Public Works, Water Building Renovation. 1. Project Location: 8777 SW Burnham Street, Tigard, Oregon. B. Owner: City of Tigard, 13125 SW Hall Blvd., Tigard, Oregon 97223. C. Architect: LRS Architects, Inc., 1121 SW Salmon, Suite 100, Portland, Oregon 97205. 1. Contract Documents prepared for the Project by LRS Architects, Inc. are dated February 5, 2007. D. The Work of the Contract includes tenant improvement renovations as indicated in the Drawings and as specified in this Project Manual, including Modifications incorporated into the Contract Documents. 1. Project consists of a one story, Type V-N construction, masonry frame public building, B and A3 Occupancies at area of work, with fire sprinklers. 1.3 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Concurrent Work: 1. Owner has or will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract: a. Equipment identified as OFOI. 2. Products furnished by Owner and installed by Owner are identified as OFOI (Owner Furnished, Owner Installed). 3. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under other contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work of this Contract. 4. Provide access to site and coordinate work according to the General Conditions of the Contract. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Summary of Work: 01 1100 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. If Work of other contractors in any way interferes with the Contractor's Work, notify party sufficiently in advance to give reasonable time to make necessary adjustments. C. If the Contractor's Work in any way interferes with the work of other contractors, notify other party and Owner as soon as possible and modify schedule to accommodate the other party's work, or make other arrangements to accommodate other contractors work as agreed to by Owner. D. Contractor recognizes that Owner is entitled, under the Contract Documents, to perform Work on site during the course of Contractor's performance, whether by Owner's forces, consultants, or separate contractors. 1.5 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall confine construction operations, including storage of materials and equipment, to within the staging area established by the Owner. 1. Contractor's use of area established for construction operations is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other Contractors for portions of Project. 2. Use of Owner's property outside staging area will not be permitted except under unusual circumstances for limited periods of time as approved by Owner. B. Maintain clear access to project at all times for emergency vehicles, delivery of materials, and Owner and Owner's employees access. C. Contractor shall make arrangements with city and county agencies for use of public property for construction purposes and pay all fees required for such use. D. Contractor is responsible for necessary cleaning and repair of adjacent streets resulting from Contractor's operations. E. Use of Existing Building: 1. Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout the construction period. 2. Allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public. a. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. b. Schedule Work to accommodate this requirement. 3. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 4. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. On Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working hours of 8 AM to 5 PM, Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Summary of Work: 01 1100 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 49 Division format and The Construction Specifications Institute's (CSI) "MasterFormat" 2004 Edition numbering system. 1. Division 01 -General Requirements: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations, as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: a. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. b. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. C. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. d. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words as singular, where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. a. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be preformed by Contractor. b. Subjective or indicative language may be used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. C. The words "shall," "shall be," or"shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Alternates: 01 2300 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on Bid Form for certain work defined in Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Owner reserves right to select any or all of alternates up to thirty calendar days after award of Contract, unless otherwise stated in Bidding Requirements. B. Coordination: Modify or adjust of affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not described as part of alternate. C. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify in writing each party involved of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. D. Execute accepted alternates under same conditions as other Work of the Contract. E. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Drawings, and Specification Sections referenced in the schedule, contain requirements and materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 PRODUCTS (not applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: Retain existing aluminum-framed entrances indicated to be removed on Drawings. B. Alternate No. 2: Delete Specification Section 12 2113 Louver Blinds. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Substitution Procedures: 01 2500 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedures for the following: 1. Contractor's responsibilities concerning substitutions. 2. Substitutions requests during the bidding period. 3. Substitutions requests after award of Contract. 4. Substitutions not permitted. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4200: Definitions and Reference Standards, for applicability of industry standards to products specified. 2. Section 01 6000: Product Requirements, for requirements governing Contractor's selection of products and product options. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Contractor proposals for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents made during bidding and after award of Contract are considered to be requests for substitution. 1. The following are not considered to be requests for substitution: a. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by Owner or Architect. b. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's determination of and compliance with regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. B. Substitutions accepted during the bidding period are accepted by Addendum prior to award of Contract, and thereafter are included in the Contract Documents. C. Substitutions requested and accepted after award of contract are accepted only by Change Order, and thereafter are included in the Contract Documents. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor's responsibilities for substitution requests made after award of Contract are as follows: 1. Investigate proposed products and determine they are equal or superior in all respects to products specified. 2. Provide same guarantee for accepted substitutions as for products specified. 3. Make changes in, and coordinate, the Work as may be required to incorporate and install accepted substitutions. 4. Waive all claims for additional costs that subsequently become apparent which are related to substitutions. 1.4 SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Acceptability of different materials or products shall be determined by methods set forth in this Section. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Substitution Procedures: 01 2500 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. Architect will be sole judge of acceptability of any proposed substitution, and decision of Architect will be final. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS DURING THE BIDDING PERIOD A. Submit request for approval of a substitution on CSI Substitution Request Form; Copy included at the end of this Section. B. All substitution requests must be received in the Architect's office no less than 5 working days prior to Bid Date, unless otherwise stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS REQUESTED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT A. Substitutions will normally not be considered after award of Contract, except due to unforeseen circumstances. B. Architect will receive and consider Contractor's request for substitution after award of Contract when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions are not met, Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. The specified product cannot be provided within the Contract time. a. Architect will not consider the request if the product cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 2. The specified product cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. 3. The specified product cannot be coordinated with other materials and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 4. The specified product cannot provide the required warranty and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the warranty. 5. The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, or other considerations after deducting additional Owner's cost of compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction, and similar considerations. C. Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval. 2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS NOT PERMITTED A. Substitutions indicated or implied on submitted Shop Drawings or Product Data without first requesting approval in accordance with requirements of this Section. B. Where manufacturers, products, or systems listed in the Specifications are not followed with "or approved" or"Substitutions: Provide in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500," it is intended that substitutions are not permitted. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. SUBSTITUTION REQUEST TO: PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: Section Page Paragraph Description PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of request including identification of applicable portions. Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents that proposed substitution requires for proper installation. Undersigned certifies following items, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. Undersigned pays for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts available locally or readily obtainable for proposed substitution. Undersigned further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. Undersigned agrees, if this page is reproduced, terms and conditions for substitutions found in Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution. Submitted by: Name (Printed or typed) General Contractor(if after award of Contract) Signature For use by A/E Firm Name ❑Approved []Approved as noted Address ❑Not Approved ❑Received too late City, State, Zip By Date Date Telephone Fax Remarks The Construction Specifications Institute September 1997 Northwest Region Advamwnwtt of Constnxdon T-hnoloyy Tigard Public Works Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing the following Contract modifications: 1. Requests for Interpretation. 2. Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 3. Proposal Requests. 4. Construction Change Directives. 5. Change Orders. B. Related Documents and Sections: 1. Document 00 7200: General Conditions. 2. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures, for administrative procedures for handling request for substitutions made after Contract award. 3. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures, for requirements for inclusion of contract modifications in record documents. 1.2 RESPONSIBLE PARTIES A. Immediately following Contract execution, Owner and Contractor to identify each person who is responsible for executing Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Request for Interpretation (RFI): 1. Written request submitted by Contractor to Architect on standard form requesting interpretation of Contract documents. 2. An RFI shall only be used as a vehicle for confirming or verifying an issue through an interpretation of the Contract Documents; responses that result in change to Contract Documents and adjustment to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time must be documented in a Change Order. B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions (ASI): 1. Architect's written order of instruction to Contractor, signed by Architect, that authorizes minor changes in Work that do not change Contract Sum or Contract Time. C. Proposal Request(PR): 1. Initiated by Architect: Written request by Architect to Contractor to quote change to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time for proposed change to Contract Documents. 2. Initiated by Contractor: Written request by Contractor to Architect proposing change to Contract Documents accompanied with quotation for change to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. D. Construction Change Directive (CCD): 1. Written order prepared by Architect, signed by Owner and Architect, directing Contractor to proceed with change to Contract Documents which affect Contract Sum and/or Contract Time, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order after change to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time has been determined. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 E. Change Order(CO): 1. Prepared by Architect and signed by Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement to a change to Contract Documents and adjustment to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. 1.4 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI): A. Submit RFIs numbered in sequential order, reviewed by Contractor with respect to Construction Documents, with the following information: 1. Project name and address. 2. Architects name. 3. Contractors name. 4. Date of RFI. 5. Drawing and/or Specification reference. 6. Signature of Contractor's reviewer. 7. Indicate"URGENT" on RFIs that may cause impact to the project schedule. B. Architect will receive RFIs only from the Contractor; Architect will not accept RFIs directly from subcontractors, suppliers, or other entities. C. Architect will receive only legible, properly prepared RFIs. 1. Unreadable facsimile machine RFIs, illegibly written RFIs, or RFIs with incomplete information, will be returned promptly without action. 2. RFIs may be transmitted to Architect by facsimile machine. a. Architect will return response by same method received from Contractor. 3. Architect will review RFIs with respect to Contract Documents and return response within 7 calendar days. a. RFIs marked "URGENT"will take precedence, in order received, over outstanding RFIs and be answered by Architect as soon as possible. D. Contractor, in being fully familiar with Construction Documents, shall not be relieved of responsibility to coordinate the Work to prevent adverse impact to Project schedule when submitting RFIs to Architect for interpretation of Contract Documents. 1.5 ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS (ASI) A. Architect's Supplemental Instructions may include supplementary or revised Drawings and/or Specifications to describe minor changes to Contract Documents. B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions will be executed on AIA Form G710, or other similar form designated by Architect. 1.6 PROPOSAL REQUEST (PR) A. Proposal Request Initiated by Architect: 1. Proposal Request is a request for information only, and is not an instruction or authorization to execute the change, or an order to stop Work in progress. 2. Proposal Request may include supplementary or revised Drawings and/or Specifications to describe a proposed change to Contract Documents. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 3. Contractor shall submit cost and/or time quotations to Architect within 10 working days following receipt of Proposal Request. B. Proposal Request Initiated by Contractor: 1. Proposal Request is for a change in the Work accompanied by a detailed quotation of impact on Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. 2. Proposal Request may include revised Drawings and/or Specifications to describe a proposed change to Contract Documents. 3. Proposal Request is a request for information only, and does not authorize the Contractor to execute the change or stop Work in progress without the Architect's and Owner's authorization. 4. Contractor initiated Proposal Requests may take the form of a "Claim"where Contractor finds it necessary for proper execution of the Work, to propose a change in the Work that is not shown or indicated in Contract Documents, and may affect Contract Sum and/or Contract Time, which for which no Proposal Request or Construction Change Authorization has been issued by the Architect. a. Contractor's determination that Architect's response to an RFI that affects Contract Sum and/or Contract Time may be addressed in a Proposal Request. 5. Architect shall respond to Contractor initiated proposals within 10 working days following receipt of Proposal Request. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE (CCD) A. A Construction Change Directive is issued in lieu of a Proposal Request when time is of the essence and change to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time cannot be determined prior to start of the work. B. A Construction Change Directive is executed on AIA Form G714 or other similar form designated by Architect, and may include supplementary or revised Drawings and/or Specifications to describe change to the Contract Documents. C. Both Owner and Architect will sign and date a Construction Change Directive that directs the Contractor to proceed with change to the Contract Documents prior to determination of cost and/or time. D. Contractor shall submit to Architect itemized change to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time within 10 working days when possible, and no more than 30 calendar days, except for the following conditions.- 1 onditions:1. Unit prices have been agreed upon and quantities cannot be determined until work described in the CCD has been completed. 2. Owner has agreed that Contract Sum and/or Contract Time of can be determined at completion of work described in the CCD. E. When Owner, Architect, and Contractor concur on change to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time, as described in the General Conditions for"Construction Change Directives," the change to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time will be included in a Change Order. 1.8 CHANGE ORDERS A. Architect will prepare each Change Order utilizing AIA Document G701, or other similar form acceptable to Owner. LRS Architects, Inc. i Tigard Public Works Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 B. Changes to Project Contract Sum and/or Contract Time listed or indicated in Change Orders shall include or be determined by methods described in the General Conditions, and as follows: 1. Proposal Requests approved for change to Contract Documents by Owner and Architect that have not been converted to a Construction Change Directive. 2. Construction Change Directives where Owner, Architect, and Contractor have agreed to change in Project Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. 3. Changes to Project Contract Sum and/or Contract Time that have not been documented by Proposal Request or Construction Change Directive, but have been agreed upon by Owner, Architect, and Contractor. 1.9 DOCUMENTATION FOR CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS A. Cost and Time Quotations: Support quotation for changes in the Work with sufficient substantiating data to allow Architect to evaluate quotation, to include the following.- 1. ollowing:1. Labor expended in hours and unit cost. 2. Equipment cost. 3. Products, with quantities used and unit cost, including purchase source. 4. Taxes, Insurance, and Bonds. 5. Credit for deleted work where applicable with same documentation as required for cost increases for additional work. 6. Overhead and profit, determined after credits have been deducted from additions. 7. Justification for change in Contract Time. B. For claims for Work not authorized through Proposal Requests or Construction Change Directives, provide supporting documentation for each claim for additional cost as indicated above for cost and time quotations with the following additional information.- 1. nformation:1. Name of Owner's authorized agent who ordered work, and date of Order. 2. Dates and hours work performed, and by whom. 3. Timecard records, including summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. 4. Receipts and invoices for products used including quantities and unit costs. 5. Receipts and invoices for equipment utilized, including dates and time of use. 6. Provide the same documentation indicated above for subcontracts same as required for Contractor's own forces. C. Document requests for Product substitutions according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 1.10 CORRELATING CHANGE ORDERS WITH OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Revise Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment to record each Change Order as separate item of work with adjustment to Contract Sum and Contract Time as described in Section 01 2900: Payment Procedures. B. Revise Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. C. Revise Subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by modifications to Contract Documents. D. Record modifications in Record Documents. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Payment Procedures: 01 2900 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 2600: Contract Modification Procedures, for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. List of Subcontractors, principle suppliers, and fabricators. C. Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed.- a. isted:a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Payment Procedures: 01 2900 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total to equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing for items stored off-site. 6. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 7. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Application for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment date is as agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in that Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703. D. Application Preparation: Compete every item of form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Match entries with data on the Schedules of Values. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each application for payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. F. Waivers of Mechanic Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from subcontractors, sub-subcontractor, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested in previous applications, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Payment Procedures: 01 2900 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 4. Submit final Application for payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Products list 5. Submittals Schedule. 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Initial progress report. 10. Report of preconstruction conference. 11. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 12. Performance and payment bonds. 13. Data needed to acquire the Owner's insurance. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 3. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with this application include the following: a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. C. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Final cleaning. f. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. g. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. h. List of incomplete Work recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Payment Procedures: 01 2900 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 6. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 7. Assurance that incomplete Work not accepted, if applicable, will be completed without undue delay. 8. Evidence that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 9. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 10. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General Project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Project meetings. 4. Construction schedule. 5. Submittal schedule. 6. Field Engineering. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01 6000: Product Requirements, for coordinating selection of products. 3. Section 01 7400: Cleaning, for coordinating progress and final cleaning. 4. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures, for coordinating Contract closeout requirements. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Specification Sections to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, which depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Coordinate storage or staging areas for all trades. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. C. Administrative Procedures: 1. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Preparation of Contractor's construction Schedule. b. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. C. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. d. Delivery and processing of submittals. e. Progress meetings. f. Preinstallation conferences. g. Startup and adjustment of systems. h. Project closeout activities. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. E. Coordination of Key Personnel: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. 1. Identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities. 2. List addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. 3. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, and temporary field office. Keep list current at all times. 1.3 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Content: Project specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components for architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicated required installation sequences. C. Indicate dimensions shown on Contract Documents and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions, and agreements achieved. Distribute meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 72 hours after each meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: 1. Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but not later than 15 days after execution of Agreement. a. Hold conference at Project site or other location agreeable to Owner and Architect. b. Conduct meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties deemed necessary. 3. All participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 4. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. C. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for requests for interpretations (RFIs). f. Procedures for testing and inspection. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Routing of correspondence. k. Preparation of Record Documents. I. Use of premises. k. Work restrictions. M. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. n. Construction waste management and recycling. o. Site access, traffic, and parking availability and rules. p. Office, work, and storage areas. q. First aid. r. Security. S. Progress cleaning. t. Owner's occuancy requirements. 5. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: 1. Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 2. Attendees: Contractor and its superintendent, installer and representatives of manufacturer's and fabricator's involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow. Include code enforcement personnel if required by local codes. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 3. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Related Change Orders. C. Submittals. d. Review of mockups. e. Possible conflicts or compatibility problems. f. Time schedules. g. Weather limitations. h. Manufacturer's written recommendations. i. Warranty requirements. j. Acceptability of substrates. k. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Testing and inspecting requirements. M. Installation procedures. n. Coordination with other work. o. Protection of adjacent work. 4. Do not proceed with installation if conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene conference at earliest feasible date. 5. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes to each party present and to parties who should have been present. D. Progress Meetings: 1. Conduct progress meetings at Project site at regular scheduled intervals. a. Coordinate meeting dates with preparation of payment request. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, Contractor, and each subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of immediate future activities. a. Participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that affect progress, including topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Progress cleaning. 5) Status of correction of deficient items. 6) Field observations. 7) Requests for interpretation (RFIs). 8) Status of Proposal Requests. 9) Status of Change Orders. 10) Project administration issues. 5. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes to Owner and Architect. Contractor shall be responsible for distribution to subcontractors, suppliers, or other entities concerned with current progress. 6. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal bar-chart type Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days after date established for commencement of Work. B. Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first working day of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. Include start-up, finish, duration, slack time, approval dates, material ordering, delivery dates, anticipated shutdowns, partial occupancy and Owner use, Completion Date and other such information required to allow Owner's monitoring of progress of project and identifying critical path of events required to meet Completion Date. 2. Use same breakdown of units of Work as indicated in Schedule of Values. C. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. D. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. 1. Bring significant deviations from Schedule immediately to Owner's and Architect's attention. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 1.6 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontract, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1.7 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Engineering Services: 1. Provide field engineering services as required for construction. 2. Locate and maintain an accurate benchmark on or near site that has been established by a Registered Surveyor. Relate subsequent elevations of finish grades and building elements directly to this benchmark. B. Existing Control Points: 1. Protect control points prior to starting Work, and preserve permanent reference points during construction. 2. Make no changes or relocations of control points without prior written notice to Architect's Representative. 3. Report to Architect's Representative when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. C. Instrument Layout: 1. Use site benchmarks and existing elevation control points to establish lines and levels, located and laid out by survey instrumentation. 2. Locate water supply, storm and sanitary sewer lines. 3. Locate edge and level of paving, curbs, walks, and sloping landscape. 4. Locate building foundations, column locations, and floor levels. 5. Locate controlling lines and levels required for plumbing, mechanical and electrical Work within 5 feet of building perimeter. D. Corrections: 1. Record changes in elevations or location of Work on project record Documents. 2. Report errors in horizontal and vertical dimensions and grades prior to starting Work. E. Verification and Coordination: 1. Verify dimensions of new and existing Work. a. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawings, modify to accommodate. If field measurements differ significantly, notify Architect prior to commencing Work. 2. Coordinate locations of openings through floors, roofs and walls with Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 7 February 5, 2007 F. Documentation: 1. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work when requested by Architect. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of Work, including Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures, for substitutions submittal requirements. 2. Section 01 2900: Payment Procedures, for Applications for Payment and Schedule of Values submittal requirements. 3. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination, for Coordination Drawings, Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittals Schedule, and distribution of meeting and conference minutes submittal requirements. 4. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for test and inspection reports submittal requirements. 5. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures, for Record Drawings, Record Specifications, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and warranties submittal requirements. 6. Sections with specific requirements for submittals indicated in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed by need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. b. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with these provisions. B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements of Section 01 3100, Project Management and Coordination, for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. 1. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 2. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 3. Initial Review: Allow minimum 10 working days for initial review of each submittal. a. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 4. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 5. Resubmittal Review: Allow minimum 10 working days for initial review of each submittal. D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 2. Include the following information on label: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Name of manufacturer. g. Submittal number, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number(e.g. 06 1000.01). Resubmittals should include an alphabetic suffix(e.g. 06 1000.01A). h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail reference, as appropriate. j. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. E. Submit items pertaining to only one Specification Section in each submittal. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. 1. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. 2. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. H. Resubmittals: make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others necessary as necessary for performance of construction activities. J. Use for Construction: Use only submittals with mark indicating Architect's final release. K. Submittal Log: Maintain an accurate submittal log for duration of Work, showing current status of submittals at all times. Make log available to Owner and Architect for review upon request. LRS Architects, Inc. i Tigard Public Works Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 2.2 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specifically prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not Product Data. B. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 1. Product Data, such as general product brochures containing information on other products that are not required or proposed for Work, which are not clearly marked to indicate which products and options are applicable to Project will be returned by Architect without review or action. C. Include following information, as applicable.- 1. pplicable:1. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Manufacturer's product specifications. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Standard color charts. 5. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 6. Compliance with specified referenced standards. 7. Testing by recognized testing agency. 8. Performance characteristics and capacities. 9. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 10. Wiring diagrams showing factory installed wiring. 11. Printed performance curves. 12. Operational range curves. 13. Mill reports. 14. Notation of coordination requirements. D. Colors and Patterns: Except where specific color and pattern is indicated in Contract Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in specified products, submit minimum 2 color and pattern charts to Architect for selection. E. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. F. Number of Copies: Submit the following for each required submittal: 1. 2 copies for Architect. 2. Number of copies as required for Maintenance manuals. 3. Number of copies as required by Contractor for distribution. G. Architect will retain 2 copies and return remainder to Contractor, marked with action taken and, where applicable, corrections or modifications required. 1. Distribute Product Data necessary for performance of construction activities. 2. Retain number of copies required for maintenance manuals. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 2.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project specific information, drawn accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show pertinent aspects of item and its method of connection to Work. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings are permitted. B. Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: 1. Dimensions; Identify dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Identification of products. 3. Fabrication and installation drawings. 4. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer installed and field installed wiring. 6. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. 7. Templates and patterns. 8. Schedules. 9. Design calculations. 10. Compliance with specified standards. 11. Notation of coordination requirements. 12. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 13. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. C. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size drawings, at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches D. Number of Copies: Submit 3 opaque copies of each submittal. 1. One copy will be returned to Contractor marked with Architect's action taken and, where applicable, corrections or modifications required. 2. Contractor is responsible for reproduction and distribution of final Shop Drawings as reviewed and necessary for performance of construction activities. 2.4 SAMPLES A. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of those characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. B Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 1. Generic description of Sample. 2. Product name and name of manufacturer. 3. Sample source. 4. Submittal number, and number and title of appropriate Specification Section. C. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. D. Field Samples: Full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish Project standard. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 Water Building Renovation Page 5 . February 5, 2007 E. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 1. Submit 2 color charts. Architect will return 1 color chart with options selected. F. Samples for Verification: Submit full size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used in the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. 1. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components. b. Small cuts or containers of materials. C. Complete units of repetitively used materials. d. Swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. e. Color range sets. f. Components used for independent testing and inspection. 2. Number or Samples: Submit 3 sets of Samples. Architect will retain 1 sample and return remainder of sets to Contractor. a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. b. If variation in color, pattern, or texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets that show approximate limits of variations, or number of units indicated in individual Specification Sections. 2.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: 2 copies for Architect, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications. a. Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an office or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 4500, Quality Control. 4. Welding, Installer, Manufacturer, Product and Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 B. The following are Informational Submittals: 1. Test and Inspection Reports. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Qualification Data. 5. Welding Certificates. 6. Installer Certificates. 7. Manufacturer Certificates. 8. Product Certificates. 9. Material Certificates. 10. Material Test Reports. 11. Research/Evaluation Reports. 12. Compatibility Test Reports. 13. Field Test Reports. 14. Maintenance Data. 15. Design Data. 16. Manufacturer's Instructions. 17. Manufacturer's Field Reports 18. Material Safety Data Sheets. a. Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. b. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. 2.6 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. B. Delegated Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit 3 copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. 1. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 Water Building Renovation Page 7 February 5, 2007 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, mark with an action stamp, and return to Contractor. C. Action Stamp: Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp, and mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When a submittal is marked"NO EXCEPTION TAKEN," Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When a submittal is marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED,"Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on submittal and requirements of Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When a submittal is marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT," do not proceed with Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. a. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to notations and resubmit. Repeat as necessary to obtain an action releasing submittal. b. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT,"at Project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Submittals for Record: a. Where a submittal is for record purposes or special processing or other activity, Architect will return submittal marked "RECORD ONLY." D. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, return it marked " RECORD ONLY,"or will reject and return it if it does not appear to comply with requirements. E. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect may not review submittals not required by the Contract Documents. Such submittals may be returned to sender without action, or discarded. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Alteration Project Procedures: 01 3516 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Products and installation for patching and extending Work. 2. Transition and adjustments. 3. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning. B. Related Sections.- 1. ections:1. Section 01 1100: Summary of Work, for Owner occupancy during construction. 2. Section 01 7320: Cutting and Patching. 3. Section 01 7400: Cleaning, for cleaning during construction. 4. Section 02 4119: Selective Demolition. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK A. New Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing Products and Work for patching and extending work. 1. Where new materials are indicated in the Drawings and product Section for material is not included in the Project Manual, provide new materials specified in the Drawings. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspection and testing Products where necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new Work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion. B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work. C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. D. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes. E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to accommodate Owner occupancy. i LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Alteration Project Procedures: 01 3516 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. Project Finishes: Complete in all respects including operational mechanical and electrical work. C. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring Products and finishes to specified condition. D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. E. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures restore existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and electrical systems to full operational condition. F. Install Products as specified in individual Sections. 3.4 TRANSITIONS A. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. B. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit to Architect a recommendation for providing a smooth transition. C. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required. D. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in Section 01 7329, Cutting and Patching. 3.6 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. 3.7 FINISHES A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections. B. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.8 CLEANING A. In addition to cleaning specified in Division 1 Sections, clean Owner occupied areas affected by Work of this Project. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Design-Build Requirements: 01 4115 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Certain components of the Work under this project are Design Build. It is the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate and assume or assign to subcontractors the complete responsibility for the design, calculations, submittals, fabrication, transportation, and installation of the Design Build portions or components as required in this Section. The Applicant is responsible for submitting to the City of Tigard, all Design Build documents required for the separate approval for each Design Build item. There are no exceptions. Design Build components of this Work are defined as complete, operational systems, provided for their intended use. B. The Architect's or Engineer of Record's review of Design Build submittals shall be for design intent and shall not lessen nor shift the responsibility from the Applicant or the assigned subcontractor to the Owner nor to the design professional. The Owner shall not be responsible for paying for any delays, additional products, additional hours of work or overtime, restocking or rework required due to failure by the Applicant or the subcontractor to coordinate their Work with the Work of other trades on the project or to provide the Design Build portion or component in a timely manner to meet the schedule of the project. C. City of Tigard Requirements: Follow the City of Tigard's requirements current at the time of submission. The Applicant is responsible for coordinating and submitting all material required by the City so that the City's review will not adversely affect the construction schedule. At or near the time of application, the Applicant shall meet with the City to identify Design Build components and how they are to be submitted and processed. D. Design Build Components of the Work: Design Build components known at this time: 1. Metal Fabrications. 2. Door Hardware. 3. Storefront systems. 4. Acoustical Ceilings. 5. Fire Protection Specialties. E. Refer to systems descriptions in technical Sections of these Specifications for additional information on Design Build work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Applicant: Person applying for building permit and person coordinating Design Build systems with basic building and with each other. Includes coordination of required submittals. B. Architect or Engineer of Record: Architect or Engineer registered in state that Project is located, engaged by the Owner to provide plans and computations, and establish design criteria for Design Build components and specifications required by the Building Official for principle Project systems. Includes staff, consultants, and consultants' staffs. C. Contractor: Entity engaged by the Owner to construct the Project. Includes employees, subcontractors, suppliers, and their employees. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Design-Build Requirements: 01 4115 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 D. Design Build Engineer: Professional Engineer registered in state that Project is located, engaged by the Contractor to provide plans, computations, and specifications required by the Building Official for a designated builder-designed specialty system, in accordance with criteria set forth in Contract Drawings and Specifications. E. Seal: Certification that plans, computations, and specifications were designed and prepared under the direct supervision of the Engineer whose name appears thereon. F. Review Stamp: Certification that the Architect or Engineer has reviewed plans, computations, and specifications bearing the seal of the Design Build Engineer, verifying conformance with information given and design concept set forth in Contract Drawings and Specifications. G. Approval Stamp: Certification that the Building Official has reviewed a submittal and finds it acceptable with respect to applicable code compliance. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures. B. Design Build submittals are required to show complete criteria, design assumptions, details, calculations, submittals, instructions for fabrication, assembly, installation and interface with other trades, unless noted otherwise in the specific Specification Section. C. Complete submittals shall be submitted with the Design Build Engineer's seal and calculations for that portion of Work. Submittals without required calculations, without the Design Build Engineer's seal, and which have not been reviewed by the Contractor will not be reviewed by the Architect or Engineer of Record. 1.4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS A. Some Design Build components are shown in the Contract Documents for design intent. The purpose is to have the Contractor responsible for providing, coordinating, and installing the Design Build component. B. Design Build components attached to the structural frame or supplemental to the structural frame shall be designed for the anticipated loads as outlined in the Contract Documents. These Design Build components shall be coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. C. Load reactions at the interface between the Design Build components and the structural frame shall be clearly defined to allow for a review by the Architect or Engineer of Record. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on the Contractor's applications and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Reviewed": When used in lieu of"Approved"to convey Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. D. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted," have the same meaning as "directed." E. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in the Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,""noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as"indicated." F. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. G. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. H. "Install": Operations at the Project site including unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. I. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. J. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. K. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. L. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown in Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project located. M. "Testing Agencies": Independent entities engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Conflicting Requirements: Comply with the most stringent requirement when compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels. 1. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the Architect for decision before proceeding. E. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) 800-872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act(ABA) 202-272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board 202-272-0080 www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations 888-293-6498 Available from Government Printing Office 202-512-1530 www.gpoaccess.govecfr/index.htmI UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards 800-872-2253 Available from Access Board 202-272-0080 www.access-board.gov LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) 202-862-5100 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers 216-241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council 202-737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 847-303-5664 www.aamanet.org ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International 248-848-3700 www.aci-int.org AGA American Gas Association 202-824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) 703-548-3118 www.agc.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) 202-626-7300 www.aia.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. 847-394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute 202-293-8020 www.ansi.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute 703-524-8800 www.ari.org ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and 800-527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 404-636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International 800-843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org 212-591-7722 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering 440-835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International 601-832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 800-449-8811 www.awinet.org 703-733-0600 LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 AWWA American Water Works Association 800-926-7337 www.aws.org 305-794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 212-297-2122 www.buildershardware.com CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association 630-584-1919 www.cisca.org CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) 800-882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com 706-278-3176 CS Commercial Standard of National Bureau of Standards 202-512-1800 CSA CSA International 800-463-6727 (Formally: IAS- International Approval Services) 416-747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) 800-689-2900 www.csinet.org 703-684-0300 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 703-222-2010 www.dhi.org GA Gypsum Association 202-289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America 785-271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) 212-419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 212-248-5000 www.iesna.org ITS I ntertek 800-345-3851 www.intertek.com 607-753-6711 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council 315-646-2234 www.igee.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) 613-233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 74901 11 www.iso.ch LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association 312-644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 MPI The Master Painters Institute 888-674-8937 www.paintinfo.com NAIMA The North American Insulation Manufacturers Association 703-684-0084 www.naima.org NCTA National Cable &Telecommunications Association 202-775-3550 www.ncma.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 301-657-3110 www.necanet.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1847 Rosslyn, VA 22209 703-841-3200 www.nema.org NFPA National Fire Protection Association 800-344-3555 www.nfpa.org 617-770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council 301-589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association 703-442-4890 www.glass.org NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association 888-846-7622 www.nrmca.org 301-587-1400 NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association 800-342-1415 www.ntma.com 703-525-8788 NWCB Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (Seattle) 800-524-4215 Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (Portland) 503-295-0333 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) PCA Portland Cement Association 847-966-6200 www.portcement.org. RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections 800-644-2400 www.boitcouncil.org 312-670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute 301-340-8580 www.rfci.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council 315-646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' 703-803-2980 National Association, Inc. www.smacna.org LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturers Association 312-456-5590 www.ssma.org SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute 816-472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. 864-646-8453 www.tileusa.com UL Underwriter's Laboratory, Incorporated 800-704-4050 www.ul.com 847-272-8800 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council 800-506-4636 www.wclib.org 212-661-4261 C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. IBC International Building Code ICC International Code Council, Inc. 703-931-4533 www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. 800-423-6587 www.ice-es.org 562-699-0543 OSSC State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code NES (Formally: National Evaluation Service—See ICC-ES) D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 800-638-2772 www.cpsc.org 301-504-6816 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 202-272-0167 www.epa.org OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration 800-321-6742 www.osha.gov 202-693-1999 USPS United States Postal Service 202-268-2000 www.usps.com END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Quality Control: 01 4500 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services. 1. Quality control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. a. Requirements do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. 2. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 7329: Cutting and Patching, for requirements for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities. 2. Section 09 6500: Resilient Flooring, for independent testing requirements for concrete slab moisture vapor emissions. 3. Section 09 6813: Tile Carpeting, for independent testing requirements for concrete slab moisture vapor emissions. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Owner will contract separately for services of independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. B. Inspections and testing costs required by defective Work or improperly-timed notices shall be paid by Contractor: C. Utilization of testing laboratory services shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.3 RETESTING A. Contractor responsible for retesting and associated cost where results of inspections and tests prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements. 1.4 ASSOCIATED SERVICES A. Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. B. Provide auxiliary services as requested. C. Notify agency in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. D. Auxiliary services include, but are not limited to, following: 1. Providing access to Work. 2. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. E. Coordinate activities to accommodate services with a minimum of delay. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Quality Control: 01 4500 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 F. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests. 1. Except where indicated as responsibility of testing agency, Contractor is responsible for taking samples. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Inspection and Testing Agencies: 1. Engage inspection and testing service agencies that are prequalified as complying with American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in types of inspections and tests to be performed. 2. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in State where Project is located. B. Duties of Testing Agency: 1. Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performing its duties. 2. Agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests. 3. Agency shall notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities of deficiencies observed in Work during performance of its services. 4. Except as otherwise specified, testing laboratory shall secure, handle, and store samples and specimens for testing. C. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection and test to: 1. Architect 2. Contractor 3. Governmental agencies requiring submission of reports 4. Other persons as directed by Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. Comply with requirements of Section 1701 of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on 2003 Edition of the International Building Code. B. Following Sections contain requirements for special inspections: 1. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. 1. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer and Owner. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Quality Control: 01 4500 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe.- 1. bserve:1. Site conditions 2. Conditions of surfaces and installation 3. Quality of workmanship 4. Start-up of equipment 5. Test, adjust, and balance of equipment applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for review. 3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, and sample taking, repair damaged construction. 1. Restore substrates and finishes. 2. Comply with Section 01 7329, Cutting and Patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for inspection and testing. 3.4 EVALUATION OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Satisfactory completion of Work will be judged on results of laboratory and site tests and inspections. B Results of tests and inspections that indicate Work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents will be considered deficient. C. Contractor has responsibility to remove and replace deficient Work at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, security and protection facilities. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Include cost or use charges for temporary facilities in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utility Services: Water and electric power from Owner's existing systems is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to: 1. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police and fire department rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations." 2. ANSI A10 Series standards for"Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition." 3. NECA Electrical Design Library"Temporary Electrical Facilities." C. Electric Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code." D. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. B. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide new materials, or use undamaged, used materials in serviceable conditions, suitable for use intended. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes, of sufficient size and furnished to accommodate needs of construction personnel. 1. Use of Owner's existing building will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 2. Provide enclosed space within field office adequate for project meetings. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Use of Owner's existing building will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL-rated, with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid propane gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline burning space heaters, or open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by UL, FM, or another a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. 1. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of the fixtures and facilities. 2. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that will provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. G. Heating: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. H. Telephone: Provide temporary telephone service in common use facilities for use by all personnel engaged in construction activities. 1. Provide one telephone line in each field office. 2. Provide a dedicated telephone line for a facsimile machine in each field office. 3. Make telephone and facsimile service available to use by the Owner and Architect. 4. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers, including the following: a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineer's office. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractor's field and home offices. 3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES A. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. B. Project Identification Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. C. Water Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419, Construction Waste Management. D. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES A. Environmental Protection: 1. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or that other undesirable effects. 2. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. B. Site Enclosure Fence: Provide site enclosure fence in manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, or similar violations of security. D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structural adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. 1. Provide appropriate warning signs to inform personnel and the public of hazards being protected against. E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. F. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses until permanent fire protection facilities are operable. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire protection equipment. 4. Supervise welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. Develop and post information for overall fire prevention and protection program for personnel at Project site. 6. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection when required by code or authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when the need for its service has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. 2. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 D. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Product Requirements: 01 6000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures. 2. Section 01 4200: Definitions and Reference Standards. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work. 1. The term "product" includes the terms"material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 2. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, listed in the manufacturer's published product literature. B. "Materials" are products shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. C. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Before Contractor's first request for payment, submit a complete list of major products proposed for use in the Project. 1. Include proprietary product names, manufacturer's name, and installing Subcontractor's name. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Provide products of the same kind from a single source to the fullest extent possible. B. Compatibility of Products: When given the option of selecting products, Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods that are compatible with previously selected products and construction methods, or products that have been specified to which the selected products must be compatible. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, or other losses. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Product Requirements: 01 6000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 D. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. E. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. F. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. G. Store products subject to damage by weather above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, and with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 1. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the time of installation. B. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions are permitted. C. Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated that complies with Specifications. No substitutions are permitted. D. Nonproprietary Specifications: When products or manufacturers are not listed, the Contractor may use any product by any manufacturer that complies with the Specifications and referenced standards. E. Product Substitutions: Where products or manufacturers are named and accompanied by the term "equal," "approved," or"approved equal," comply with Section 01 2500, Substitution Procedures, to obtain approval of an unnamed product. F. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where a product or assembly listing exact characteristics required, provide a product or assembly that provides those characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. G. Performance Specification Requirements: Where compliance with performance requirements are specified, provide products that comply with those requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. H. Specified Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation is specified, provide a product that complies with that code, standard, or regulation. I. Visual Matching: Where matching a sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. J. Visual Selection: Where product requirements include the phrase " . . as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures, .. " or a similar phrase, the Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected that complies with other specified requirements. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Product Requirements: 01 6000 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 K. Inappropriate Product Selections: If Contractor believes specified product, method, or system is inappropriate for use Contractor shall notify the Architect before performing Work in question. 1. If notice of objection is not received prior to delivery to site, it will be assumed by Owner that Contractor agrees specified products, methods, and systems are appropriate for use in the Project. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. 1. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 2. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary from damage and deterioration. B. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with Manufacturers' instructions, consult Architect for further instructions. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Cutting and Patching: 01 7329 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for cutting, fitting, and patching of Work required to: 1. Make several parts fit properly. 2. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Remove and replace defective work. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination, for coordinating cutting and patching with other construction activities. 2. Section 01 3516: Alteration Project Procedures, for building alterations. 3. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for cutting and patching operations related to inspection and testing. 4. Section 02 4119: Selective Demolition, for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 5. Refer to individual Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching. 6. Divisions 22, 23 and 26, for mechanical and electrical requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where cutting and patching involves structural elements, submit for approval a proposal describing procedures. Include the following information in the proposal: 1. Describe extent of cutting and patching required, how it will be performed, and why it cannot be avoided. 2. Indicate changes to structural elements, and changes in appearance of visual elements. Include structural calculations. 3. List products proposed for use and entities that will perform the Work. 4. Indicate dates that work will be performed, duration of the Work, and when work will be uncovered for Architect's observation. 5. List utilities that cutting and patching work will affect. 6. Submit cost estimate and secure Architect's approval of cost estimate and type of reimbursement before proceeding with cutting and patching 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load carrying capacity of load deflection ratio. 1. Obtain approval before cutting and patching structural elements. B. Do not cut and patch operating elements in a manner that would reduce their capacity to perform as intended, cause increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. C. Do not cut and patch exposed elements of construction that in the Architect's opinion would reduce the visual aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. 1. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unacceptable manner. LRS Architects, Inc. {f f E F Tigard Public Works Cutting and Patching: 01 7329 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.4 WARRANTY A. Cut and patch construction using methods and with materials in such a manner as to not void any warranties required or existing. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Use new materials identical to existing materials. B. For exposed surfaces where identical materials are not available, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces as nearly as possible. C. Use materials whose installed performance is equal or better to that of existing materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling. B. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new Work. C. Discrepancies: If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify Architect and secure direction before proceeding further. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary support of work to be cut, including shoring and bracing as required to maintain structural integrity of Work. B. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 3.3 GENERAL PERFORMANCE A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Provide dust proof barriers where necessary to protect existing surfaces. 3.4 CUTTING A. Perform cutting and demolition by methods that will provide the least damage to other portions of Work. B. Prior to cutting existing work, locate concealed utilities to eliminate possibility of service interruption or damage. C. Cut through concrete or masonry with a carborundum masonry saw or diamond-core drill. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Cutting and Patching: 01 7329 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 D. When masonry construction must be pierced, furnish and install a steel pipe sleeve in opening and grout in place neatly. 1. Leave grout surface to match existing finish. 2. Fabricate sleeve one inch in diameter larger than pipe or insulation. 3. Pack between sleeve and pipe with waterproof sealant. 4. At penetrations of fire-resistant rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, . completely seal voids with fire-resistant rated materials as require to maintain assembly of fire-resistant rating of penetrated element, or as required by Building Code. 3.5 PATCHING A. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide a finished installation complying with tolerances and finishes specified for type of construction involved. B. Where replacement of equipment and fixtures is required, restore existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air-conditioning, electrical, and similar systems to full operational condition. C. Refinish surfaces to match existing adjacent finish, patching with seams that are durable and as invisible as possible. 1. Where possible, inspect and test patched area to demonstrate integrity of seam. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. 3. For assembly, refinish entire unit. 4. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining work in manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. D. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with existing or new work is not possible, submit to Architect, for approval, recommendation for terminating surface along straight line at natural line of division. 1. Where change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit to Architect, for approval, recommendation for providing smooth transition. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching work is performed. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Cleaning: 01 7400 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for maintaining Project buildings and site in a standard of cleanliness during construction period. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 500: Temporary Facilities and Control, for removal of temporary facilities. 2. Section 01 7419: Construction Waste Management 3. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with applicable requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide personnel, equipment, and materials as needed to maintain specified standard of cleanliness. 2.2 COMPATIBILITY A. Use only cleaning materials and equipment that are compatible with surfaces being cleaned, as recommended by manufacturer of material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items not required for construction of this Work. 1. Completely remove all scrap, debris, and waste material from job site and dispose of in a legal manner. 2. Provide adequate storage for items and waste to be removed from job site, observing requirements for fire and environmental protection. B. Storage Areas: Maintain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, which does not impeding traffic or drainage. 1. Inspect arrangement of stored materials weekly. Restack, tidy, or otherwise service arrangements. C. Site and Structures: 1. Inspect site and structures weekly, and more often if necessary, and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material. a. Remove such items to place designated for their storage. Maintain site in a neat and orderly condition. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Cleaning: 01 7400 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 2. Sweep interior spaces clean as often as necessary to maintain a clean environment. a. Clean, for purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort and a hand-held broom. 3. As required prior to installation of succeeding materials, clean structures or applicable portions thereof to degree of cleanliness recommended by manufacturer of succeeding material. 4. Following installation of finish floor materials, clean finish flooring daily at times while Work is being performed in space in that finish materials are installed to keep floor free from foreign material that may be injurious to finish. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. "Final Cleaning,"for purpose of this Section, and except as may be specifically provided elsewhere, shall be interpreted as meaning level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials. B. Prior to Substantial Completion, remove from Project site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste. C. Broom clean paved areas on site and public paved areas at approaches to site. D. Exterior Surfaces: 1. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. 2. Hose down entire exterior surfaces of structure if necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness. E. Interior Surfaces: 1. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. 2. Remove paint droppings, spots, and stains. 3. Clean both sides of glass surfaces. 4. Polished surfaces: Apply polish recommended by manufacturer of material to be polished. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Construction Waste Management: 01 7419 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS A. Waste materials produced as a result of this project shall be reused or recycled to minimize impact of construction waste on landfills and to minimize expenditure of energy and cost in fabricating new materials. 1.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Reuse or recycle debris generated as a result of work performed on project when practicable and cost effective. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ON-SITE MATERIALS SORTING AND STORAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Verify recycling facilities or waste processor requirements for preparation of materials to be accepted and to what degree materials can be contaminated. B. Recycle the following waste materials: 1. Wood 2. Metals (ferrous and non-ferrous) 3. Cardboard 4. Drywall 5. Masonry and Concrete 6. Office paper C. Coordinate with local hauler to provide separate containers for recycled materials listed above. 1. Subcontractors shall follow source separation requirements for each waste, and use appropriate on-site container for each type of waste material. 2. Provide separate containers for non-recyclable materials. D. Rebates: Paid or credited by hauler/recycler to Contractor. E. Inform field personnel and subcontractors about recycling program, and continuously monitor program to verify proper source separation and to avoid contamination of recyclable materials. F. Recycling Processors and Facilities: 1. Comprehensive list of recycling facilities in Portland Metro are available from local building permit office or by contacting Metro at 503-234-3000. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Closeout Procedures: 01 7700 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Starting and Adjusting. 6. Instruction of Owner's personnel. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 2900: Payment Procedures, for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Section 01 5000: Temporary Facilities and Control, for removal of temporary facilities. 3. Section 01 7400: Cleaning, for final cleaning requirements. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's Punch List), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction to Owner's personnel. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Complete final cleanup requirements required in Section 01 7400. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes, including touchup painting. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. 1. On receipt of request, the Architect will either proceed with inspection, or without completing inspection, advise the Contractor that based on limited inspection, the construction is not sufficiently complete for Substantial Completion. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Closeout Procedures: 01 7700 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 2. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection, or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate can be issued. a. Architect will reinspect when assured by Contractor that Work identified in previous inspection has been competed and corrected. b. If additional inspections are required, the Owner will charge the Contractor to reimburse Architect for time and expenses. C. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 3. Owner will allow Contractor no longer than 30 calendar days from Date of Substantial Completion to remedy deficiencies. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following. 1. Submit a final Application for Payment, according to requirements of Section 01 2900. 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. 1. On receipt of request, the Architect will either proceed with inspection, or advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 2. Architect will prepare the final Certificate for Payment after inspection, or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate can be issued. a. Architect will reinspect when Work identified in previous inspection as incomplete is competed and corrected. b. If additional inspections are required, the Owner will charge the Contractor to reimburse Architect for time and expenses. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Closeout Procedures: 01 7700. Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of black line white prints of Contract Documents or Record CAD Drawings required. 1. Mark the Record Drawings to show the actual installation and construction where installation or construction varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Drawings. a. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark record sets with erasable red-colored pencil, clearly describing change by graphic line and note. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. a. Call attention to entries by a "cloud"drawn around areas affected. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. a. Conversion of Schematic Layouts: Show on Record Drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, centerline of each run of items shown schematically on Drawings. Clearly identify item by accurate note such as "cast iron drain", "galy. water", and the like. Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item ("under slab", "in ceiling plenum", "exposed", and the like). Relate by identification descriptive to Specifications. b. Show final location of electrical junction boxes and outlets, telephone and data outlets, supply and return registers, and like. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawings; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING' in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets with identification. C. Record Specifications: Submit one complete copy of Project Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. 1. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation or from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 2. Mark copy with proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders and other modifications, where applicable. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Closeout Procedures: 01 7700 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind miscellaneous records and identify each in same format as specified for Operation and Maintenance Manuals, ready for continued use and reference. 1. One set of evidence of compliance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Certificates of Inspection. b. Certificates of Occupancy. 2. One set of certificates of insurance for products and completed operations. 3. One set of evidence of payment and release of liens. 4. One copy of list of Subcontractors, service organizations, and principal vendors, including names, addresses, and telephone numbers where they can be reached for emergency service at all times including nights, weekends, and holidays. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations. 2. Maintenance Data: Included manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance, and copies of warranties and bonds. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submit one set of warranties, organized into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual, in same format as specified for Operation and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Prior to request for certification of Substantial Completion, start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment and operating components for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Closeout Procedures: 01 7700 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Include instruction for system design and operational philosophy, review of documentation, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Selective Demolition: 02 4119 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected building equipment and fixtures. 2. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure. 3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 1100 Summary of Work, for use of the premises and Owner occupancy during construction. 2. Section 01 3516: Alteration Project Procedures, for transition of new and existing construction after completion of selective demolition. 3. Section 01 5000: Temporary Facilities and Controls, for temporary construction, environmental protection measures, and security at Owner occupied areas. 4. Section 01 7329: Cutting and Patching, for cutting and patching procedures. 5. Division 22: Plumbing, for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating plumbing) items. 6. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating and Air-conditioning, for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating HVAC items. 7. Division 26: Electrical, for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing construction items of construction to remain without removal. 1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain on Owner's property, demolished materials become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. Do not burn or bury materials on site. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate sequence of demolition and removal work, interruption of utility services, coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services, locations of temporary partitions and means of egress, and coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building. B. Utility Survey: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. ANSI A10.6: "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition." LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Selective Demolition: 02 4119 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 2. NFPA 241: "Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations." 3. Applicable local codes for demolition work, safety of structure, and dust control. B. Obtain required permits from governing authorities. C. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning of demolition operations. D. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without prior written notice to the Owner. B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Utility Service: Notify affected utility companies of selective demolition before starting work and comply with their requirements for maintaining service, and disconnecting existing services, where required. 1. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. 2. Maintain fire protection facilities in service during demolition operations. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials, or materials that visually match existing surfaces if identical materials are not available. B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Selective Demolition: 02 4119 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to start of Work, examine work to be removed and work to remain to determine nature of work and conditions under which selective demolition will be conducted. 1. Make necessary probes to determine extent and kind of protection required. 2. When applicable, verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. 3. Where existing conditions are found to be conflict with representations of Contract Documents, submit written notification and request clarification. a. Do not perform Work related to conflicting conditions until clarification is obtained. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities serving area to be demolished. Mark location of existing utilities to remain. B. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at locations indicated, or as required to separate the public and occupied areas from areas of Work. C. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. D. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. E. Protect existing materials which are not to be demolished or removed. F. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, or structural support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction to be demolished. 3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. C. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. D. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger. Notify Architect. Do not resume operations until directed. E. Removed and Salvaged Items: Clean, pack or crate with identification marked on containers, store in a secure area until delivery to Owner, and transport to Owner's storage area. F. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Clean and repair to functional reuse, pack or crate with identification marked with identification, protect from damage during storage, and reinstall in locations indicated. Comply with requirements for new materials and equipment. G. Existing Items to Remain: Protect against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to suitable storage and reinstalled in their original locations after demolition operations are complete. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Selective Demolition: 02 4119 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 H. Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition. Perform patching work in accordance with Section 01 7329, Cutting and Patching. I. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. J. Do not burn demolished materials on site. K. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. L. Upon completion of work, leave areas in clean condition. Remove temporary partitions, barriers, and construction. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes metal fabrications as follows, but not limited to: 1. Exterior steel gates and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for independent testing and inspection procedures. 2. Section 01 4115: Design-Build Requirements. 3. Section 09 9000: Painting, for metal finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For grout, paint products, and each manufactured item specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions, fabrication details, installation, anchorage, and templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. Indicate welds by American Welding Society symbols. C. Welder certificates certifying that welders comply with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance"Article. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." B. Welder Qualifications: 1. Use welders certified by AWS and State in which project is located, for structural welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months. C. Comply with requirements/recommendations of American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications for design, fabrication and erection of structural steel for buildings and AISC manual of steel construction. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Special inspection is required by State Building Code for structural welding and drilled epoxy anchor bolts of this Section; Refer to Section 01 4500. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site with markings corresponding to markings shown on approved Shop Drawings. B. Store off ground, under cover and protected from damage. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual location of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorage for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorage, including sleeves, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS- GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without pitting, seam marks, mill markings, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A 36. B. Steel Tubing, ASTM A 500, cold-formed; Seamless where exposed. C. Sheet steel: ASTM A 366. D. Gratings: ANSI A202.1. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5a, at exterior walls. 1. Select fasteners of type, grade, and class suited for use intended. B. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head, annealed stainless steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts. Alloy Group 1 (Al). C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Provide zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is galvanized. D. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. 2. Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (Al). Stainless steel complying with ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 E. Cast-In-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, complying with ASTM C 1107. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following: a. Burke: Nonmetallic Grout. b. Euclid Chemical Co.: NS Grout. C. Master Builders: Masterflow 713 or 928. d. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight 588 Precision Grout. e. Five Star Products, Inc.: Five Star Grout. 2.5 WELDING A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 2.6 PRIMER A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Provide primers specified in Section 09 9000. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint-20. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Use connections that maintain structural value of jointed pieces. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. 1. Use Phillips flat-headed countersink heads for exposed connections, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Located joints where least conspicuous. 3. Cut abutting members to fit with full bearing contact. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 4. Form elbows and bends to uniform radii, free from buckles and twists, and with finished surfaces smooth. 5. Where exposed to weather, fabricate seams and other connections to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 6. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Provide 3/16 inch minimum fillet welds, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide full penetration butt welds. 4. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. G. Steel gates and supports: 1. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated. 3. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 4. Galvanize all surfaces not embedded in concrete. 2.8 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from dimensions shown: 1. Overall length with both ends finished: 1/32 inch. 2. Overall length of member without finished ends: a. For members up to 30 ft. long: 1/16 inch B. Twists, bends, and kinks are not allowed. 2.9 FINISHES A. General: Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123 for steel and iron products, and ASTM A 153 for steel and iron hardware. C. Shop prime uncoated steel surfaces, except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Within 2 inches of surfaces to be field welded. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated steel surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. SSPC-SP-6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." E. Shop Priming: Apply one coat primer with a uniform dry film thickness of minimum 2.0 mils. 1. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,"for shop painting. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide State Building Code required tests and inspections. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 4500, Quality Control. B. Shop-welded connections will be visually inspected, and tested according to AWS D1.1. Inspection procedures. C. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing will be performed at Contractor's expense to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces plumb, level, true, and free from rack; and measured from established lines and levels. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. B. Field weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding of Exposed Connections: Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge drilled or punched holes with a burning torch. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 1. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. 2. Provide standard plate washers under bolt heads and nuts. 3. Do not thread bolts at shear plane. F. Steel gates and supports: 1. Install as indicated in Drawings. f LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Public Works Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply to provide a minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 Water Buiding Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following for interior architectural woodwork: 1. Plastic laminate clad cabinets. 2. Plastic laminate countertops. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants 2. Division 22: Plumbing, for plumbing work incorporated in casework. 3. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for HVAC work incorporated in casework. 4. Division 26: Electrical, for electrical work incorporated in casework. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. B. Cabinet Surfacing: 1. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. Bottom of wall cabinets are defined as"exposed." 2. Semi-exposed Surfaces: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as"concealed." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified including cabinet hardware and accessories, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show location of each item with dimensioned plans and elevations, indicating materials, component profiles, assembly methods,joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, and schedule of finishes. 2 Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing and electrical work incorporated in woodwork. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. C. Samples: 1. Plastic Laminate Clad Panel Products: Two 8 by 10 inch size samples for each color, texture and pattern of plastic laminate and melamine material specified. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 Water Buiding Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 2. Submit one sample of each hardware item in specified finish. a. Approved samples may be used in the final installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute's (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: 1. Firm experienced in producing casework for projects of similar size, quality and complexity. 2. Engage a firm qualified to assume single-source responsibility for fabricating, finishing, and installing Work of this Section in accordance with the referenced standard. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage, and damage by project construction operations. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Maintain temperature between 60 and 90 degrees F in areas where architectural woodwork is installed. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicated measurements in Shop Drawings. B. Field verify measurements of other construction that woodwork is intended to fit to prior to fabrication of woodwork. Where measurements cannot be made prior to Shop Drawings, provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established woodwork dimensions shown in Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A Coordinate work of this Section with plumbing and electrical rough-in, and other finish work. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, furring, blocking, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections for supporting and installing architectural woodwork items. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and grade specified. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 Water Buiding Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: DOC PS 20; average moisture content of 6 percent; Douglas Fir or Hemlock species. B. Hardwood Lumber: AHA A135.4. C. Particleboard:ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 or Grade M-2 Exterior Glue, 45 pcf density, of grade to suit application; sanded faces. 1. Duraflake; Willamette Industries, Inc., or approved. 2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATES A. Plastic Laminate (PLAM): High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) complying with NEMA LD3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard; manufacturer, color, pattern, and surface texture as scheduled. B. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, with surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1, color as selected: 1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. RMP; Roseburg Melamine Products. b. KorTron; Willamette Industries. C. Backing Sheet: NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, undecorated plastic laminate. D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Aliphatic resin, Resorcinol, or approved. E. Joint Sealant for Plastic Laminate: Clean translucent mildew-resistant silicone by Dow, General Electric, or approved. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Select type, size and finish to suit application. C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.5 HARDWARE A. Drawer Slides: Load capacity of drawers (loaded with paper) is defined as drawer depth by height by width (in inches) by 0.017 lbs. cu/in. plus 30 pounds. 1. Pencil Drawers: Accuride 2632, Steel ball bearings, full extension, load capacity up to 65 lbs. per pair. 2. Light to Medium Duty Drawers: Accuride 3832, Steel ball bearings, full extension, load capacity up to 100 lbs. per pair; for drawers that are 16 inches wide or less. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 Water Buiding Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 3. Light to Medium Duty Drawers: Accuride 7432, Steel ball bearings, full extension, load capacity up to 100 lbs. per pair; for drawers 24 inches wide or less. 4. Medium to Heavy Duty Drawers: Accuride 4034, Steel ball bearings, full extension with 1 inch overtravel, progressive movement, load capacity 150 lbs. per pair; for drawers 24 inches wide or less. 5. Heavy Duty or Lateral File Drawers: Accuride 3640, Steel ball bearings, full extension with 1 inch overtravel, progressive movement, load capacity up to 200 lbs. per pair; for drawers 42 inches wide or less. B. Cabinet Shelf Supports, Adjustable: Knape &Vogt No. 346 for drilled holes; Nickel-plated finish. C. Cabinet Hinges: 1. Concealed Hinge (European Type): Self closing, minimum 165 degree opening, nickel-plated. Provide minimum 3 hinges for doors over 48 inches high. a. Grass America, Inc.: No. 3903. b. Blum: Clip Modul 170 Series. C. Hafele: Duomatic 165. D. Cabinet Catches: Heavy-duty magnetic catch, Epco 1000LS, or approved. 1. Standard Cabinet Doors: Provide one per door. 2. Closet Doors: Provide two per leaf. E. Drawer and Door Locks: 5-pin tumbler, dead bolt with metal strike: 1. Doors: National N8123-26D. 2. Drawers: National N8149-26D, or Corbin No. CB738. F. Drawer Pulls: 4 inch by 5/16 inch diameter wire pull, brushed stainless steel US32D. G. Silencers: Clear oft vinyl round bumpers, 2 per door. H. Grommets: 2 inch OD molded plastic with hole and cap with slot for cable passage; color as selected from standard range. I. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. 2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 Water Buiding Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom Grade woodwork complying with requirements of referenced AWI Quality Standard. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay, unless otherwise indicated. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application in shop to greatest extent possible before delivery to Project site. 1. Dissemble only as necessary for shipment and installation. D. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. E. Shop cut and locate openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items, using templates or roughing-in diagrams. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a water-resisting coating. 2.8 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWI Section 400 Architectural Cabinets. B. Laminate Clad Panels.- 1. anels:1. Core Material: Particleboard. 2. Overall Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch. C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) complying with the following.- 1. ollowing:1. Horizontal Surfaces other than Countertops: Grade HGS, 1.2 mm nominal thickness. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS, 1.2 mm nominal thickness. 3. Edges: Grade HGS, 1.2 mm nominal thickness. D. Laminates for Semi-exposed Surfaces: Thermoset Decorative Overlay. E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. G. Apply plastic laminate cladding in full, uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline. H. Provide dust panels of 1/4 inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. 2.9 COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWI Section 400 Architectural Cabinets. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 Water Buiding Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 B. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL), complying with the following: 1. HPDL Grade: HGS, General purpose type, 1.2 mm nominal thickness. a. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP, 1.0 mm nominal thickness. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. 3. Apply plastic laminate cladding in full, uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cutouts. 4. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. 5. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. 6. Edges: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 7. Core Material: Particleboard. a. For countertops with sinks and lavatories, use Grade M-2-Exterior Glue particleboard. 8. Overall Thickness of Countertop Panel: Not less than 3/4 inch. 9. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition architectural woodwork to prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified for type of architectural woodwork involved, and as specified in this Section. B. Install architectural woodwork plumb, level, and straight. 1. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Install level and plumb to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates as required for proper support and attachment. E. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations and fill flush with adjacent surfaces matching final finish. F. Cabinets: 1. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units, and countertops. 2. Carefully scribe cabinets abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 Water Buiding Renovation Page 7 February 5, 2007 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches on center. 4. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using steel angles. G. Plastic Laminate Countertop: 1. Anchorage: Secure countertops to grounds, furring and solid blocking with countersunk fasteners and blind nailing as required. a. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. 2. Seal space between backsplash and wall with sealant. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. C. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. D. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. E. Touch up shop applied finishes and repair and restore damaged or soiled areas to eliminate functional and visual defects. 1. Where it is not possible to repair defects, replace woodwork. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide protection and maintain conditions to ensure that casework is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION I 1 T LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Penetration Firestopping: 07 8413 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Through-penetration firestop systems, as defined by International Building Code and UL, for penetrations through fire-resistive-rated construction, including empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 8443: Fire-Resistant Joint Firestopping. 2. Section 09 9000: Painting, for field finish applied to exposed fire stop materials. 3. Division 22: Plumbing, specifying piping penetrations. 4. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, specifying duct penetrations. 5. Division 26: Electrical, specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistive-rated,constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined by ASTM E 814: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop system with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistive rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop system with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive-rated shaft enclosures. C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture resistant through-penetration systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame spread index of less than 25, and smoke developed index of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84, LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Penetration Firestopping: 07 8413 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated or proposed to be provided under this Section. B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. 1. If more than one installer for through-penetration firestop systems, provide a single submittal of product data and shop drawings,jointly prepared by all installers. C. Qualification Data: For installer(s). If more than one installer, provide a single submittal of documentation indicating qualifications and responsibilities of each installer. D. Product Test Reports: Manufacturer's technical representative's random inspection reports to verify compliance with codes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. 1. It is preferred that a single qualified installer approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors" be assigned for installation of through- penetration firestop systems. If installer, or installers, are not FMG approved, provide documentation that installer(s) is qualified to install Work of this Section. Architect reserves the right to reject installer(s)who does not have a successful history of installing through-penetration firestop systems. B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition required, from a single manufacturer. C. Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and the following.- 1. ollowing:1. Firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems bearing the classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. E. Inspections: Manufacturer's technical representative shall perform random inspection to verify compliance with codes. Document compliance in writing. 1. Do not cover firestop systems installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by manufacturer's technical representative, or building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Preconstruction Conference: Comply with requirements of Section 01 3100. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Penetration Firestopping: 07 8413 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the following: 1. State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on IBC, Section 712, Penetrations, and Section 713, Fire-Resistant Joint Systems. 2. Penetrations: ASTM E 814. 3. Fire-Resistant Joint Systems: ASTM E 1966. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems required for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers.- 1. anufacturers:1. Firestop Systems, Inc. 2. W. R. Grace & Co. —Conn. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. The RectorSeal Corporation. 6. Specified Technologies, Inc. 7. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 8. USG Corporation. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING A. Compatibility: Provide firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems. B. Provide materials that are asbestos free. C. Accessories: Provide components for each firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements"Article. 1. Use only components specified by firestop system manufacturer and approved by the testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces in contact with firestop materials of foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of firestop materials. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Penetration Firestopping: 07 8413 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestop system manufacturer using manufacturer's recommended products and methods. C. Use masking and temporary covering to prevent contact of firestop materials with adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements"Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of type required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire resistance ratings required. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating materials. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "warning -Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Date of Installation. 3. Firestop system manufacturer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's technical representative shall perform random inspection to verify compliance to codes, and document compliance in writing. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by firestop system manufacturers. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Penetration Firestopping: 07 8413 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Repair damaged material as necessary. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping: 07 8443 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following: 1. Floor-to-wall joints. 2. Head-of-wall joints. 3. Wall-to-wall joints. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 8413: Penetration Firestopping, for systems installed in opening in walls and floors with and without penetrating items. 2. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for non-fire-resistive joint systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join, and with movement capabilities indicated as determined by UL 2079 1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test. C. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls, provide systems of type and with ratings indicated below as determined by NFPA 285 and UL 2079. 1. UL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint. D. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping: 07 8443 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article: 1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article and comply with the following: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. E. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined each installation. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the following: 1. State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code Amendments based on IBC, Section 713: Fire-resistive Joint Systems. 2. Fire-Resistant Joint Systems: ASTM E 1966. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping: 07 8443 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 B. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. D. Designation System for Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHBN. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Joint Sealants: 07 9200 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes joint sealants for applications shown or indicated, and as required to provide a positive barrier against passage of moisture and air without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 8443: Fire-Resistant Joint Firestopping, for fire-resistant sealant used in firestopping assemblies. 2. Section 08 8000: Glazing, for glazing sealant. 3. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for installation of acoustical sealant used in sound control gypsum board assemblies. 4. Section 09 8110: Acoustic Insulation and Sealant, for acoustical sealants. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each joint sealant product indicated, including manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. B. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 1. Upon request of Architect, submit physical samples of each sealant, backing material, primer, and bond breaker proposed for use. C. Warranties: Submit copies of special installers and manufacturers warranties. D. SWRI Validation: Evidence that each elastomeric sealant specified has been tested and validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for specified requirements. E. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Use workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI) requirements for materials and installation. D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 3. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Joint Sealants: 07 9200 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 4. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with,joint substrates. E. Provide products that have been tested according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified within a 36 month period preceding commencement of the Work. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to job site in their manufacturer's original containers, with labels intact and legible, and maintain intact until time of use. B. Do not retain material that has exceeded shelf life recommended by manufacturer. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealant when joint substrates are wet, or ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits recommended by manufacturer. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Provide warranty in which installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance requirements specified in this Section, including joint sealant failure to provide air and watertight seal, loss of adhesion or cohesion, or failure to cure. 1. Duration of warranties from date of Substantial Completion: 5 years. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide warranties in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance requirements specified in this Section, including joint sealant failure to provide air and watertight seal, loss of adhesion or cohesion, or failure to cure. 1. Duration of warranties from date of Substantial Completion: a. Silicone Sealant: 20 years. b. Polyurethane and Silyl-Terminated Polyether Sealants (STP): 5 years. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Stain Characteristics: Provide elastomeric joint sealant products that are nonstaining to porous substrates and have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 1. In exposed installation, use color of approximate color of adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise approved. 2. In concealed installation use standard gray or black sealant. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Joint Sealants: 07 9200 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2.2 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Silicone- Ultra Low Modulus: 1. Single-Component; neutral moisture curing, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use T, NT, G, M, A, and O; Joint movement range 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression. 2. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. a. Dow Corning 790. b. GE SilPruf LM SCS2700. C. Pecora 890. d. Tremco Spectrem 1. B. Silicone- Low Modulus: 1. Single-Component; neutral moisture curing, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, A, and O; Joint movement range 50 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression. 2. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. a. Dow Corning 795 or 991 (non-bleed) b. GE SilPruf SCS2000. C. Pecora 864. d. Tremco Spectrem 2 or 3. C. Polyurethane - Ultra Low Modulus: 1. Single-Component, non-sag, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; Joint movement range 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression. 2. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. a. Tremco Vulkem 921. b. Tremco Dymonic FC. D. Polyurethane Sealant- Low Modulus: 1. Two component, non-sag, ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; Joint movement range 50 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression. 2. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. a. Pecora; Dynatrol II. b. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP2. C. Tremco Dymeric 240/240FC. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Joint Sealants: 07 9200 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 E. Polyurethane and Silyl-Terminated Polyether Sealant(STP) - Medium Modulus: 1. Single-Component, non-sag, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; Joint movement range 25 percent in extension and 25 percent in compression. 2. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. a. Pecora; Dynatrol I-XL. b. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP1. C. Sonneborn; Sonolastic 150 or Sonolastic 150 VLM (STP). d. Tremco Dymonic. F. Silicone Rubber Sealant: 1. Single-Component; mildew resistant, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT; Joint movement range 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression; and complying with FDA Regulation No. 21 CFR 177.2600. 2. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. C. Tremco; Tremsil 200 (White, unless otherwise indicated). G. Acoustic Sealant: As Specified in Section 09 8110, Acoustic Insulation and Sealant. 2.2 BACKUP MATERIALS A. Use only those backup materials that are non-absorbent, non-staining, and specifically recommended by manufacturer for installation with type of sealant used. B. Sealant Backer Rod: Provide one of the following Type B backing rods (bicellular material with a surface skin) unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer: 1. Nomaco Inc.: "Sof Rod." 2. Sonneborn: "Soft Backer Rod." C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Use only those primers which have been tested for durability on surfaces to be sealed, and are specifically recommended by sealant manufacturer for adhesion of joint sealant substrates, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to sealant and backing material manufacturer, formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealant with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealant and surfaces adjacent to joints. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Joint Sealants: 07 9200 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints to receive joint sealants for compliance with requirements forjoint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface clean joints immediately before installing sealant complying with manufacturer's instructions, and the following: 1'. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of sealant, including dust, oil, grease, rust, lacquer, laitance, loose mortar, ice and frost. B. Concrete and Masonry: 1. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, or mechanical abrading; remove loose particles from cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 2. Where surfaces have been treated, remove surface treatment by sandblasting or wire brushing. 3. Remove laitance and mortar from masonry joint cavities 4. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. C. Metal surfaces: 1. Scrape steel surfaces with metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust. 2. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaner which leaves no residue to remove oil and grease, and protective coatings, wiping surfaces with clean rags. D. Prime joints substrates where recommended by sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. 1. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond. E. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install joint sealers in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. B. Sealant Backings: 1. Install material to uniform depth below sealant. 2. Using tool, smoothly and uniformly place backup material to depth of approximately 1/2 joint width (1/4 inch to 1/2 inch), compressing backup material 25 percent to 50 percent and securing a positive fit. 3. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 4. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Joint Sealants: 07 9200 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 C. Install bond breaker tape behind sealant where sealant backing is not used between sealant and back of joints. D. Install sealant by proven techniques at the same time backings are installed. 1. Thoroughly fill joints to recommended depth with sealant in direct contact with joint substrates. 2. Produce uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 3. Prevent three-sided adhesion of sealant to substrates. E. Tool joints to profile shown in Drawings, or as indicated below if such profiles are not shown in Drawings. 1. Provide uniformly smooth joints with slightly concave surface, flush at edges with adjacent surface, according to ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not use tooling agent unless specifically recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer. 3. Leave sealant surface neat and smooth. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Adhesion Testing: Test completed joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Test joint sealant after sealant has cured (usually within 7 to 21 days). 2. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of sealant and joint substrate, and 1 test each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter. 3. Test Method: Test according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab in ASTM C 1193, Appendix X1. 4. Record results in a field-adhesion test log. Include the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. 1) Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. 2) Compare results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field adhesion hand-pull test criteria. b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. C. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 5. Include in test log, dates when sealants were installed, names of installers, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 6. Repair sealants pulled from test areas by applying new sealants following same procedures used to originally seal joints. a. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field Test Reports: 1. Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Joint Sealants: 07 9200 Water Building Renovation Page 7 February 5, 2007 2. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. 3. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent exposed surfaces free from sealant as installation progresses, using cleaning agent recommended by manufacturer of sealant used. 1. Repair damaged surfaces. 3.6 SEALANT SCHEDULE A. At building exterior door and window frames, and other openings and joints in exterior walls: Silicone- Ultra Low Modulus, unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific application and approved by Architect. 1. Color: As selected by Architect. B. At building interior door and window frames and other openings in interior walls: Polyurethane or Silyl-Terminated Polyether Sealant- Low Modulus. Use Ultra Low Modulus Polyurethane where application warrants. 1. Color: As selected by Architect. C. At Toilet Fixture Joints: Silicone Rubber. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Hollow Metal Frames: 08 1213 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8: 1. Standard hollow metal welded steel frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors, for doors in hollow metal frames. 2. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware 3. Section 08 8000: Glazing, for glass in hollow metal frames. 4. Section 09 9000: Painting, for painting of hollow metal frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, label compliance, and finishes for each type of hollow metal frame specified. B. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of hollow metal frame, details of openings, dimensions, and anchorage. C. Frame Schedule: Use same reference numbers for details and openings as those in Contract Drawings. 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. D. Certification: Submit certification that work of this Section complies with ANSI/SDI A250.8, or equivalent standards of HMMA 861 (Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper installation of work of this Section. B. Minimum Quality Standards: Comply with latest edition of following standards of ANSI and the Steel Door Institute (SDI): 1. ANSI/SDI A250.8, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. SDI 105, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 3. SDI 109, Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. SDI 117, Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. B. Store in protected dry area, in a vertical position with heads up, on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking, spaced to permit air circulation. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Hollow Metal Frames: 08 1213 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 C. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames, and as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Hollow Metal Welded Frames: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by any manufacturer that can provide and certify to fabrication of products that meet or exceed requirements of ANSI, SDI (Steel Door Institute), or HMMA (Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association), and requirements of these specifications. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. Anchors Built Into Exterior Walls: Steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or ASTM A 1011, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanize according to ASTM A 153. E. Glass for Frames: As specified in Section 08 8000. 1. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201, for Category II materials. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL WELDED FRAMES A. Provide hollow metal welded steel frames for doors, borrowed lights, and other openings according to ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners, full profile welded. 1. Fabricate frames installed in drywall partitions with backbend return (double backbend). C. Interior Frames: Minimum 0.053 inch (16 gage) uncoated thickness cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames for interior openings 48 inches and wider from minimum 0.067 inch (14 gage) uncoated thickness cold-rolled steel sheet. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Hollow Metal Frames: 08 1213 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as frames. E. Provide frames with steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate hollow metal frame units to be rigid, free of defects, warp, or buckle. 1. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and reinforcement from either cold or hot-rolled steel sheet. B. Welded Frames.- 1 rames:1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. 3. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames installed in concrete or masonry. 4. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints; fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. a. Stud-Wall Type: 1) Three anchors perjamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c 7. Door Silencers: Except on frames to receive weatherstripping or gasketing, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single leaf door openings, and 2 silencers on heads of double leaf door openings. C. Clearances: Fabricate with following clearances, except for fire doors provide clearances according to NFPA 80. 1. Between doors and frames: 1/8 inch. D. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare frames to receive hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. 1. Comply with requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Hollow Metal Frames: 08 1213 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 2. Provide space, cutouts, reinforcing for concealed overhead door closers and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. 3. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings, or, if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch high, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Locate on on secure side of interior frames for glass and louvers. B. Loose Glazing Stops in Frames: Channel shaped cold-rolled steel, butted at corner joints and secured to the frame using countersink oval head machine screws, spaced 9 inches o.c. maximum. 1. Provide square profile, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Steel Thickness: Minimum 0.042 inch (18 gage) uncoated thickness. 2.6 FINISHES A. Preparation: Clean surfaces and apply pretreatment of conversion coating of type suited to organic finish coating. B. Hollow Metal Welded Steel Frames: Factory Prime for Field-Painted Finish: 1. Apply manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive shop primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 immediately after surface and pretreatment that is compatible with finish paint systems specified in Section 09 9000 and suited to substrate. C. Factory Primed Hollow Metal Steel Frames: Field apply finish coats of paint as specified in Section 09 9000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. 1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow metal frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures. B. Placing Frames: Comply ANSI/SDI 250.11, and the following: 1. Where possible, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls. 2. Set frames accurately into position, aligned and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. a. Frames in final position to be plus or minus 1/16 inch maximum from squared and plumbed alignment. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Hollow Metal Frames: 08 1213 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 3. After frames have been installed and wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 4. At in-place construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and suitable anchorage devices. Provide "Z"fillers at each screw location. 5. Provide sealant between frame and adjacent wall material. 6. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 3.3 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including standard steel frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 1. During warranty period, check and adjust operating finish hardware items for smooth and quiet operation. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted and damaged areas of prime coat, and apply touch up of compatible, air-drying primer. C. Clean exposed surfaces of Work of this Section and repair as required. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Wood Doors: 08 1400 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Interior solid core flush wood swing doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 1213: Standard Hollow Metal Frames, for door frames. 2. Section 08 4113: Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts, for door frames. 3. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and factory finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations of each kind of door, location and extent of hardware blocking, and details of door construction not included in Product Data. C. Door Schedule: Use same reference numbers for details and openings as those in Contract Drawings. 1. Indicate doors to be factory finished and other finish requirements. 2. Indicate locations and dimensions of cutouts. D. Samples: Approximately 8 by 8 inches in size, of each door face material with each type of specified finish. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. 1. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Deliver doors individually packaged in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. 3. Deliver doors clearly marked with manufacturer's name, size, and thickness. 4. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used in Shop Drawings. 5. Immediately open, but don't remove, wrap at Project site to ventilate. B. Handling: Do not drag doors across one another; lift doors and carry them into position. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Wood Doors: 08 1400 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install doors until wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 degrees F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of construction period. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with or trades as required to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 1. Coordinate fabrication of doors to receive hardware specified in Section 08 7100. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Signed by manufacturer, installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials and workmanship, and do not meet specified fabrication tolerances. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion. a. Interior Solid Core Doors: Life of installation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Flush Wood Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. Ampco 3. BJ Doors. 4. Cenco. 5. Eggers Industries. 6. Graham. 7. Lynden Door, Inc. 8. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 9. Vancouver Door Company, Inc. 10. VT Industries. 11. Western Oregon Door. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Wood Doors: 08 1400 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2.2 FLUSH DOORS A. Interior Solid Core Doors: 1. Types: Flush face. 2. Construction: PC-5 or PC-7. 3. Sizes and Relites: See Door Schedule. 4. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 5. Core: Particleboard; ANSI A208-1 Grade 1, LD-2. 6. Side Stiles: 1-3/8 inch minimum width. 7. Finish: Transparent. B. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Face Veneer Species: Oak, match existing cut. 2. AWI Grade: Custom, with AWI Veneer Grade A face sheets. 3. Veneer Thickness: Minimum 1/50th inch at 12 percent moisture content. 4. Veneers: Face: Match existing. 5. Assembly: Running match. 6. Edge Bands: a. Side Stiles: 1-3/8 inch minimum width hardwood stiles, matching face veneer color for doors with transparent finish. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Comply with the following AWI Quality Standards: 1. AWI Section 1300 for Architectural Flush Doors. B. Bond door faces to cores, stiles and rails with adhesive. Bond edge banding to core. C. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard core doors as indicated to eliminate through- bolting hardware for hardware items listed below. 1. Closers: 5 inch top rail blocking. 2. Kick, Mop, or Armor Plates: 5 inch bottom rail blocking. 3. Exit Devices: 5 inch mid-rail blocking. D. Machine and hand sand exposed surfaces. E. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated with uniform clearances and bevels per requirements of referenced quality standard. F. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 2.4 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference between 2 diagonal measurements. B. Maximum warp: 1/4 inch space measured from horizontal, vertical, or diagonal straight edge to point of maximum bow, cup, or twist. C. Maximum stile, rail and core telegraphing show-through at door face: 0.01 inch in any 3 inch span. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Wood Doors: 08 1400 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. 1. Comply with AWI Quality Standards of Section 1500 for finishing. B. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish System: Post-Catalyzed Lacquer, as specified in Section 09 9000. 3. Staining: Match existing. a. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl washcoat to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. b. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grained woods. 4. Sheen: Match existing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with specified requirements for type, size, location, and swing, and have been installed plumb and level. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: Installed under provisions of Section 08 7100. B. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frame for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Fitting and machining: 1. Tolerances: a. Bottom: 1/4 inch clearance maximum. b. Top: 1/8 inch clearance maximum. C. Lock edge and hinge edge: Bevel 1/8 inch in 2 inches maximum. 2. Machine doors for hardware in accordance with recommendations of hardware Manufacturers. 3.3 COMPLIANCE A. Owner may employ a representative of reference organization to inspect and determine that Work of this Section has been performed in accordance with specified standards. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Wood Doors: 08 1400 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 3.4 ADJUSTING A. During warranty period, check, adjust and service moving parts to operate smoothly and quietly. 1. Adjust as necessary door bottoms for correct clearance. 2. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and show no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Access Doors and Panels: 08 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for blocking out openings in metal stud framing. 2. Section 09 900 Painting, for field applied finish. 3. Division 22: Plumbing, for access panels for valves. 4. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, for access panels for dampers. 5. Division 26: Electrical, for access panels for electrical equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data for each type of product indicated. 1. Include construction details, fire ratings, components, materials, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of all access units on record drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS UNITS -WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit in Drywall Walls or Ceilings: 1. J. L. Industries Inc.: Model TM. 2. Karp Associates, Inc.: Type KDW 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company: L-DWC. 4. Milcor Inc.: Standard Flush Access Door, Style DW. 5. Nystrom, Inc.: Standard NW. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Access Doors and Panels: 08 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit in Drywall Walls or Ceilings: 1. J. L. Industries Inc.: Model FD or FDWB. 2. Karp Associates, Inc.: Non-insulated Type KRP-250FR. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company: L-FRAP. 4. Milcor Inc.: Universal Fire-Rated Access Door(UFR). 5. Nystrom, Inc.: Standard IW. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Access Doors and Frames for Walls and Ceilings: 1. Fabricate frames of 16 gage steel. 2. Fabricate door panels of 14 gage steel single thickness steel sheet for non-fire rated panels, and manufacturer's standard gage for fire rated panels. 3. Hardware: a. Hinge: 175 degree steel hinges with concealed constant force closure spring type. b. Furnish number of latching mechanisms required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. C. Lock: Screwdriver slot for quarter turn cam lock. C. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. D. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to type of supports indicated 2.3 FINISHES A. Base Metal Protection: Prime coat units with baked on primer. B. Finish: Field paint exposed door and frame surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Review locations where access doors are required. B. Verify clearance for door swing and door access to required equipment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjusting Defective Work: Repair scratched door surfaces to match factory prime finish. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Access Doors and Panels: 08 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 B. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. C. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. D. Clean door and frame surface prior to field painting. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Aluminum-Framed Entrances: 08 4113 Water Building Renovation Page 1 June 24, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. New entrances in existing exterior aluminum storefronts. 2. Interior aluminum storefronts. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware. 2. Section 08 8000: Glazing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product specified; include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show dimensions, fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of work of this Section with work of adjacent trades. C. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. D. Samples: For each exposed member illustrating finish, color, texture and sheen. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled Workers who are trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. B. Installer to be approved by manufacturer. C. Product Options: Sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements indicated are based on specific systems indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to requirements of Section 01 2500 for substitutions. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Doors to comply with accessibility guidelines of The Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) and accessibility requirements of State Building Code. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication; if vary significantly from Contract Documents, obtain architect's approval before proceeding. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty agreeing to replace work of this Section that fails due to defective materials within 2 years after Date of Substantial Completion. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Aluminum-Framed Entrances: 08 4113 Water Building Renovation Page 2 June 24, 2007 B. Failure due to defective materials or Workmanship is deemed to include, but not to be limited to: 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. 3. Deterioration of metal, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. 5. Failure of operating components to function properly. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following manufacturer's products to replace existing entrances in existing exterior storefronts: 1. United States Aluminum. B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for interior glazed aluminum storefront system is based on the following: 1. United States Aluminum. C. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers with comparable products for interior glazed aluminum storefront systems are the following: 1. Arcadia. 2. EFCO Corporation. 3. Kawneer. 4. Traco. 5. Vistawall Architectural Products. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Interior Storefront Framing Components: 1. Center as detailed. 2. Framing System: United States Aluminum, Series 400-S. 3. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 inches by 4-1/4 inches. 4. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, 6063T5 aluminum alloy. 5 Fasteners: ASTM B 633, Aluminum, stainless steel, and zinc plated steel. B. Exterior Doors: 1. Door System: United States Aluminum Medium Style 400. 2. Nominal Stile Size: 1-3/4 by 3-1/2 inches. 3. Door.Height: See Door Schedule. 4. Minimum Bottom Rail Height: 10 inches. 5. Swing: Single acting. 6. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. 7. Finish: Match existing exterior storefront system finish. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. 2. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Aluminum-Framed Entrances: 08 4113 Water Building Renovation Page 3 June 24, 2007 D. Fasteners and Accessories: 1. Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. E. Sealant: 1. Glazing Sealant: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Framing Sealant: Silicone sealant as specified in Section 07 9200, or otherwise recommended by sealant and entrance and storefront system manufacturer to suit conditions. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.3 HARDWARE A. Provide heavy duty hardware units required and recommended by manufacturer for entrances indicated. 1. Finish exposed parts to match door finish. B. Provide complete hardware items required for exterior entrance doors not otherwise specified in Section 08 7100, including the following: 1. Center Pivots: ANSI/BHMA A 156.4, Grade 1. 2. Concealed Overhead Closers: ANSI/BHMA A 156.4, Grade 2. 3. Rim Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard for installation in exit devices complying with ANSI/BHMA A 156.5, Grade 1. 4. Pull Bars: As selected from manufacturer's full range of pull bars. 5. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled, based on testing according to UL 305; BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. 6. Thresholds: Manufacturer's standard aluminum threshold with cutouts coordinated for operating hardware, not more than 1/2 inch high, with beveled edges providing a floor level change with a slope of not more than 1:2. 7. Weather Stripping Manufacturer's standard replaceable components; compression type made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC. 8. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard for application to exterior door bottoms with concealed fasteners on mounting strips. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to profiles indicated. B. Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or required for a complete system. C. Provide hairline fit at joints, securely fastened, with smooth continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Aluminum-Framed Entrances: 08 4113 Water Building Renovation Page 4 June 24, 2007 ®. Perform fitting of finish hardware to doors and frames at factory, but do not drill or tap for surface mounted items until time of installation at site. 1. Use concealed fasteners to maximum extent practicable. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes to exposed aluminum surfaces. B. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Architectural Class I, integrally colored coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 1. Color: Black. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. 1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing entrance and storefront systems. 1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 3. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. B. Provide protection against electrolysis occurring between different adjacent metals as required. C. Set door thresholds in full bed of sealant. D. Remove protective coating completely from exposed surfaces as soon as progress of work shall permit with safety. E. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Section 08 8000. 1. When glazing is performed under this Section, provide types of glass required and glaze in accordance with storefront/doors/windows manufacturer's standards. F. Install sealant to comply with requirements of Section 07 9200. 3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. During warranty period, adjust and service moving parts of doors to operate smoothly and quietly. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Aluminum-Framed Entrances: 08 4113 Water Building Renovation Page 5 June 24, 2007 B. Clean exposed surfaces, including surfaces affected by work of this Section, and repair as required. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Pulbic Works Door Hardware: 08 7100 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes finish hardware for doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 1213: Hollow Metal Frames, to be provided templates for hardware. 2. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors, to be provided templates for hardware. 3. Section 08 4113: Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts, for hardware provided with aluminum entrances. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data including manufacturer's technical data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. B. Finish Hardware Schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. C. Keying Schedule: Indicate clearly how Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. D. Templates: For doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. 1. Verify with shop drawings and other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. E. Samples: Of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule. 1. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged may after final check of operation may be incorporated in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide services of an AHC or DAHC member of Door Hardware Institute to: 1. Be available for consultation with Architect/Owner at no additional cost to Owner during progress of construction. 2. Be available to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. B. Hardware consultant may be an employee of supplier. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware from a single manufacturer. D. Hardware supplier shall have and maintain a factory direct status with all manufacturers specified or approved during the course of the project to insure quality product knowledge and quick lead-tie response. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Pulbic Works Door Hardware: 08 7100 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide door hardware for fire rated openings complying with NFPA Standard No. 80 and current requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide only hardware that is listed and identical to products tested by U.L. or other testing and inspection agencies acceptable to governing authorities. B. Provide hardware tested according to NFPA 252 and UL 1784 for fire door assemblies labeled for fire resistance and smoke control ("S" label). C. Provide electric equipment with U.L. approved listing for complete assembly. D. Comply with requirements of ANSI Al 17.1.,The Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA), and State Building Code accessibility requirements for the disabled. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Individually package each unit of finish hardware, complete with proper fastenings and appurtenances, clearly marked on outside to indicate contents and specific locations in Work. B. Provide an experienced employee designated to receive, take charge of, and distribute hardware at building site. C. Provide locked secure area for storage of hardware on site. D. Protect from damage. Store above ground and under cover. 1.6 KEYING INFORMATION A. If required provide keying and bitting information to Owner at no cost. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warrant operation of closers for 10 years. B. Warrant operation of exit devices for 3 years. 1.8 CERTIFICATION A. Prior to Substantial Completion Date, provide written certificate that hardware is complete and conforms to Specifications and approved submittals. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fasteners: 1. Furnish necessary flat head screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor hardware in position for long life under hard use. 2. Where necessary, furnish fasteners with expansion shields, sex bolts, and other anchors as required. Provide material to which hardware is to be applied, and recommended by hardware manufacturer. a. Provide Glass Bead Kit if necessary for proper installation of exit devices. b. Toggle bolts are not permitted. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Pulbic Works Door Hardware: 08 7100 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 3. Provide fasteners that harmonize with hardware as to finish and material. 4. Conceal if possible when door is in closed position; exposed fasteners to have Phillips head. a. Through-Bolting Not permitted. B. Locks and Latches: Verify: 1. Operation 2. Hand of doors 3. Function for each opening. C. Closers: Verify for each door: 1. Hand of door 2. Degree of opening 3. Frequency of use 4. Head condition. a. Provide closers that do not limit door swing. b. Furnish drop plates for narrow top rails. C. Furnish manufacturer's standard one-piece cast arm at parallel arm location. d. Furnish closers at fire-resistant rated doors, exterior doors and elsewhere as shown. D. Hinges: 1. Furnish hinges of sufficient throw to clear trim where hinges are required to swing 180 degrees. 2. Furnish minimum 1-1/2 pair of hinges per leaf, unless specifically scheduled otherwise. E. Furnish silencers for door frames at rate of three for each single door and two for each door or pair of doors, except gasketed doors and doors with light seals or sound seals. F. Furnish smoke gaskets for fire-resistive rated doors in corridors or other exitways. G. Furnish door stops in number and type to protect finishes wherever doors or hardware thereon could strike adjacent surfaces. 2.2 KEYING A. Factory or locally key the following: 1. Master key cylinders 2. Grand-master key cylinders B. Furnish nickel silver keys for each lock as follows: 1. 6 masterkeys for each set 2. 3 grand-masterkeys. 3. 2 Change keys per lockset. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Pulbic Works Door Hardware: 08 7100 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 C. Construction keying: 1. Furnish a construction key system with 10 keys for locks and cylinders: 7 for Contractor and 3 for Owner. 2. Use only construction keys during construction. 3. Upon Substantial Completion of Work, void construction key system and, in presence of Architect and Owner, demonstrate specified keying system is operating properly. D. Identification and delivery: 1. Stamp permanent keys, "DO NOT DUPLICATE". 2. Identify permanent keys with tags, and send direct to Owner by registered mail or receipted personal delivery. 2.3 TOOLS AND MANUALS A. Deliver to Owner one complete set of adjustment tools and one set of maintenance manuals and installation instructions for locksets, closers, and panic devices. 2.4 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Single Source: Except as specifically otherwise approved in advance by Architect, furnish for each items (such as "Door Hinge Type 1") product of a single manufacturer B. Locks and Latches: 1. Latchbolt: Anti-friction type with curved strike lip. a. Provide extended lip where necessary to protect door frame trim from damage. b. Match hardware finish. 2. Fabricate with 3-3/4 inches backset from door edge where surface applied gasketing at door frame stops and 2-3/4 inches elsewhere. 3. Provide lever handle, unless otherwise indicated. C. Hinges: Mortise type, with non-removable pins at out-swinging doors with locks. D. Exit Devices: 1. Furnish with provisions for concealed mounting. Through-bolts are not acceptable unless required by fire codes or fire tests. 2. Exit device to include impact resistant, flush mounted end cap. End caps shall be of heavy-duty alloy construction and provide horizontal adjustment for flush alignment with device cover plate. No raised edges shall protrude from end cap. 3. Exit devices must be furnished with hydraulic touchpad dampener for quiet operation of device. 4. Furnish all exit devices with deadlocking latchbolts and roller strikes. 5. Furnish required filler plates and shim kits for flush mounting of exit devices on all doors. 6. Supply plastic installation template to increase accuracy and decrease installation time. E. Door Closers.- 1. losers:1. Mount on room side, and not corridor or lobby side of doors bordering circulation system unless otherwise shown. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Pulbic Works Door Hardware: 08 7100 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 2. Fasteners to be concealed. 3. Closer shall have heavy duty arms, adjustable spring power with indicator dial, stick- on templates, and self reaming/tapping screws. 4. Pressure relief valves are not permitted. F. Stops: 1. Provide wall stops; do not install floor stops unless specifically approved by Architect. 2. If wall stops cannot be installed, provide concealed overhead holder. G. Flush Bolts: Provide dust-proof strikes for floor locations. H. Kickplates: 1. Provide metal kickplates specified in Door Hardware Groups. 2. Anchor kickplates with oval-head full-thread screws, spaced uniformly at a maximum of 5 inches on center at kickplate perimeter. I. Provide hardware in finishes indicated in Door Hardware Groups. J. Manufacturer and Acceptable Substitutes: Acceptable Item: Manufacturer: Substitute: 1. Hinges: Stanley (S) Hager, Lawrence, McKinney 2. Locks/Latches: Best None 3. Cylinders: Best None 4. Exit Devices: Adams Rite None 5. Electric Strikes Von Duprin (VD) None 6. Flush Bolts Glynn Johnson (GJ) None 7. Surface Closers: LCN (L) None 8. Keypads HID None 9. Push Buttons Von Duprin (VD) None 10. Push/Pulls Best Trimco, BBW 11. Stops/Catches: Glynn Johnson (GJ) H.B. Ives, Trimco, BBW 12. Kickplates Tice (T) Trimco, BBW 13. Weatherstripping/ Gasketing: National Guard (NG) Pemko 14. Door Bottom National Guard (NG) Pemko 15. Silencers: Glynn Johnson (GJ) H.B. Ives 16. Wiring Diagram G.L. Sims (GLS) None PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install work of this Section in accordance with: 1. Hardware groups specified. 2. Approved Schedule. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Pulbic Works Door Hardware: 08 7100 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 3. Applicable requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 4. Templates. 5. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures. B. Hardware Locations: Mount hardware at locations recommended by manufacturer, requirements of ANSI A117.1, ADA, and State Building Code, as applicable. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. 1. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D Cut and fit threshold or floor plates to door frame profile with mitered corner joints; weld multiple pieces together. Set in full bead of sealant. 1. At carpet, install closer floor plates flush with structural substrate under carpet. 2. Secure to substrate with positive anchoring devices. E. After fitting mortised hardware to surfaces to be painted, remove and store hardware in original package in a secure place, and permanently reinstall after painting has been completed. 1. Properly wrap installed hardware subjected to hand usage during construction for protection; Replace hardware units at no expense to Owner where finish has been damaged by construction activities. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of Work, and as a condition of acceptance, provide inspection, and adjustment of operating hardware, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. 1. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 2. Clean operating units as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. B. After ventilation system has been balanced, manufacturer's representative to adjust closers as necessary to meet ADA and State Building Code requirements for time required for closing operation and opening force. C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation and repair damaged surfaces. D. Six Month and One Year Adjustment: Approximately six months, and prior to one year, after date of Substantial Completion, the installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work: 1. Examine and adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore proper operation and function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. 3. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems of substantial nature in the performance of the hardware. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Pulbic Works Door Hardware: 08 7100 Water Building Renovation Page 7 February 5, 2007 3.5 DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS A. Door hardware groups indicated in Drawings. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Glazing: 08 8000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following applications: 1. Doors 2. Interior borrowed lites 3. Glazed entrances 4. Storefront framing B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 1213: Hollow Metal Frames 2. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors 3. Section 08 4113: Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable)without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimum and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses indicated in Glass Product Schedule by analyzing Project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass in lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300 according to design wind loads applicable to Project according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." a. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lite per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. b. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm, except where window system is shop glazed and tested by manufacturer of window to perform as specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: With each product data submitted, other than monolithic clear float glass, include: 1. Glass: 12 by 12 inch samples of each type. 2. Sealants and Gaskets: 12 inches long of each type installed between samples of material to be glazed, fully cured. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated in Drawings, listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Glazing: 08 8000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts, familiar with specified requirements and methods of installation for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Source Limitations: Provide glass materials from one primary glass manufacturer for each type of glass specified. 1. Insulating Glass: Obtain components for each type of unit from same source as used in other applications for same components. 2. Provide glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. C. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in the following publications, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.- 1. ndicated:1. GANA Publications: GANA's"Glazing Manual". 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000. "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulated Glass Units." D. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201. E. Insulating Glass Certification: Permanently mark on each unit with appropriate certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with safety glazing requirements of State Building Code, Section 2406. B. Comply with wind loading requirements of State Building Code. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions, and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Provide written warranty against failure of glazing products due to defective materials or installation, including water leakage or air infiltration in excess of specified standard, for a period of 2 years after date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranties: Provide the following on manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by manufacturer: 1. Insulating Glass: 10 year labor and materials to warrant units against failure of hermetic seal. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Glazing: 08 8000 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2. Coated Glass: 10 year labor and materials to replace unit deterioration including peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS MATERIALS A. Products: Provide products that comply with requirements indicated in the Glass Product Schedule at end of Part 3. B. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality Q3 (glazing select), of class indicated in the Glass Product Schedule. C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, (transparent flat glass) Quality Q3 (glazing select), class, kind, and condition indicated in the Glass Product Schedule. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of individual lites and to comply with glass design requirements. 3. Provide Kind FT(fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS float glass where safety glass is indicated or required by State Building Code. a. Safety Glass: Where fully tempered glass is used as safety glass, provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201, for Category I or II materials as applicable. D. Sputter Coated (Low E) Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic oxide or metallic nitride deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any). E. Insulating Glass: ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units, complying with requirements in Glass Product Schedule, and following: 1. Sealing System: Dual Seal. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of lites and to comply with glass design requirements. 3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed of Kind HS glass where safety glass is indicated or required by State Building Code. F. Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II (patterned flat glass), Class 1 (clear), Form 3 (patterned), of quality, finish, and pattern specified. 2.2 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. i LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Glazing: 08 8000 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920, Type S (single component), Class 100/50, Grade NS (non-sag); Use NT(nontraffic), M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates, O. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types, or approved as recommended by window assembly manufacturer: a. Dow Corning; 790. b. General Electric; SilPruf LM SCS2700. C. Pecor; 864. d. Sonneborn Div of ChemRex, Inc; Omniseal. e. Tremco: Spectrem 3. 2.3 GLAZING TAPE A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl based elastomeric tape complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed cell, PVC foam tape, factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces, complying with AAMA 800, for applications where tape acts as a primary seal or is used in combination with a full bead of sealant. 2.4 GLAZING GASKETS A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material and type recommended by window assembly manufacturer for application, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide other materials complying with referenced glazing standard and requirements of glass manufacturers as required for applications indicated. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. D. Spacers and Edge Blocks: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place and to limit glass lateral movement. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings as indicated for Project. 1. Provide edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with referenced standards and requirements of product manufacturers. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Glazing: 08 8000 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system for exterior glazing. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 3.4 GLAZING, GENERAL A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. 2. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testing. B. Install setting blocks sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise recommended by glass manufacturer. 1. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. C. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches, and as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. 2. Install correct size and spacing of spacers to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances. 3. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. C. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation. 1. Do not install items that are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are scratched, abraded, or damaged in any other manner. 2. Set glass so distortion waves, if present, run in horizontal direction. 3. Set glass in a manner which produces greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Glazing: 08 8000 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 D. Glaze steelwork with closed cell tape bedding and silicone sealant. F. Miter-cut and seal joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where joints are required. G. Compress glazing tape or gaskets at least 25 percent of material thickness, with minimum finished thickness of 3/32 inch. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect glass from damage after installation by attaching crossed streamers or ribbons to framing held free from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. B. Remove excessive glazing compound from glazing and adjacent surfaces without damaging glass or adjacent surfaces. C. Replace broken, cracked, scratched, or otherwise damaged glass. D. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. 1. Protect glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces from build up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. E. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean glass surfaces on both sides no more than four days before date of Substantial Completion. 3.6 GLASS PRODUCT SCHEDULE A. Glass Type GL-1: (Tinted Insulated Glass) Insulating glass units complying with following requirements: 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 25 mm (1 inch). 2. Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). 3. Interspace Content: Air. 4. Uncoated Clear Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 5. Uncoated Tinted Outdoor Lite: Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing)with a tint color of bronze; Match PPG Solarbronze. 6. Performance Minimums: a. Winter U-Value: 0.47 b. Summer U-Value: 0.50 C. Shading Coefficient: 0.59 d. Visible Light Transmittance: 47 percent. B. Glass type GL-2: Tempered, uncoated, single pane glass units complying with following requirements: 1. Thickness of Lite: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). 2. Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A, (uncoated) Class 1 (clear) float glass. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Louvers and Vents: 08 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes louvers and vents. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal 2. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants 3. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for louvers that are a part of HVAC equipment, and HVAC ducts connected to louvers. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide louvers that meet or withstand the following minimum performance ratings or requirements: 1. Structural Performance: Gravity and wind loads based on minimum uniform pressure of 25 Ibf/sq. ft. 2. Seismic Performance: ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Load of Buildings and Other Structures. 3. Thermal Movements: Temperature change of 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. 4. Air Performance, Water Penetration, and Wind Driven Rain Ratings: As demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units according to AMCA 500-L. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, for each type of product specified. Include printed catalog pages showing AMCA Certified Ratings Seals, or evidence that product has been tested according to AMCA 500-L. B. Shop Drawings, to show plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and interface with adjacent construction. 1. Verify louver and vent openings by field dimensions prior to fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code—Aluminum. 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel. C. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision of work of those trades for interfacing with work of this Section. 1. Coordinate location, size, and other necessary requirements for proper connection of mechanical ductwork to louvers and vents. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Louvers and Vents: 08 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. The Airolite Company. 2. Cesco Products. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 4. Greenheck 5. Nystrom Building Products. 6. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5, T-52 or T-6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005. C. Fasteners: 300 stainless steel or same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal. D. Bituminous Paint: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate frame to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. C. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with manufacturer, concealed from view. 2.4 FIXED ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Type: Drainable head and blade louvers. B. Basis-of-Design Product: Greenheck ESD-403. C. Components: 1. Frame: 0.081 inch wall thickness. 2. Blades: 0.081 inch thickness. 3. Frame Depth: 4 inches. 4. Size: As shown. 5. Bird Screen: 1/2 inch square mesh with 0.063 inch wire, or 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick flattened, expanded aluminum. 6. Louver Factory Finish: Kynar 500. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Louvers and Vents: 08 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make weathertight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. 1. Set flanges and flashings in sealant specified in Section 07 9200. D. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Protect galvanized and nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. E. Where HVAC duct meets inside face of louver, provide sheet metal closure between perimeter of louver and perimeter of duct; paint exterior face of closure panel flat black. 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A. Clean exposed surfaces with water. Do not use acid or abrasive cleaners. B. Repair damaged finishes so that no evidence remains of corrective work. 1. Replace items that cannot be refinished in the field, or return to factory for refinishing of entire unit. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes gypsum board assemblies and accessories including the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Non-load bearing steel framing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 8443: Fire-Resistant Joint Firestopping, for fire-resistant sealant. 2. Section 09 8110. Acoustic Insulation and Sealant. 3. Section 09 9000: Painting, for gypsum board paint finish. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION A. Acoustic batt insulation and sealant in partitions is specified in Section 09 8110, Acoustic Insulation and Sealant. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, for each type of product indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. 1. Installer: Company with not less than 3 years experience installing gypsum board systems in project of similar size, quality and complexity under present name. B. Comply with the following standards: 1. ASTM C 645, Non-Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 2. ASTM C 754, Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard. 3. ASTM C 840, Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 4. Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association "Specification for Metal Lathing and Furring." 5. U.S. Gypsum Systems Folder SA 923. 6. Gypsum Association Document GA-216, Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 7. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau recommendations for gypsum wallboard finishes. C. For fire-resistant rated partitions, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 1. Line blockouts in walls for recessed toilet accessories, fire extinguisher cabinets, and the like, with gypsum board as necessary to preserve fire-resistive rating of partition. i f i LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 D. Mockup: 1. At an area on site approved by Architect, provide a mockup gypsum wallboard panel. a. Provide one mock-up panel for each gypsum wallboard finish used in Work. b. Minimum panel width 8 feet wide by full height of partition. C. Obtain Architect's approval prior to starting work. d. Approved mockups may be incorporated into finished Work. 2. Maintain mockup panels during construction in a undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed work. 3. Demolish rejected mockup panels and remove from job site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer, with labels identifying fire-resistance rating and water resistance. B. Store materials inside under cover, dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. 1. Store gypsum panels flat in a manner to prevent sagging. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain between 55 degrees F and 75 degrees F for 24 hours before installation, during installation, and for 24 hours after materials have dried. B. Maintain at least 30 foot candles of illumination measured 3 feet above floor in Work spaces during joint treatment. C. Maintain sufficient ventilation for proper joint treatment drying. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Steeler Inc. b. Scafco Corporation. C. Other Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) manufacturers. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2. Gypsum Products: a. BPB America, Inc. b. G-P Gypsum. C. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation. 3. Metal and Plastic trim: a. AMICO. b. Beadex. C. Plastic Components, Inc. d. Vinyl Corp. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Stud Framing, ASTM C 645: 1. Provide standard non-structural punched channel type steel studs with minimum 1/4 inch lip return at flange, with 1-1/4 inch flange depth, of widths indicated in Drawings, unless otherwise indicated. Provide metal studs of the following uncoated thickness for gage referenced: a. 0.0188 inch (25 gage). b. 0.0283 inch (22 gage). C. 0.0312 inch (20 gage). 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, minimum G40, Manufacturer's standard hot-dip galvanized coating. 3. Interior Partitions: Provide metal studs with the following minimum uncoated metal thickness, unless otherwise noted, for the following applications: a. Studs adjacent to doorjambs: 0.0312 inch (20 gage). b. Studs of over 12 feet unsupported height: 0.0312 inch (20 gage). C. Other studs: 0.0188 inch (25 gage). 4. Deflection Track: a. "Fire Trak" by Fire Track Corp. b. DFT(Deflection Track) by Steeler, Inc. C. "VertiClip" by The Steel Network, Inc. B. Steel Furring Channels: 1. ASTM C 645, hat shaped, 7/8 inch depth, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer's standard hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 653. a. Minimum G40 hot-dip galvanized coating for exterior soffits. 3. Minimum 0.0312 inch (20 gage) uncoated metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type steel sheet with minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (20 gage). LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 5. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch diameter wire. C. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 1. Size: Minimum 1-1/2 inch. 2. Uncoated Metal Thickness: 0.0566 inch (16 gage), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068 inch thick, galvanized steel. D. Z-Furring Members: 1. Minimum 0.0188 inch (25 gage) uncoated thickness, corrosion resistant steel per ASTM A 653, depth as indicated in Drawings. 2. Face Flange: 1-1/4 inch. 3. Wall Attachment Flange: 7/8 inch. E. Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: 1. Corrosion resistant steel per ASTM A 653, length as indicated, or required to suit application. 2. Minimum 0.0451 inch (18 gage) uncoated thickness by 8 inches wide, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer for Preformed Wall Backing System: "Notch-Tite" and "Flush Mount" backing for metal studs by Metal-Lite, Inc. F. Fasteners: Type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates. 1. Comply with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. G. Other Accessories: As required for a complete and proper installation, and as recommended by manufacturer of steel studs to suit conditions of installation. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36 or ASTM 1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. B. Gypsum Board: 5/8 inches thick with long edges tapered; Fire retardant Type X. 1. Gypsum board complying with ASTM C 442 may be used for gypsum backing board for multilayer applications, 5/8 inches thick, Type X. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: Comply with ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet or plastic. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control)joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 and GA-216: B. Acoustic Insulation and Sealant: Specified in Section 09 8110. C. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. D. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot-grouting hollow metal door frames. 2.6 JOINTING SYSTEM A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: Paper. C. Joint Compound: 1. Interior Applications: a. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. b. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound or drying-type, taping compound. 1) Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. C. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, topping compound. d. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, topping compound. e. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, topping compound. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 f. Optional Latex Surfacing: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish; one of the following: 1) National Gypsum Company: "ProForm" Brand Surfacer/Primer. 2) Sherwin Williams: "PrepRite" High Build Interior Latex Primer/Sealer. 3) USG Corporation: Sheetrock Brand "Tuff-Hide" Primer-Surfacer. 2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following, or approved, for water- based,job-mixed, drying-type texture finish for spray application: 1. Product: SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture, ready-mixed, by USG Corporation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates and verify conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 3.3 STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Anchor components firmly into position plumb, level and true. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Align partition wall and ceiling assemblies to a tolerance of one in 200 horizontally and one in 500 vertically without voids. E. Isolate steel framing where framing and furring abuts structure at the following locations: 1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter and where structure penetrates ceilings. 2. Where partition framing and wall furring abuts structure, except at floor. a. Install deflection track top runner for lateral support and avoid axial loading. b. Install deflection and firestop track top runner at fire-resistive rated assemblies. C. Attach jamb studs at openings to track with stud clips. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 7 February 5, 2007 F. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members,- independently embers;independently frame both sides of joints. G. Install supplementary framing, including steel flat strap and backing plate, to support fixtures, heavy trim, casework, railings, toilet compartments, grab bars, toilet room accessories, furnishings, building equipment, and behind wall- mounted door stops. 1. Provide reinforced wall backing for grab bars that is capable of supporting at least 250 pound point load as required by building code. 3.4 PARTITION FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. 1. Prior to installation, apply 2 beads of acoustical sealant to back side of runners. B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. Do not fasten studs to top track to allow independent movement of studs and track. 2. Where stud partitions stop at or slightly above ceiling, brace partition to structure as required to stabilize partitions. C. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. D. Space studs at 16 inches o.c. maximum, unless otherwise noted. 1. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in the same direction. 2. Do not splice studs. 3. Align utility openings in stud webs. E. Form corners and intersections with three studs. Locate studs within 2 inches of internal corners. F. In cavity walls or other walls without finish material on both faces of studs, provide horizontal bridging between adjacent studs to eliminate stud rotation. G. Coordinate requirements for pipes and other items designed to be housed within wall system. H. Door Openings: Comply with GA-600, and the follows: 1. Provide partition high stud adjacent to door frame jambs and secure to jambs. 2. Provide additional partition high stud approximately 2 inches from each jamb-stud and attach to jamb-studs with spacers 18 inches above floor and at 12 and 27 inches below door frame top. 3. Install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. I. Other Framed Openings: Frame same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 8 February 5, 2007 J. Fire-Resistance Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with requirements of fire- resistance rated assembly indicated and support closures to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 1. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance rated assembly. 3.5 SOUND CONTROL PARTITIONS A. Install acoustic batt insulation and acoustical sealant in partitions designated for sound control. B. Install acoustic insulation specified in Section 09 8110. C. Acoustical Sealant: 1. Install acoustical sealant specified in Section 09 8110. 2. Seal construction at perimeters and at openings and penetration with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. a. Comply with ASTM C 919 for application of acoustical sealant. b. Where partitions meet ceilings and floors, Apply a continuous bead of sealant between a maximum gap of 1/2 inch between floor and bottom edge of gypsum board, or between ceiling and top edge of gypsum board. 1) Provide sealant full depth of gypsum board facings; do not skim coat over sealant. C. Apply acoustical sealant around penetrations, such as electrical boxes, pipes, and other items penetrating partitions. 3. Apply fire-resistant acoustical sealant at fire-rated acoustical walls. 3.6 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. General: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 1. Non-Loadbearing Steel Framing: Comply with ASTM C 645 and ASTM C 754. 2. Loadbearing Steel Framing: Comply with ASTM C 955. 3. Butt panel together for a light contact at edges and ends, with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 4. Locate edge and end joints over supports. 5. At internal and external corners, conceal cut edges of boards by overlapping covered edges of abutting boards. 6. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. 7. Maintain 3/8 inch minimum distance between fastener and board edge. a. Drive specified screws with clutch-controlled power screwdrivers. b. Dimple board surface 1/32 inch with fastener; do not fracture face paper. 8. Screw Fastener Schedule: a. Panel Perimeter Spacing: 8 inches o.c., unless otherwise noted. b. Panel Intermediate Support Spacing: 1) Walls: 12 inches o.c., typical. 2) Ceilings: 8 inches o.c. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 9 February 5, 2007 9. Isolate perimeter of non-load bearing partitions at structural abutments, except at floors. a. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joints at these locations. b. Trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum board are exposed. C. Seal joints with acoustical sealant, comply with ASTM C 919. B. Walls: 1. Install gypsum board with tapered edges vertical, and to within 1/4 inch of floor, unless horizontal application is required by GA or UL listing for wall types. 2. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partition. 3. Multi-layer Applications: a. Offset face layer joints at least one stud or furring member from base layer joints. b. Fasten base layer with screws and face layer with adhesive and supplementary fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Direct Bonding to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. Temporarily brace or fasten panels until adhesive has set. 3.7 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Ceiling Deflection: Provide framing and thickness of gypsum board, fastened as required, to achieve maximum deflection of 1/360 of span. B. Maximum Deviation from True Plane: 1/8 inch per 10 foot, and 1/16 inch in any running foot. 1. Check trim for conformance to tolerances. 3.8 CONTROL JOINTS A. Provide control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 1. Locate control joints at 30 feet maximum in ceilings, and 50 feet maximum in walls. 3.9 CORNER TREATMENT A. Internal Corners: Treat as specified for joints, but fold reinforcing tape lengthwise through middle and fit neatly into corner. B. External Corners and Exposed Edges: 1. Install specified corner bead, fitting neatly over corner and securing with same type fasteners used for installing wallboard. 2. Space fasteners approximately 6 inches o.c. and drive through wallboard into framing or furring member. i LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 10 February 5, 2007 3.10 OTHER TRIM A. Drawings do not show locations and requirements for all trim. 1. Carefully study Drawings and installation, and provide trim normally recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board. 3.11 GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly removed residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or bevel edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories not requiring tape. D. Levels of Finish: Comply with GA-214, and recommendations of Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau for gypsum board finishes, as follows.- 1. ollows:1. Level 1, One Coat Application: Above ceiling and concealed areas, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 3, Two Coat Application: Gypsum board surfaces to receive heavy grade, backed wall covering, or where acoustical panels are mounted on walls. 3. Level 4, Three Coat Application: Gypsum board surfaces with textured paint finish, flat paint finish, unbacked wall covering. 4. Level 5, Three Coat Application with a Skim Coat or Latex Surfacer: Gypsum board surfaces with smooth texture paint finish, or paint finish with higher level of gloss than flat. E. Application of Levels of Finish: 1. Level 1 Finish: One coat application. a. Embed tape in joint compound with surfaces free of excess joint compound. b. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. C. Cover fastener heads with one coat of joint compound in fire resistive assemblies. 2. Level 3 Finish: Two coat application. a. Embed tape in joint compound leaving a smooth thin coat of joint compound over tape. b. Apply a separate coat of joint compound over the dry first coat, leaving a smooth surface free of ridges, tool marks and sanding grooves. C. Cover fastener heads with a coat of joint compound followed with separate second as described above for taped joints. d. When finishing compounds are dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth surface, taking care to not scuff paper surface of wallboard. e. Wipe gypsum board surfaces with damp cloth. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 11 February 5, 2007 3. Level 4 Finish: Three coat application. a. Embed tape in joint compound leaving a smooth thin coat of joint compound over tape. b. Apply a separate coat of joint compound over the first coat, leaving a smooth surface free of ridges, tool marks and sanding grooves. C. Apply a final coat of joint compound feathered out over the second coat, leaving a smooth surface flush with gypsum board and free of all marks. Feather finishing compound to not less than 12 inches wide. d. Cover fastener heads with a coat of joint compound followed with separate second and final coats as described above for taped joints. e. When finishing compounds are dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth surface, taking care to not scuff paper surface of wallboard. f. Wipe gypsum board surfaces with damp cloth. 4. Level 5 Finish: Three Coat Application for Level 4 Finish with a Skim Coat or Latex Surfacer. a. Skim Coat: A thin coat of joint compound over entire finished gypsum board surface. Wipe down immediately, leaving a tight smooth film of joint compound. 3.12 WATER RESISTANT SEALANT A. Apply a continuous bead of water resistant sealant around cutouts at raw edges and at penetrations of water-resistant gypsum board and glass-mat water resistant tile backer board. 3.13 GROUTING OF WELDED HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Grout full heads and jambs with fast setting gypsum compound. 3.14 GYPSUM BOARD SURFACE TEXTURE A. Match existing surface texture of adjacent walls, in accordance with approved mock-up. B. Apply texture compound only after gypsum board joints are taped and dry, and after painter- applied surface primer specified in Section 09 9000, Painting, is applied and dry. 3.15 REPAIRS A. Repair screw pops by installing new screw approximately 1-1/2 inches away from projecting screw and reset projecting screw if face paper is fractured, remove projecting screw, fill damaged surface and finish flush and smooth. B. Fill cracks; finish flush and smooth. 3.16 CLEANING UP A. Clean exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section, and repair imperfections in finish. B. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum board scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 Water Building Renovation Page 12 February 5, 2007 C. Remove scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section at completion of each segment of installation and dispose of in legal manner. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Tiling: 09 3000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Removing existing grout and installing new grout in existing ceramic tile floors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product specified, including installation and maintenance instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock-Up: 1. Install grout in 10 square feet of existing flooring. 2. Architect will review for correct color. 3. Approved mock-up may be incorporated in the finished Work. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Grout Materials: 1. Bostik Chemical Group 2. C-Cure Chemical Company 3. Custom Building Products 4. Flex Tile Ltd. 5. Laticrete International, Inc. 6. Mapei Corporation 7. Upco Co. 8. USM Corp. B. Cleaning Materials.- 1. aterials:1. American Olean Tile Co. Division 2. AquaMix, Inc. 3. Hillyard Chemical Co. 4. National Gypsum Co. C. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 TILE ACCESSORIES A. Sealant: Interior Nonacid silicone rubber sealant. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS i A. Latex Portland Cement Grout: Color as selected, by one of the following: 1. Custom Building Products QT with Laticrete#3701 Admixture. 2. Dry Bond Joint Filler with Laticrete#3701 Admixture. 3. Mapei Ker 200/800 Series. 4. Upco Co. Hydroment Joint Filler with Upco Co. Hydroment Additive. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Tiling: 09 3000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrates are ready to receive work of this Section. 1. Correct conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean existing concrete floor surface as recommended in forward to ANSI A 108.5 and ANSI A 108.6. B. Remove existing grout and sealant from existing the joints. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with grout manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Joints: 1. Install sealant at joints between the and plumbing fixtures. 2. Install grout at joints to comply with ANSI A 108.10. a. Match existing grout color in accordance with approved mock-up. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Rake and regrout defective grout joints. B. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean tile and joints with Tile Cleaner after curing grout. 2. Rinse with clean water and allow to dry. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Acoustical Ceilings: 09 5100 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical ceiling panels. 2. Exposed suspension system for ceilings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4115: Design-Build Requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling mounted items, and details of installation. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Ceiling mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 3. Details for lateral restraint, compression post installation, method of attaching posts and hangers to building structure, and interface of work of adjacent trades C. Samples: 1. Acoustical Panel: Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Molding, and Trim: 12 inches long of each type, finish, and color. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. B. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following, or as otherwise acceptable to governing jurisdiction according to prescriptive design indicated in Drawings: 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 2. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies- Seismic Zones 3 &4." LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Acoustical Ceilings: 09 5100 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceiling or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Deliver to Owner an extra stock of approximately 2 percent of each type of acoustical material installed, separately packaged, marked, and protected against deterioration. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS A. Acoustical Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of products that comply with ASTM E 1264 classification, Type and Form as indicated, for each designation in the Acoustical Ceiling Panel Schedule at the end of PART 3. 1. Type and Form:Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felded. 2. Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth then tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or STM G 21. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635 for each designation in the Acoustical Ceiling Panel Schedule at the end of PART 3. B. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide zinc-coated carbon-steel wire complying with ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times the design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung")will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135 inch diameter wire. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: 1. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. 2. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Company. B. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements and fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension system indicated, formed of sheet metal of same material,finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. Perimeter Supporting Closure Angles: Minimum 2 inch horizontal leg width. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Acoustical Ceilings: 09 5100 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, required for a complete installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, SUSPENDED CEILING PANELS A. Install acoustical ceiling to comply with ASTM C 636, with seismic restraint complying with ASTM E 580 and CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies-Seismic Zones 3 &4." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less than half width panels at border. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers to miss obstructions. Where width of ducts and other construction interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. D. Install edge moldings and trim at perimeter of acoustical ceilings and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. E. In each orthogonal horizontal direction, attach one end of ceiling grid to the perimeter supporting closure angle, and rest the other end of the ceiling grid upon and free to slide on a closure angle, with 3/4 inch clearance from the wall. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A. Clean exposed surfaces of grid and acoustical materials using cleaning materials recommended for purpose by manufacturer of material being cleaned. B. Remove and replace panels that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to eliminate evidence of damage. C. Remove and replace suspension system runners that are dented, bent, or kinked. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Acoustical Ceilings: 09 5100 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 3.4 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL SCHEDULE A. Acoustical Ceiling Panel, ACP-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide water-felted, mineral-base acoustical panels complying with the following: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: a. Armstrong World Industries: Fissured 705. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers with comparable products are the following: a. BPB Celotex. b. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Color: White. 4. Light Reflectance: LR 0.80-0.81. 4. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55. 5. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 30. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E 1264; Flame Spread 25 or under. 7. Edge Detail:Angled tegular with reveal sized-to-fit flange of exposed suspension system. 8. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 9. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 3.5 CEILING GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Suspension System for Acoustical Ceiling Panel, ACP-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panel ceiling suspension system complying with the following: 1. Wide-Face, Single-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet electrolytically zinc coated, with prefinished 15/16- inch-wide flanges, and as follows: a. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty. b. Face Finish: Painted white. C. Adjustable seismic compression struts by USG Interiors, or approved. d. Hanger wire: Galvanized carbon steel, soft temper, prestretched, yield stress load at least three times design load, but not less than 12 gauge. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: a. Armstrong World Industries: Prelude XL. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers with comparable products are the following: a. Chicago Metallic. b. USG Interiors, Inc. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet flooring. 2. Tile flooring. 3. Resilient wall base. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 6813: Tile Carpeting, for resilient accessory requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of seams and edges. Indicate location of columns, doorways, built-in cabinets, and cutout locations. C. Samples: 12 inch by 12 inch for each type, color, and pattern of resilient flooring product specified, and 12 inch length for each type and color of wall base and accessory. 1. For heat-welding bead, not less than 12 inches long of each color specified. E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. D. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of Resilient Floor Covering Institute: "Standard Specifications and Recommended Work Procedures of Resilient Floor Coverings." B. Installer: Engage installer who is approved by manufacturer, in writing, is competent in technique required for heat-welded seams, and has successfully completed five projects of similar size, quality and complexity. C. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper interface with work of this Section. D. Mockups: Before installing linoleum floor coverings, construct mockups for each type of linoleum floor covering and installation method required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Comply with the following requirements, using materials specified for completed work: 1. Locate mockups where directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of date and time mockups will be constructed. 3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the work. 4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed work. a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from project site. b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed work. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction concerning use of products with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs). B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products complying with the following tests: 1. ASTM E 648: Critical Radiant Flux; 0.45 W/sq. cm. or greater. 2. ASTM E 662: Smoke Density; maximum specific optical density of 450 or less. C. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide floor covering materials in exits and in accesses to exits complying with the following in accordance with NFPA 101: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in unopened packages with Manufacturer's original, legible labels intact. B. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use, and manufacturer's run number for matching floor coverings. C. Store products in dry spaces protected from weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 and 90 degrees F. D. Store rolls upright. Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not start installation of resilient floorings until permanent HVAC system is in complete operation. 1. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours after installation. B. Move linoleum floor coverings and related products into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install linoleum floor coverings until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. D. Install resilient floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. E. Do not install resilient floor coverings over concrete slabs until concrete is sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by floor covering manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture tests for the following. 1. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Maximum moisture emission rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in accordance with ASTM F 1869, unless otherwise recommended by flooring manufacturer for specific products. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is applied. 3. Conduct tests by an independent testing agency, engaged by the Owner, under provisions of Section 01 4500. F. Coordination: Coordinate with work of other Sections that require resilient floor accessories. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field verify dimensions prior to installation; if differing substantially from Drawings, or approved Shop Drawings, obtain Architect's approval before proceeding. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra stock of each type, color, and pattern of floor covering installed, as follows: 1. Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof installed. 2. Sheet: Furnish 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width, of floor covering installed. B. Furnish extra stock of not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet of each type, color, and size of resilient accessory installed. C. Package each type of material separately, identified, and protected against deterioration. D. Deliver to on-site location designated by Owner. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. 2.2 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS A. Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Provide products complying with ASTM F 1913, Type II, Grade 1, and with requirements specified in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. 2.3 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS A. Consisting of oxidized linseed or other vegetable drying oil and rosin, mixed with ground cork or wood flour, mineral filler, and pigments. Mixture is bonded and keyed to a burlap (jute) or other suitable fibrous backing so that backing is partially embedded in mixture. Patterns and colors extend through entire floor covering thickness. 2.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Wall Base: 1. Provide products complying with ASTM 1861, Type TP, (Rubber, Themoplastic) and with requirements specified in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. 2. Style: a. Style A, Straight with no toe at carpet. b. Style B, Cove, topset with toe at other locations. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Public Works Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 3. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch. 4. Length: Continuous. B. Rubber Accessory Moldings: Provide products with requirements specified in the Rubber Accessory Moldings Schedule at the end of PART 3. 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Leveling and Patching Compounds: 1. Ardex SD-P Instant Patch or Ardex SD-F Feather Finish, as applicable, 2. Armstrong Latex Underlayment S-183 or S-184 as applicable. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining. D. Heat-Welding Bead:Solid strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding seams. E. Chemical Bonding Compound: Product of floor covering manufacturer for chemically bonding seams. F. Cove Strip: 1 inch radius support for integral cove base provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. G. Cove Base Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap for integral cove base provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. H. Rubber Edge Strips: 1. Size: One inch wide, beveled, matching flooring thickness. 2. Color: As selected from standard range. I. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish, of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of floor covering, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. J. Sealant: 1. Manufacturer: Dow Corning, General Electric, or approved. 2. Type: ASTM C-920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS; Clear, translucent silicone with mildew inhibitor. K. Cleaners: Neutral type provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and surface conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerance, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete floor slabs are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, foreign deposits, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 2. Verify moisture vapor emission tests have been performed for concrete substrates. 3. Verify that subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, and depressions, and that open joints have been filled. 4. Verify that substrate is smooth and level, with flatness not exceeding 3/16 inch in 10 ft., noncumulative, in all directions. 5. Verify that bottom of wall surfaces to receive base are within 1/4 inch from top of floor. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with resilient floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions for preparing substrates to receive resilient floor products. 1. Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes and depressions in substrates, including open joints, and to align substrates with adjacent surfaces. 1. Build-up and feather out leveling compound a minimum of 4 feet from adjacent floor surfaces to achieve alignment of top of finish flooring surfaces. 2. Level subfloor to achieve flatness of 3/16 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative, in all directions. 3. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps and ridges. C. Remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible with resilient products, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Move linoleum floor coverings and related products into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. F. Priming: Apply concrete slab primer as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Scribe, cut and fit flooring neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, and around pipes and penetrations. B. Extend flooring into recesses such as door reveals and toe spaces, closets, under saddles and recesses, and similar openings. C. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish floorings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. D. Adhere sheet floor covering to floor substrates in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. E. At horizontal unprotected edges, unless otherwise noted, place resilient reducer strips tightly butted to units and secured with adhesive; where reducer strip occurs at doorway, center strip under door. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 3.4 SHEET VINYL FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. D. Lay out to achieve a minimum number of seams; place in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. E. Match edges for color shading and pattern at seams. F. Adhere sheet floor covering to floor substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising or puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. G. Chemically Bonded Seams: Chemically bond seams with bonding compound, permanently fusing sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare seams and apply compound according to manufacturer's instructions and ASTM F 693. 3.5 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with linoleum floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Lay out sheet flooring to maintain uniformity of covering direction. C. Lay out to achieve a minimum number of seams, and place in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, not less than 6 inches from parallel joints in flooring substrates. D. Match edges for color shading and pattern at seams according to manufacturer's instructions. E. Avoid cross and abutt seams. F. Integral Flash Cove Base: Where indicated, cut sheet flooring to form integral base of height indicated at vertical surfaces. Support at juncture of horizontal and vertical surfaces with cove strip. Terminate top of coved base with a cap strip. G. Heat-Welded Seams: Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead, permanently fusing sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams according to manufacturer's instructions and ASTM F 1516. H. Hand roll sheet floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed in adhesive and eliminate trapped air. 3.6 LINOLEUM TILE FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with tile manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that units at opposite edges of room are of equal width. 1. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 3 inches wide at room perimeters. 2. Lay units square to axes of room or space. 3. At corridors, provide full tile for pattern centered on corridor width. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 Water Building Renovation Page 7 February 5, 2007 4. Match units for color and pattern by using materials from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. 5. Lay tile in a basket weave with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles. 6. Lay tile in pattern of colors and sizes indicated in Drawings. C. Hand roll tiles according to tile manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Install resilient products according to manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Apply wall base to walls, columns, wall projections, casework and cabinet toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures, in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Where applied on irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's adhesive filler material. E. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. F. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Form from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Form from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3. Set toe of base in continuous bead of sealant. Remove excess sealant from exposed surfaces. 3.8 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Resilient Molding Accessories: 1. Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 2. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove excess adhesive and other residue from exposed surfaces using neutral cleaner recommended by manufacturer of resilient materials. B. Clean floor surfaces as recommended by floor covering manufacturer. i j LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 Water Building Renovation Page 8 February 5, 2007 C. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to floor surfaces that are free from soil, adhesive, and surface blemishes, if recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer for specific products installed. a. Seal linoleum with not less than 3 coats of floor polish. b. Use commercially available product acceptable to floor covering manufacturer. C. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. After drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) disappears, cover linoleum floor coverings, and other resilient floorings, with non-dyed untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. 3.10 RUBBER ACCESSORY MOLDINGS SCHEDULE A. Rubber Accessory Moldings: 1. Product Description: a. Reducer strip for resilient flooring. b. Carpet edge for glue-down applications. C. Carpet nosing. d. Tile and carpet joiner. e. Cap for coved sheet floor covering. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Tile Carpting: 09 6813 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes carpet tile. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 6500: Resilient Flooring: Resilient wall base and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data and manufacturer's specifications for each type of carpet tile material and accessory required. 1. Include installation methods for carpet tile on each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Indicate the following.- 1. ollowing:1. Carpet tile type, color, dye lot, and where dye lot changes occur. 2. Type of subfloor and installation method. 3. Pattern layout and starting point. 4. Pile direction. 5. Type, color, and location of inserts and borders. 6. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips, including transition details to other materials. C. Samples for verification, from same material to be used in the work: 1. Two full size samples of each type and color of carpet tile specified. 2. 12-inch samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item. D. Schedule of carpet using same room number designations indicated in Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain removal products and procedures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide carpet the that comply with Department of Commerce Flammability Standard CO FF 1-70, ASTM D 1335 and ASTM D 2859. 1. Carpet in Exitways: Comply with requirements of National Bureau of Standards Radiant Panel Test 75-950. 2. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630. B. Provide carpet tile that comply with ASTM E 84 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials for the following ratings.- 1 atings:1. Flame spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke density: 450 or less. C. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. D. Electrical Resistance: Meet requirements of AATC 134 Electrostatic Propensity of Carpet. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Tile Carpting: 09 6813 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 E. Provide carpet of each color/pattern from same dye lot. F. Coordinate wWork of this Section to interface with work of other trades. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction concerning use of materials with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs). 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rugs Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and Handling." B. Deliver materials in original unbroken mill wrapping, with manufacturer's register number labels intact. Labels to include identification of manufacturer, brand name and lot number. C. Store in an area protected from weather and damage in a well-ventilated area. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2: "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Do not install carpet the until space is enclosed and weatherproof, nominally dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. C. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by carpet tile manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 1. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Maximum moisture emission rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in accordance with ASTM F 1869. 2. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range or 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is applied. 3. Conduct tests by an independent testing agency, engaged by the Owner, under provisions of Section 01 4500. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field verify dimensions prior to installation; If differing significantly from Drawings, or approved Shop Drawings, obtain Architect's approval before proceeding. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide the following warranties: 1. 5 year warranty that carpet shall maintain specified limits of static electricity generating. 2. 10 year warranty that carpet shall not lose more than 10 percent of face fiber by weight. 3. 10 year warranty that carpet shall not delaminate from substrate, curl, cup, shrink, or deteriorate at edges. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Tile Carpting: 09 6813 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type, color and pattern indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Leveling and Patching Compounds: 1. Ardex SD-P Instant Patch or Ardex SD-F Feather Finish, as applicable, 2. Armstrong Latex Underlayment S-183 or S-184 as applicable. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the carpet tile manufacturer. D. Resilient Edge Strips: Product types to suit application specified in Section 09 6500 of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. E. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum type products to suit application, of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and surface conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerance, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete floor slabs comply with ASTM F 710. 2. Verify that concrete floor slabs are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, foreign deposits, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. 3. Verify moisture vapor emission tests have been performed for concrete substrates. 4. Verify that subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, and depressions, and that open joints have been filled. 5. Verify that substrate is smooth and level, with flatness not exceeding 3/16 inch in 10 ft., noncumulative, in all directions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's installation instructions for preparing substrates to receive carpet. 1. Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Tile Carpting: 09 6813 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes and depressions in substrates, and to align substrates with adjacent surfaces. 1. Build-up and feather out leveling compound a minimum of 4 feet from adjacent floor surfaces to achieve alignment of top of finish flooring surfaces. 2. Level subfloor to achieve flatness of 3/16 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative, in all directions. 3. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps and ridges. C. Remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible with resilient products, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13: "Carpet Modules." B. Installation Method: Glue-down; install every tile with releasable adhesive. 1. Install carpet tile only after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 2. Install carpet tile with pile inclination in one direction. 3. Scribe carpet tiles accurately at edges and fit neatly into breaks and recesses, against bases, around pipes and penetrations, under saddles and thresholds, and around permanent cabinets and equipment. 4. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves and similar openings. 5. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of finished carpet tile floor, install carpet tile before installation of these items. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1. Provide heavy non-staining paper or plastic walkways over carpet tile in direction of traffic, maintaining intact in carpeted space until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Acoustical Insulation and Sealants: 09 8110 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical insulation. 2. Acoustical sealant. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for installation of insulation in metal stud wall framing and installation of acoustical sealant. 1.2 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Acoustical blanket insulation and acoustical sealant in partitions is installed under provisions of Section 09 2116, Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide with material of this Section a continuous acoustic barrier at interior partitions indicated in the Drawings when used in conjunction with materials specified in Section 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Certified test reports showing compliance with required fire performance values. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use workers who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 1. Flame Spread: No greater than 25. 2. Smoke Developed: No greater than 50. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. B. Store inside and in a dry location. C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. ASTM C 665, Type I, preformed glass-fiber or mineral wool type, unfaced; minimum 3/4 to 1 Ib/cu ft. density. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Acoustical Insulation and Sealants: 09 8110 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. Acceptable Products: 1. Owens Corning: Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation. 2. Johns Manville: Sound Control Batts. 3. United States Gypsum: Attenuation Blanket. C. Minimum Thickness: 1. Walls: 3 inches. 2.2 SEALANTS A. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-drying, permanently flexible, for use in conjunction with gypsum board conforming to ASTM D 217. 1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. ChemRex, Inc., Contech Brands; PL Acoustical Sealant. b. Pecora; AC-20 Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. C. U.S. Gypsum; "Sheetrock"Acoustical Sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: a. Miracle; 21 b. Pecora; BA 98 Acoustical Sealant. C. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Fire-Rated Acoustic Sealant: Single component, silicone penetration sealant capable of stopping passage of fire, smoke, and water when tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 and UL 1479, and capable of reducing sound transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 413; Dow Corning; Fire Stop Sealant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 09 2116 for installation of blanket acoustical insulation and acoustical sealant in partitions. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Painting: 09 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of paints and coatings. B. Related Sections: 1. Sections where factory preparation, priming, or priming and finishing, of painted or finished surfaces is specified. 2. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for substrate. 3. Division 22: Plumbing, for painting of plumbing work. 4. Division 23: Heating Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for painting of HVAC work. 5. Division 26: Electrical, for painting of electrical work. 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, and duct shafts. B. Metal surfaces of anodized or painted aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze, and similar finished materials shall not require painting under this Section, unless otherwise noted. C. Do not paint moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts. D. Do not paint required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. E. Do not paint gypsum board walls above suspended ceilings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The Master Painters Institute (MPI): Approved Product List, Latest Edition. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint', as included herein, means coating, systems materials including primers, emulsions, epoxy, stained enamels, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as primer, intermediate, or finish coats. B. Gloss/Sheen Parameter(Reflectance based off 60 degree angle reading) based on MPI (Master Painters Institute): 1. Gloss Level 1: Maximum 5 units. Flat matte finish 2. Gloss Level 2: Maximum 10 units Flat, high side sheen; velvet-like finish 3. Gloss Level 3: 10-25 units Eggshell-like finish 4. Gloss Level 4: 20-35 units Satin-like finish 5. Gloss Level 5: 35-70 units Semi-gloss 6. Gloss Level 6: 70-85 units Gloss 7. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units High gloss i LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Painting: 09 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Materials list of required coating materials. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number, general classification, and cross-reference with finish system and application. 2. Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. B. Samples: 1. Stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, of each color and material to be applied. a. Provide three Samples of each drawdown, approximately 8 x 10 inches in size, each marked with specified color designation. b. If requested by Architect, submit samples during construction representative samples of the actual substrate. 2. Revise and resubmit Samples as requested until required sheen, color, and texture is achieved. Approved Samples become standards of color and finish for accepting or rejecting Work of this Section. 3. Do not commence painting until approved Samples are on file at job site. C. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers who are trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Provide Work in conformance with recommendations in the"Architectural Painting Specification Manual" by The Master Painters Institute (MPI). C. Mock-up: Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project, where directed by Architect, and where permanent lighting has been activated. 1. Walls and Ceilings: Provide samples on a minimum of 100 sq. ft. 2. Doors and Frames: One door and frame at exterior steel and interior locations. 3. Approved mock-ups will be used as standard for Work of this Section. 4. Approved mock-ups may be used as part of the finished Work. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with legible labels intact. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum temperature of 45 degrees F. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Painting: 09 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F. B. Use low temperature paint products equal to specified products, as approved, for applications when air temperatures are below 50 degrees F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Applications may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer as being suitable during application and drying periods. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish and deliver to the Owner extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied equaling 5 percent, but not less than one gallon or more than 5 gallons, of each material, color, and gloss applied. 1. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage, clearly labeled describing contents and location where used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed in the Paint Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Other products listed in the MPI (Master Painters Institute)Approved Product List, latest edition, are acceptable, subject to compliance with requirements and approval. Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500; include paint manufacturers statement that proposed substitution is equal or superior to product listed. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Undercoats and Thinners: 1. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coat. 2. Use only thinners recommended by paint manufacturer, and use only to recommended limits. 3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a unified system of paint finish, except where material is factory primed. 4. Where accent colors are scheduled or indicated, provide appropriate and sufficient undercoats accordingly. C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Painting: 09 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 2.3 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. For application of paint materials, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of particular paint by manufacturer of that paint, and as approved by Architect. B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify proposed equipment is compatible with material to be applied, and integrity of finish will not be jeopardized by use of proposed equipment. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials required for a complete and proper installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not proceed with application of paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are receiving paint are thoroughly dry. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. 1. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers, or remove primer and reprime as required to achieve compatibility with finish coatings. 2. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems using materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to painted. If removal is impractical or impossible, provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. 2. After completion of painting operations in each space or area, reinstall removed items by using workers who are skilled in trades involved. B. Cleaning and Preparation.- 1. reparation:1. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations for each substrate condition, and as specified. 2. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of low toxicity and flash point in excess of 200 degrees F, prior to start of mechanical cleaning. 3. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet painted surfaces. C. Preparation of Wood Surfaces: 1. Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and other foreign substances. 2. Smooth finished surfaces exposed to view with sandpaper. 3. Do not proceed with painting of wood surfaces until the moisture content of the wood is 12 percent or less as measured by a moisture meter. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Painting: 09 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 D. Preparation of Metal Surfaces: 1. Ungalvanized, Uncoated Surfaces: Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease, and loose mill scale. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. 2. Ungalvanized, Coated Surfaces: Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease, and touch up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been damaged. Touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. E. Materials Preparation.- 1. reparation:1. Mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. 2. When materials are not in use, store in tightly covered containers. 3. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue. 4. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density. a. Do not stir surface film into material; remove surface film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply paint materials in accordance with manufacturers and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures. 2. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide a lighter shade in each undercoat to distinguish each separate coat. 3. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to unaided eye from a distance of five feet. 4. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint backsides to match exposed faces. 5. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 6. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch up painted. 7. Apply additional coats where undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until paint finish is uniform in color, appearance, and opacity. B. Drying: 1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying period as recommended by material manufacturer to suit weather conditions. 2. Consider oil-base and oleo-resinous solvent-type paint as dry for recoating when paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of thumb, and when application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of undercoat. C. Brush Applications: i 1. Brush out and work brush coats onto surface in an even film. 2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, and other surface imperfections to be repaired. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Painting: 09 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 D. Spray Application: 1. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide hiding equivalent of brush coats. 2. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass. E. For completed Work, match approved Samples as to texture, color, sheen. 1. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. F. Minimum Coating Thickness: Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system specified, but in no case less than recommended by the manufacturer. G. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures: 1. Exposed Mechanical Items: a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, plug mold, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents, and items of similar nature to match the adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces in finished spaces. b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers, and grilles flat black. C. Wash galvanized metal with solvent, prime, and apply 2 coats of specified enamel. 2. Hardware: a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces. b. Paint metal portions of head seals,jamb seals, and astragal seals to match color of door frame, unless otherwise directed by Architect. 3. Wet Areas (Toilet Rooms, Showers, Kitchens, Janitors, and the Like): a. Add an approved fungicide to paint. b. For oil base paints, use 1 percent phenylmercuric or 4 percent tetrachlorophenol. C. For water emulsion and glue size-sized surfaces, use 4 percent sodium tetrachloropenate. 4. Exposed Vents: Apply two coats of heat-resistant paint. 5. Plywood at Walls for Mounting Electric, Telephone and Data Equipment: Paint gray or blue as directed by Owner. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to engage an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being applied, and test for minimum coating thickness. B. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Painting: 09 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 7 February 5, 2007 C. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specification requirements. 1. The Contractor shall pay for testing, and repaint surfaces found to be coated with noncomplying paints. If the noncomplying paints are incompatible with specified paints, the Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from painted surfaces. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove from the site each day, empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded refuse created by Work of this Section, and dispose of in a legal manner. 1. Do not dump waste materials, including thinners, on site. 2. Do not use sanitary or storm drains. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect Work of other trades against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide"Wet Paint' signs at newly painted finishes. C. Touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces caused by other trades. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Provide minimum dry mil thickness of 3 mils, but in no case less than recommended by paint manufacturer, or as otherwise noted. B. Provide gloss/sheen indicated in this schedule unless otherwise indicated in Color Schedule. C. Use low temperature paint products equal to specified products, as approved, for applications when air temperatures are below 50 degrees F. D. Paint products followed with an *are acceptable products not MPI listed. E. Finish Coats: Ferrous and Galvanized Metals: 1. Second and Third Coats: Exterior Latex Semi-Gloss MPI #11 Benjamin Moore: MoorGlo Acrylic Latex House &Trim Paint 096.* ICI Dulux: Delux Exterior Acrylic Semi-Gloss 2407-0110. Kelly-Moore: Acry-Lustre Exterior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish 1250-121. Miller Paint Co: Acri-Lite Semi-Gloss 7500.* PPG: S/G Latex House Paint 78-45. Rodda Paint Co: Unique II Semi-Gloss Exterior Latex Enamel 54 2001 1. Sherwin Williams: A-100 Exterior Gloss Latex A8W16. 2. MPI Gloss Level 5: Semi-Gloss; gloss of 35-70 units at 60 degrees. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Provide minimum dry mil thickness of 3 mils, but in no case less than recommended by paint Manufacturer, or as otherwise noted. B. Provide gloss/sheen indicated in this schedule unless otherwise shown in Color Schedule. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Painting: 09 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 8 February 5, 2007 C. Paint products followed with an * are acceptable products not MPI listed. D. Primer: Gypsum Board: 1. First coat: Interior Latex Primer Sealer MPI #50. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Undercoater& Primer Sealer 253-00. ICI Dulux: Prep-N-Prime Interior Latex Wall Primer 1000-1200. Kelly-Moore: Acry-Prime Interior Latex Primer/Sealer 971. Miller Paint Co: Kril Primer Sealer 6040. PPG: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer 6-2. Rodda Paint Co: Scotseal Heavy Bodied Latex Sealer 50 7801 1. Sherwin Williams: PrepRite Interior Latex Primer B28W200. E. Primer: Ferrous Metal: 1. First Coat: Rust Inhibitive Primer(Water Based) MPI #107. Benjamin Moore: Acrylic Metal Primer M04. ICI Dulux: Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior W.B. Primer 4020. Kelly-Moore: DTM Acrylic Metal Primer 5725. Miller Paint Co: Acrimetal Primer— Finish White 5000. PPG: Pitt-Tech Rust Inhibitive Primer(W.B.) 90-712. Rodda Paint Co: Professional Maintenance Metal Master Primer 508901x. Sherwin Williams: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66A310.* F. Primer: Aluminum—Mill Finish: 1. First Coat: Vinyl Wash Primer MPI #80. Miller Paint Co: PPG Polyclutch Vinyl Wash Primer 97-687. Rodda Paint Co: Professional Maintenance Vinyl Wash Coat 709700X. Sherwin Williams: DTM Wash Primer B71 Y1 G. Finish Coats: Gypsum Board— Dry Areas: (Acrylic) 1. Second and Third Coats: Interior Latex Eggshell MPI #52 Benjamin Moore: Architectural Coatings Regal Aquavelvet 319-01. ICI Dulux: Dulux Professional Interior Latex Eggshell 1402 Series.* Kelly-Moore: Acry-Plex Acrylic Eggshell Enamel 1610-121. Miller Paint Co: MPI #52 'Eggshell-Like' MPI #52. PPG: Satin Latex Interior Acrylic 6-3511. Rodda Paint Co: Interior Eggshell Finish 333644 Sherwin Williams: MPI 52 Gloss level 3 Interior Latex Eg-Shel B20W8521. 2. MPI Gloss Level 3: 'Eggshell-like' finish; gloss of 10-25 units at 60 degrees. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Painting: 09 9000 Water Building Renovation Page 9 February 5, 2007 H. Finish Coats: Ferrous and Galvanized Metals, Gypsum Board-Wet Areas: (Acrylic) 1. Second and Third Coats: Interior Latex Semi-Gloss MPI #54 Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 276-01. ICI Dulux: Dulux Professional S.G. Wall and Trim Enamel 1406. Kelly-Moore: Acry-Plex Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 1650-121. Miller Paint Co: Acrinamel Semi-Gloss 7200. PPG: Speedhide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex 6-500. Rodda Paint Co: Master Painter Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 54 3101 1. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss B21 W251. 2. MPI Gloss Level 5: Semi-Gloss; gloss of 35-70 units at 60 degrees. I. System for Wood - Lacquer Finish (Stained): 1. First Coat: Interior Wood Stain, Semi-Transparent MPI #90. Benjamin Moore: Benwood Interior Penetrating Stain C234. Dunn-Edwards: Stainseal II V109. ICI Dulux: Woodpride Interior Semi-Transparent Wood Stain 1700. Kelly-Moore: Modern Wood Finish Wiping Stain 1281. Miller Paint Co: Modern Wood Stain 700. PPG: REZ Interior Wood Stain Semi-Transparent 77-560. Rodda Paint Co: Modern Wood Stain 716001 Line. Sherwin Williams: Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain A49V200. 2. Second Coat: Lacquer Sanding Sealer MPI #84. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Sanding Sealer 267.* Dunn-Edwards: 550 Decolac Clear Sanding Sealer LQ 140-0. Kelly-Moore: Kel-Lac Sanding Sealer 4183. Miller Paint Co: Valspar Valtec/NUF3000 Pre-Catalyzed Lacquer Sanding Sealer.* Rodda Paint Co: Cat-A-Lac Sanding Sealer 706400x. 3. Third and Fourth Coats: Lacquer, Clear, Satin MPI #85. Dunn-Edwards: 550 Decolac Satin LQ 144-0. Kelly-Moore: Kel-Lac Lacquer 2184. Miller Paint Co: Valspar Valtec/NUF3002 Pre-Catalyzed Lacquer Satin.* Rodda Paint Co: Cat-A-Lac Precatalyzed -Semi-Gloss 746400X. Sherwin Williams: Sher-Wood Moisture Resistant Lacquer T70F22. 3.9 PAINT AND COLOR SCHEDULE A. Provide gloss/sheen indicated in the Finish Legend in Drawings meeting parameters of gloss/sheen indicated in Paragraph 1.413, of products, or equivalent products, specified in Paint Schedules above. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Toilet Accessories: 10 2813 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes toilet room accessories. B. Related Sections.- 1. ections:1. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for metal blocking and support backing for wall mounted accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included in Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. C. Maintenance Data: For toilet accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. 1. Grab Bars: a. Comply with structural strength requirements for grab bars and mounting of grab bar fasteners as stated in Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. b. Coordinate placement of wall reinforcement for grab bars of sufficient length to meet the above requirements and capable of supporting at least a 250 pound point load. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with placement of internal wall reinforcement, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments for work of this Section. B. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning and servicing of accessories. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Toilet Accessories: 10 2813 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the Finish Legend in the Drawings, as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Doug Mockett. 3. Bradley Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312 inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 1008, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359 inch minimum nominal thickness. C. Tubing: ASTM A 269, stainless steel. D. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel. Provide tamper and theft resistant where exposed. F. Expansion Shields: As recommended by manufacturer for suitable for application. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish. 2.5 LOCKS AND KEYING A. Provide tumbler locks for all lockable access doors and panels. B. Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of 6 keys to Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify location and placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement in toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments for work of this Section. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Toilet Accessories: 10 2813 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. B. Install each item in its proper location, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to wall framing. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. i Tigard Public Works Fire Protection Specialties: 10 4400 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Cabinets for fire extinguishers. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for metal stud wall framing, wall finishes, blocking and support backing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, for each type product and accessory specified or required. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Include rough-in dimensions, mounting methods, trim style, door hardware, cabinet type, and panel style. B. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Provide extinguishers, cabinets and accessories from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Provide fire extinguishers that are UL listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification, or other independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interfacing with work of this Section. B. Coordinate size of fire extinguisher cabinets to ensure they are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in Manufacturer's original containers with original labels intact and legible. B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Fire Protection Specialties: 10 4400 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following: 1. J.L. Industries. 2. Larsen Manufacturing. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire extinguisher cabinet and at other locations indicated. B. Mounted in Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (FEC).- 1. FEC):1. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type in Steel Container: U.L. rating: 2A-10BC. 2. Capacity: 5 lbs. 3. Color: Red. 4. Mounting: One per cabinet. 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, fire extinguisher mounting bracket, and hardware to suit cabinet indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. B. Non-Fire rated Cabinet: 1. J.L. Industries Semi-recessed: Ambassador No. 1817F12 2. Larsen Manufacturing Co. Semi-recessed: Architectural Series No. 2409-R3. C. Mounting: Semi-recessed, with 2-1/2 inch rolled edge return trim. D. Materials: Steel cabinet with steel door. 1. Door style: Full glass. 2. Door glazing: 1/4 inch clear acrylic. E. Minimum inside cabinet dimensions: 9-1/2 inches wide by 24 inches high by 5 inches deep. F. Exterior and interior cabinet and door finish: Manufacturer's white, unless otherwise noted. 2.4 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Manufacturer's standard steel, size as required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish. 1. Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets. 2.5 STEEL FINISHES A. Factory Applied Baked Enamel Finish: Two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Fire Protection Specialties: 10 4400 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify walls and partitions have suitable framing depth and blocking where cabinets or wall brackets will be installed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with regulations of governing authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. B. Mount cabinets and wall brackets at height to comply with requirements of Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. C. Location: Refer to Drawings (Fire extinguisher cabinets are designated as "FEC"), or comply with requirements of NFPA 10. D. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. E. Apply sealant between cabinet flange and wall surface. F. Fill and service each fire extinguisher prior to Date of Substantial Completion; attach certificate of service, including date. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces and cabinet interiors. B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace cabinets that cannot be restored to factory finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire extinguisher cabinet manufacturer. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Residential Appliances: 11 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes residential appliances for kitchen applications. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 4000: Architectural Woodwork, for custom casework to receive residential appliances. 2. Division 22: Plumbing, for domestic water, and waste and vent piping connections. 3. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for venting duct connections. 4. Division 26: Electrical, for electrical service and connections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For each type of appliance indicated; include operating characteristics, dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance. B. Submit operating and maintenance instructions to include in maintenance manuals. C. Samples illustrating standard and optional colors available. D. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated in Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranties: Copy of special warranties specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, and marked for intended use. 2. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. 3. NAECA: Provide appliances that comply with National Appliance Energy Conservation Act (NAECA) standards. 4. ANSI: Provide gas burning appliances that comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards. 5. Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with "Americans with Disabilities Act" (ADA) and State of Oregon 1998 Edition of the Structural Specialty Code based on the 1997 Edition of the UBC, Chapter 11. B. Provide appliances that comply with the following Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (AHAM) standards. 1. Dishwashers: AHAM DW-DW1. 2. Electric Ranges: AHAM ER-1. 3. Refrigerators: AHAM HRF-1. 4. Freezers: AHAM HRF-1. 5. Trash Compactors: AHAM TC-1. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Residential Appliances: 11 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 C. Energy Ratings: Provide appliances that carry labels indicating energy cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade Commission (FTC)Appliance Labeling Rule. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store appliances in their original containers, with labels intact and legible. B. Do not deliver until finishes in areas of installation are complete and casework or cabinetry has been installed. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work of this Section with location and placement of utilities. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Provide written manufacturer's standard warranty for replacement or repair of appliances or components that fail in materials and workmanship within specified warranty period, including disconnection and removal of defective unit, and connection of replacement appliances. 1. Electric Range: 5 year limited warranty for surface burner elements. 2. Microwave Oven: 5 year limited warranty for defects in the magnetron tube. 3. Refrigerator/Freezer: 5 year limited warranty for in-home service on the sealed refrigeration system. 4. Dishwasher: 10 year limited warranty for in-home service against deterioration of tub and door liner. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Residential Appliances: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the Schedule in the Drawings. 2.2 UTILITY SERVICE A. As available for building; refer to Work of Divisions 22, 23, and 26 and the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Verify roughing-in for piping systems, ventilation outlets, and service connections are correct and in required location. C. Verify that electric power of correct characteristics is available. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Residential Appliances: 11 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Refer to Divisions 22 plumbing requirements, Division 23 for vent duct requirements, and Division 26 for electrical power requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT A. Test each residential appliance to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. C. Remove and replace appliances creating excessive noise or vibration. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove packing material and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. 1. Wash and clean appliances, polish glass, plastic, hardware, accessories, fixtures, and fittings. 3.5 DEMONSTATION A. Train Owner, or Owner's personnel, to adjust, operate, and maintain all appliances. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Louver Blinds: 12 2113 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal horizontal louver blind system. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each specified product. B. Shop Drawings: Show opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and operation, and relationship to adjoining work. C. Samples: Two samples of each product specified illustrating slat materials and finish, color, cord and rod type and color. 1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide ten additional slats and wands for each size assembly. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide horizontal louver blinds meeting requirements indicated in the Louver Blind Schedule at the end of PART 3. B. Louver Material: Aluminum. C. Controls: 1. Tilt Operation: Manual with wand. 2. Cord-Lock Operation: Cord lock. 3. Cord Equalizers: Self-aligning to maintain horizontal louver blind position. 4. Colors: As selected. 5. Valance: Match color of louvers. 6. Mounting: Between jambs of window openings, with two blinds per opening. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: Non-corrosive, self-lubricating materials. 2. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated from materials non-corrosive to blind materials. 3. Hold-Down Brackets: Manufacturer's standard. B. Fabricate blinds, two per opening, with uniform edge clearance of 1/2 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that concealed in-wall blocking is in place for proper anchorage of horizontal support brackets to walls and ceilings. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Louver Blinds: 12 2113 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install louver blinds in accordance with manufacturer's written installation procedures. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces and protect installed louver blinds from damage. 3.4 LOUVER BLIND SCHEDULE A. Horizontal Louver Blind, BL-1: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer: a. Hunter Douglas Window Fashions. b. Springs Window Fashions; Bali. C. Draper. 2. Product: Heavy-duty commercial grade, 1 inch metal mini-blind, prefinished. 3. Style/color: As selected from manufacturers standard line. 4. Location: All exterior windows in area of Work. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION .- 21 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 0500-Basic Materials and Methods. B. Section 23 0500- Basic Materials and Methods. C. Section 21 1300- Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler systems design. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASME (BPV IX)- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004. B. ASME B16.3- Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998. C. ASME 816.9- Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2003. D. ASTM A 53/A 53M -Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2005. E. ASTM A 135-Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Steel Pipe; 2005. F. ASTM A 795/A 795M -Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2004. G. AWWA C1 05/A21.5-Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American Water Works Association; 2005(ANSI/AWWA C1 05/A21.5). H. NFPA 13-Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2007. I. NFPA 14-Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2003. J. UL 262 -Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004. K. UL 312-Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004. L. UL 1091 -Butterfly Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Unerwriters Laboratories Inc; 2004. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Sections 22 0500 and 23 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used,jointing methods, supports,floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. Refer to Drawings for additional requirements. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION : 21 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL SYSTEM AND PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Replace all sprinkler heads in areas inside the building and beneath covered exterior walkway canopies as shown on plans. B. Revise exiating system to coordinate with revised building layout. C. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13. D. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code. 2.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795 Schedule 10, ASTM A 53 Schedule 40, or ASTM A 135 Schedule 10, galvanized. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME 1316.9, wrought steel, buttwelded, galvanized for exposed piping locations. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME 816.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4, threaded fittings, galvanized for exposed piping locations. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings, galvanized for exposed piping locations. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized. 5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe; galvanized. 2.3 GATE VALVES A. Over 2 inches: 1. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch, handwheel, OS&Y, solid rubber covered bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged ends. 2. UL and FM listed. 2.4 BALL VALVES A. Up to and including 2-1/2 inches: 1. Bronze body. 2. Brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel ball. 3. Teflon seats and stuffing box ring. 4. Handwheel operation and integral indicating device. 5. Grooved or threaded end connections. 6. Built-in tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. 7. UL and FM listed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION : 21 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. B. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. F. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 4. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. H. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. I. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings,floors, and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. J. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to installation. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS : 21 1300 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system. B. Dry-pipe sprinkler system. C. System design, installation, and certification. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 21 0500 -Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, and valves. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NFPA 13-Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2007. B. UL(FPED)- Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 21 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit preliminary layout indicating the routing of sprinkler piping and sprinkler locations. 2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. 3. Submit shop drawings and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction and Fire Marshal for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect. 4. See Drawings for additional requirements. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site. B. Conform to FM and UL requirements. C. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in Oregon. D. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear FM and UL label or marking. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS : 21 1300 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra sprinklers of type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by referenced NFPA design and installation standard. B. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. C. Provide metal storage cabinet adjacent to fire riser. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Sprinkler System: Provide dry pipe coverage for building areas noted. B. Sprinkler System: Provide wet pipe coverage for building areas noted. C. Occupancy: Light hazard; comply with NFPA 13. D. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data; verify hose stream allowances with Building Officials and Fire Marshal; provide 10 psig margin between the available water supply and the sprinkler demand pressures. 2.2 SPRINKLERS A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Recessed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 1. Finish: Chrome plated. 2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. B. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type. 1. Finish: Brass. 2. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. Sidewall Type: Recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate and guard. 1. Finish: Chrome plated. 2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. Dry Sprinklers: Exposed pendant type. 1. Finish: Chrome plated. 2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS : 21 1300 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. D. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. E. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers. F. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. G. Hydrostatically test entire system. H. Hydrostatic and flow tests shall be witnessed by a representative from the Fire Marshal's Office; schedule tests with the City, Fire Department, and Architect. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate required connection points to fire alarm system with Fire Alarm Subcontractor. B. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system. C. Coordinate locations of electric alarm with Fire Marshal, Architect, and Fire Alarm Subcontractor. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. System Hazard Areas: 1. Offices: Light Hazard. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS : 22 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 1 January 24, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic requirements for all work included in Division 22. B. Requirements for the following are included: 1. Related Work (other Contract Documents and specification sections)which must be combined with the requirements of this Section. 2. Submittals. 3. Regulatory Requirements. 4. Transportation and Handling. 5. Warranty. 6. Record Drawings. 7. Substitution Procedures. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. This general section shall be used in conjunction with the related Contract Documents in determining the total requirements for the installation of mechanical equipment and systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3100 -Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: See Section 0 1770-Closeout Procedures, for record document procedures. C. Project Record Documents: See Section 0 1770-Closeout Procedures,for operation and maintenance data requirements. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturer's standard data to provide information specific to this Project. 2. Shop drawings: Prepared specifically for this Project. 3. Samples for verification. B. See Section 01 3100-Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout. 1. Project record documents. a. Product data. b. Record Drawings: Within ten days after the date of system acceptance, the Contractor shall provide Record Drawings of the actual installation. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS .- 22 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 2 January 24, 2007 5. Other types as indicated. B. See Section 01 3100 -Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. 1.7 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3100-Submittal Procedures,for submittal procedures. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing plumbing and HVAC systems in commercial buildings with minimum five years of experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conformance with the latest Codes and other regulatory requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, and shall arrange for all inspections required by codes applicable to this Section. The Contractor shall submit written evidence to the General Contractor that required permits, inspections and code requirements have been secured. 1.10 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.11 WARRANTY A. All equipment and materials furnished and installed under this contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year from the date of acceptance thereof against defective materials, design, and workmanship. Acceptance shall be defined as the time when start-up and field testing show that the equipment operates satisfactorily and complies with all of the specification requirements. B. The above requirement does not negate the requirements for extended warranty periods listed in the technical specification sections. 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall keep day-to-day record of the installed locations for all equipment and materials as listed below: 1. All underground piping. Maintain dimensional accuracy within plus or minus 2-inches. 2. All piping concealed in walls or above ceilings that vary more than 12-inches from where they are shown routed on the contract documents. 3. Identify and dimension locations of all isolation valves. 4. Duct concealed in walls or above ceilings that vary more than 12-inches from where they are shown routed on the contract documents. B. Underground utility services, both inside and outside of buildings, shall be dimensioned from permanent structures or benchmark. Utility services outside of building shall also show depth of burial with reference to the finished ground floor elevation. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS : 22 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 3 January 24, 2007 C. Immediately on commencing work on the project, obtain a set of prints of the contract drawings pertaining to this branch of work. This set of drawings shall be kept on the project site at all times for use in recording "record"conditions. D. At the completion of the project, Record Drawings shall be certified as to their correctness by the signature of the Contractor and shall be stamped or otherwise identified as record drawings. 1.13 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. B. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. C. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. See Section 01 6000-Product Requirements,for substitution submittal procedure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment shall be the manufacturer's most recent and proven standard design. Equipment designs which have not been used successfully in a similar applications are not acceptable. B. Materials shall be new, and shall comply with the requirements of the specified products. 2.2 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Provide firestop systems at through-penetrations of fire-rated wall, shaft,floor, floor/ceiling, and roof/ceiling assemblies in accordance with the code requirements and Section 07 8443- Fire- Resistant Joint Firestopping. B. Submit product data and installation instructions for each penetration type in accordance with Section 01 3300 -Submittal Procedures. Coordinate the minimum F and T rating requirements with the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer's instructions. B. All work shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by licensed installers skilled in their respective trades. 3.2 PROTECTION A. All stock piled materials and equipment shall be protected from the weather. All stored materials and equipment shall be carefully inspected prior to installation and replaced with new if found to be damaged, corroded, etc. 3.3 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome-plated cast brass screw flanges where plumbing pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, and partitions in exposed portions of the building. B. Provide polished chrome-plated cast brass escutcheon plates at plumbing fixture supply wall and floor penetrations. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS : 22 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 4 January 24, 2007 3.4 HOISTING, RIGGING, TRANSPORTATION AND SCAFFOLDING A. Provide all scaffolding, staging, cribbing, tackle hoist and rigging necessary for installing all materials and equipment in their proper places. All temporary work shall be removed from the premises when its use is no longer required. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect and any such cutting shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. B. All patching or repair of damage to finished work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner, and meet with the approval of the Architect. The Contractor whose operations require cutting finished work, or causes damage which entails repairs of such work, shall employ craftsmen of the particular trade whose work must be cut or which is damaged, and shall pay all costs associated with the patching and repair. C. All cutting shall be performed with machine saw. Holes for pipes in concrete walls or floors shall be cut with core drilling equipment. 3.6 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish all tools and equipment necessary for the proper installation, protection and maintenance of the work. 3.7 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION A. Take all necessary precautions required to care for the contraction and expansion of all piping. B. All piping shall be properly supported, guided, aligned and anchored for expansion and contraction. C. Provide expansion joints as required and/or as shown on the drawings. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean premises of all excess construction material and debris caused by this work, in accordance with the general conditions. B. Surfaces shall be left clean, debris shall be removed, and equipment shall be furnished in prime coat finish unless otherwise specified. C. Clean exterior of piping, ductwork and equipment. Remove rust, plaster and dirt by wire brushing; remove grease, oil and similar materials by wiping with clean rags and suitable solvents. D. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. 3.9 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. Prior to requesting Architect's inspection for work acceptance, complete the following and list known exceptions within the request: 1. Obtain final inspections and approvals from all governmental jurisdictions that are required for the project. 2. Submit record drawings, operations and maintenance data, warranties, and similar record documents. 3. Complete start-up, testing and demonstration of systems to ensure that the entire installation is complete, properly adjusted and is in proper operating condition. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS Water Building Renovation FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT : 22 0548 February 5, 2007 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vibration isolators. B. Seismic restraints. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog literature and a schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load for each. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting dimensions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com. B. Mason Industries: www.mason-ind.com. 2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Neoprene Pad Isolators: 1. Neoprene waffle pads, Mason SW-2x2 or equal. a. Hardness: 50 durometer. b. Thickness: Minimum 3/4 inch. c. Maximum Loading: 180 lbs per 2-inch square pad (45 psi). 2. Configuration: Single layer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Isolation Schedule. 1. Furnaces: a. Isolator Type: Neoprene Pad Isolators. 2. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers and Heat Pumps. a. Isolator Type: Neoprene pad isolators. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT : 22 0553 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. 1.3 REFERENCES 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 0500 for submittal procedures. B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. B. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1 inch. 3. Background Color: Black. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. f Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION : 22 0719 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 1005- Plumbing Piping. B. Section 23 2300- Refrigerant Piping and Specialties. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 177-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004. B. ASTM C 195-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2000. C. ASTM C 534-Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2005. D. ASTM C 547-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2006. E. ASTM C 552-Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2003. F. ASTM E 84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. G. ASTM E 96/E 96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. H. NFPA 255-Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. I. UL 723-Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION : 22 0719 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723. 2.2 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Fiber Glass: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K'value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M of 0.02 perm- inches. D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: a. Foster Model 85-75 Drion Contact Cement. 2. Compatible with insulation. E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: a. Pabco Model Pabcate. 2. ASTM C 195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. 2.3 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville Corporation; Model Zeston 2000: www.jm.com. 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. d. Thickness: 15 mil. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION : 22 0719 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 C. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets,factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier,factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. E. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. F. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. G. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces(less than 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: a. Glass Fiber Insulation. b. Thickness: See Schedule on Drawings. 2. Domestic Cold Water: a. Glass Fiber Insulation. b. Thickness: See Schedule on Drawings. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING : 22 1005 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary waste and vent. 2. Domestic hot and cold water. 3. Natural gas. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 0719 -Plumbing Piping Insulation. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASME B16.3- Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998. B. ASME 816.18 -Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005)(ANSI B16.18). C. ASME 816.22 -Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005). D. ASME 831.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004 (ANSI/ASME B31.1). E. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1968. F. ASME 831.9- Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004 (ANSI/ASME B31.9). G. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2005. H. ASTM A 234/A 234M -Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2005a. I. ASTM B 32-Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004. J. ASTM B 42-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2002. K. ASTM B 88-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003. L. ASTM B 88M -Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube(Metric); 2005. M. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; American Water Works Association; 2000 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11). N. AWWA C151/A21.51 -Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American Water Works Association; 2002 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51). O. CISPI 301 -Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2005. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING : 22 1005 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 P. CISPI 310-Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2004. Q. MSS SP-70-Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2006. R. MSS SP-80-Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003. S. MSS SP-110-Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996. T. NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of piping, and locations for fittings and valving. Maintain and furnish Record Drawings in accordance with Section 22 0500. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Oregon, standards. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Oregon plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY VENT PIPING A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies. 2.2 SANITARY WASTE , BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING : 22 1005 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2.3 SANITARY WASTE PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. 2.4 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 88, Type K, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME 1316.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.5 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE, EXPOSED A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L(B), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME 1316.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.6 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE, CONCEALED A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88(ASTM B 88M), Type L(B), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME 1316.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.7 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C1 05/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2.8 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.2. 2.9 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.10 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1. Conform to ASME 831.9. B. Plumbing Piping -Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING : 22 1005 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 3. Hangers for Hot and Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 6. Floor Support for Hot and Cold Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. C. Natural Gas Piping 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2.11 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries, Apollo 77 Series: www.conbraco.com. 2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union. 2.12 GAS VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Jenkins Bros. 2. Lukenheimer Co. 3. Powell Co. 4. Stockham. 5. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. B. Gas Cocks 2 inches and smaller: 150 psi WOG, bronze body, straight-away pattern, square head, threaded ends. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING : 22 1005 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 0719. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with the Architect. I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 ft of cover. J. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. L. Install water piping to ASME 831.9. M. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. N. O. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with the Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code, Section 314.0. 2. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 3. Place hangers within 18 inches of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. C. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope, unless otherwise noted. B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points. 3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Health Authority requirements. 3.7 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Metal Piping: a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches. b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING : 22 1005 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch. d. Pipe size: 4 inches to 6 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch. 2. Plastic Piping: a. All Sizes: 1) Per manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES : 22 1006 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleanouts. B. Trench drains. C. Trap primer valves. D. Water hammer arrestors. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 1005- Plumbing Piping. B. Section 22 4000-Plumbing Fixtures. C. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASME Al 12.6.3- Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001. B. PDI-WH 201 -Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2006. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, water hammer arrestors. D. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. E. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule and call-outs on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES : 22 1006 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur(e.g., at janitor rooms, irrigation systems, interior and exterior hose bibbs, etc.). F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain. G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on cold water supply piping to water closets. Coordinate access requirements with the Architect and General Contractor. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING FIXTURES : 22 4000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Lavatories. C. Sinks. D. Mop sinks. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 1005- Plumbing Piping. B. Section 22 1006- Plumbing Piping Specialties. C. Section 22 3000-Plumbing Equipment. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z124.1 -American National Standard for Plastic Bathtub Units; 1995. B. ANSI Z124.2-American National Standard for Plastic Shower Units; 1995. C. ASME Al 12.6.1 M -Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1997(Reaffirmed 2002). D. ASME Al 12.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. E. ASME Al 12.19.1 M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1994 (R2004). F. ASME Al 12.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2003. G. ASME Al 12.19.3- Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2000 (R2004). H. ASME Al 12.19.4M - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1994(132004). I. ASME Al 12.19.5-Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works PLUMBING FIXTURES : 22 4000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.9 WARRANTY A. See Section 22 0500 for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install components level and plumb. B. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color to match fixture. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS: 23 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 1 January 24, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic requirements for all work included in Division 15. B. Requirements for the following are included: 1. Related Work(other Contract Documents and specification sections)which must be combined with the requirements of this Section. 2. Submittals. 3. Regulatory Requirements. 4. Transportation and Handling. 5. Warranty. 6. Record Drawings. 7. Substitution Procedures. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. This general section shall be used in conjunction with the related Contract Documents in determining the total requirements for the installation of mechanical equipment and systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3100-Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: See Section 0 1770-Closeout Procedures, for record document procedures. C. Project Record Documents: See Section 0 1770-Closeout Procedures, for operation and maintenance data requirements. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturer's standard data to provide information specific to this Project. 2. Shop drawings: Prepared specifically for this Project. 3. Samples for verification. B. See Section 01 3100 -Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout. 1. Project record documents. a. Product data. b. Record Drawings: Within ten days after the date of system acceptance, the Contractor shall provide Record Drawings of the actual installation. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS: 23 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 2 January 24, 2007 5. Other types as indicated. B. See Section 01 3100-Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. 1.7 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3100-Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing plumbing and HVAC systems in commercial buildings with minimum five years of experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conformance with the latest Codes and other regulatory requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, and shall arrange for all inspections required by codes applicable to this Section. The Contractor shall submit written evidence to the General Contractor that required permits, inspections and code requirements have been secured. 1.10 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.11 WARRANTY A. All equipment and materials furnished and installed under this contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year from the date of acceptance thereof against defective materials, design, and workmanship. Acceptance shall be defined as the time when start-up and field testing show that the equipment operates satisfactorily and complies with all of the specification requirements. B. The above requirement does not negate the requirements for extended warranty periods listed in the technical specification sections. 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall keep day-to-day record of the installed locations for all equipment and materials as listed below: 1. All underground piping. Maintain dimensional accuracy within plus or minus 2-inches. 2. All piping concealed in walls or above ceilings that vary more than 12-inches from where they are shown routed on the contract documents. 3. Identify and dimension locations of all isolation valves. 4. Duct concealed in walls or above ceilings that vary more than 12-inches from where they are shown routed on the contract documents. B. Underground utility services, both inside and outside of buildings, shall be dimensioned from permanent structures or benchmark. Utility services outside of building shall also show depth of burial with reference to the finished ground floor elevation. LRS Architects, Inc. i Tigard Public Works BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS: 23 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 3 January 24, 2007 C. Immediately on commencing work on the project, obtain a set of prints of the contract drawings pertaining to this branch of work. This set of drawings shall be kept on the project site at all times for use in recording "record"conditions. D. At the completion of the project, Record Drawings shall be certified as to their correctness by the signature of the Contractor and shall be stamped or otherwise identified as record drawings. 1.13 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. B. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. C. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements, for substitution submittal procedure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment shall be the manufacturer's most recent and proven standard design. Equipment designs which have not been used successfully in a similar applications are not acceptable. B. Materials shall be new, and shall comply with the requirements of the specified products. 2.2 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Provide firestop systems at through-penetrations of fire-rated wall, shaft,floor, floor/ceiling, and roof/ceiling assemblies in accordance with the code requirements and Section 07 8443 - Fire- Resistant Joint Firestopping. B. Submit product data and installation instructions for each penetration type in accordance with Section 01 3300 -Submittal Procedures. Coordinate the minimum F and T rating requirements with the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer's instructions. B. All work shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by licensed installers skilled in their respective trades. 3.2 PROTECTION A. All stock piled materials and equipment shall be protected from the weather. All stored materials and equipment shall be carefully inspected prior to installation and replaced with new if found to be damaged, corroded, etc. 3.3 HOISTING, RIGGING, TRANSPORTATION AND SCAFFOLDING A. Provide all scaffolding, staging, cribbing, tackle hoist and rigging necessary for installing all materials and equipment in their proper places. All temporary work shall be removed from the premises when its use is no longer required. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS: 23 0500 Water Building Renovation Page 4 January 24, 2007 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect and any such cutting shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. B. All patching or repair of damage to finished work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner, and meet with the approval of the Architect. The Contractor whose operations require cutting finished work, or causes damage which entails repairs of such work, shall employ craftsmen of the particular trade whose work must be cut or which is damaged, and shall pay all costs associated with the patching and repair. C. All cutting shall be performed with machine saw. Holes for pipes in concrete walls or floors shall be cut with core drilling equipment. 3.5 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish all tools and equipment necessary for the proper installation, protection and maintenance of the work. 3.6 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION A. Take all necessary precautions required to care for the contraction and expansion of all piping. B. All piping shall be properly supported, guided, aligned and anchored for expansion and contraction. C. Provide expansion joints as required and/or as shown on the drawings. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean premises of all excess construction material and debris caused by this work, in accordance with the general conditions. B. Surfaces shall be left clean, debris shall be removed, and equipment shall be furnished in prime coat finish unless otherwise specified. C. Clean exterior of piping, ductwork and equipment. Remove rust, plaster and dirt by wire brushing; remove grease, oil and similar materials by wiping with clean rags and suitable solvents. D. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. 3.8 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. Prior to requesting Architect's inspection for work acceptance, complete the following and list known exceptions within the request: 1. Obtain final inspections and approvals from all governmental jurisdictions that are required for the project. 2. Submit record drawings, operations and maintenance data, warranties, and similar record documents. 3. Complete start-up, testing and demonstration of systems to ensure that the entire installation is complete, properly adjusted and is in proper operating condition. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC : 23 0593 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AABC MN-1 -AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council; 2002. B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems;American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988. C. NEBB (TAB)-Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval within 10 days after award of Contract. C. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component. 1. Include at least the following in the plan: a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process. d. Final test report forms to be used. e. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution. D. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. 2. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. 3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for the Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 4. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 5. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC : 23 0593 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 6. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 7. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P(inch-pound)and SI (metric) units. 8. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 forms,forms prepared following ASHRAE Std 111, or NEBB forms. 9. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Architect. g. Project Engineer. h. General Contractor. i. Mechanical/HVAC Contractor. j. Project altitude. k. Report date. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC MN-1, ASHRAE Std 111, or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. B. TAB Agency Qualifications: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC. C. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer, NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor, or registered Professional Engineer experienced in performance of this Work and licensed in Oregon. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Furnish AABC National Performance Guaranty for this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 2. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 3. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. B. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times. C. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. D. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. 2. Having minimum of three years documented experience. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC : 23 0593 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 3. Certified by one of the following: a. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org. b. TABS, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org. E. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency. 3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING AGENCIES A. Pacific Coast Air Balancing. B. Northwest Engineering. C. Neudorfer Engineers. D. No Substitutions. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Duct systems are clean of debris. 5. Fans are rotating correctly. 6. Volume dampers are in place and open. 7. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 8. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 9. Air outlets are installed and connected. 10. Duct system leakage is minimized. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance. 3.4 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to the Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 5 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 5 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.6 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC : 23 0593 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 3.7 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. F. Provide system schematic on full-size drawings or on 11 x1 7 reduced drawings folded and inserted into the report. Schematic shall show required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. H. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. I. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works DUCT INSULATION : 23 0713 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct insulation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 518-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004. B. ASTM C 553- Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2002. C. ASTM C 612-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2004. D. ASTM E 84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. E. ASTM E 96/E 96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. F. NFPA 255 -Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. G. SMACNA(DCS)-HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. H. UL 723-Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.2 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Fiber Glass: www.knaufusa.com. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works DUCT INSULATION : 23 0713 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C 553;flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K'value: 0.31 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m (0.02 perm inch), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. C. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. See Ductwork Insulation Schedule on Drawings. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works HVAC PIPING INSULATION : 23 0719 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 2300- Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 534-Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2005. B. ASTM E 84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. C. ASTM E 96/E 96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. D. NFPA 255-Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. E. UL 723-Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0500-Basic Materials and Methods, for submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Armacell International: www.armacell.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C 534 Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. 2.3 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works HVAC PIPING INSULATION : 23 0719 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 with ASTM E 96/E 96M. d. Thickness: 10 mil. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions,flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. E. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 8400. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Cooling Systems: 1. Refrigerant Suction: 2. Refrigerant Hot Gas: END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC : 23 0913 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermostats. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AMCA 500-D- Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating;Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1998. B. NEMA DC 3-Residential Controls- Electrical Wall-Mounted Room Thermostats; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300-Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component. Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves indicating size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement, velocities, and static pressure drops for each system. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Oregon. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.6 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier. 2.2 THERMOSTATS A. Electric Room Thermostats: 1. Type: NEMA DC 3, 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature control. 2. Service: cooling and heating. 3. Covers: Locking with set point adjustment and concealed setpoint, without thermometer. 4. Carrier model T-56. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC : 23 0913 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work. C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. D. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components in other systems. E. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units. F. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components. G. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check and verify location of thermostats with plans and room details before installation. Locate 48 inches above floor. Align with lighting switches. Refer to Section 26 2726. C. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 2717. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC : 23 0923 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Control equipment. B. Software. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 0993-Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls. B. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field programmable micro-processor based units. B. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers and operators, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required to operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified. C. Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments, and fine tuning necessary for complete and fully operational system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk data conductors. 2. Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. 3. Show system configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections. 4. Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions for all manufactured components. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors. 1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified and numbered, system components and devices. 2. Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC : 23 0923 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. Design system software under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Oregon. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved by manufacturer. D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting the work of this Section. 1.7 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for field programmable micro-processor based units. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of energy management and control systems for one years from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide two complete inspections per year, one in each season, to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls as required, and submit written reports. 1.9 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS A. Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following: 1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2. Limiting copying. 3. Preserving confidentiality. 4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier; Model -Comfort Network. 2.2 CONTROL UNITS A. Units: Modular in design and consisting of processor board with programmable RAM memory, local operator access and display panel, and integral interface equipment. Carrier Premier-Link. B. Battery Backup: For minimum of 48 hours for complete system including RAM without interruption, with automatic battery charger. C. The controller shall feature and maintain a 365-day software clock/calendar with holiday functions. The controller shall provide the capability to provide various time scheduling such as: 1. Local time schedule 2. Time schedule within another controller on the network 3. Time schedule within a Linkage Thermostat a. Time schedule from a field-supplied dry contact that performs remote occupancy control. D. Alarm/Alert Processing -The controller shall contain routine(s)to process alarms and alerts. Alarm/alert processing shall consist of a scan of all input points. Certain analog alarms/alerts shall only be monitored when the controller is in the occupied mode (i.e., relative humidity, LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC : 23 0923 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 indoor air quality sensor). Time delays shall be provided with the software to prevent nuisance alarms/alerts during a transition period or if a setpoint change occurs. All alarms/alerts shall be displayed at a local Interface device, portable PC and via the network to a remote EMS operator's station or alarm printer as applicable. The controller shall include the inherent capability to store the most recent alarm messages. E. Control Units Functions: 1. Monitor or control each input/output point. 2. Acquire, process, and transfer information to operator station or other control units on network. 3. Accept, process, and execute commands from other control unit's or devices or operator stations. 4. Access both data base and control functions simultaneously. 5. Record, evaluate, and report changes of state or value that occur among associated points. Continue to perform associated control functions regardless of status of network. 6. Perform in stand-alone mode: a. Start/stop. b. Automatic Temperature Control. F. Global Communications: 1. Broadcast point data onto network, making that information available to all other system control units. G. Input/Output Capability: 1. Discrete/digital input(contact status). 2. Discrete/digital output. 3. Analog input. 4. Analog output. H. Upload/Download Capability: Download from or upload to operator station. Upload/Download time for entire control unit database maximum 10 seconds on hard wired LAN, or 60 seconds over voice grade phone lines. I. Test Mode Operation: Place input/output points in test mode to allow testing and developing of control algorithms on line without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. In test mode: 2.3 LOCAL AREA NETWORK(LAN) A. Provide communication between control units over local area network(LAN). B. LAN Capacity: Not less than 60 stations or nodes. C. Break in Communication Path: Alarm and automatically initiate LAN reconfiguration. D. LAN Data Speed: Minimum 19.2 Kb. E. Communication Techniques: Allow interface into network by multiple operation stations and by auto-answer/auto-dial modems. Support communication over telephone lines utilizing modems. 2.4 OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. Input/Output Capability From Operator Station: 1. Request display of current values or status in tabular or graphic format. 2. Command selected equipment to specified state. 3. Initiate logs and reports. 4. Change analog limits. 5. Add, delete, or change points within each control unit or application routine. 6. Change point input/output descriptors, status, alarm descriptors, and engineering unit descriptors. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC : 23 0923 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 7. Add new control units to system. 8. Modify and set up maintenance scheduling parameters. 9. Automatically archive select data even when running third party software. 10. Provide capability to sort and extract data from archived files and to generate custom reports. 11. Support two printer operations. a. Alarm printer: Print alarms, operator acknowledgements, action messages, system alarms, operator sign-on and sign-off. b. Data printer: Print reports, page prints, and data base prints. B. Operator Station: 1. Accept data from LAN as needed without scanning entire network for updated point data. 2. Interrogate LAN for updated point data when requested. 3. Allow operator command of devices. 4. Allow operator to place specific control units in or out of service. 5. Allow parameter editing of control units. 6. Store duplicate data base for every control unit and allow down loading while system is on line. 7. Control or modify specific programs. C. Alarm Processing: 1. Off normal condition: Cause alarm and appropriate message, including time, system, point descriptor, and alarm condition. Select alarm state/value and which alarms shall cause automatic dial-out. 2. Critical alarm or change-of-state: Display message, stored on disk for review and sort, or print. 3. Print on line changeable message, up to 60 characters in length,for each alarm point specified. 4. Display alarm reports on video. Display multiple alarms in order of occurrence. 5. Operator specifies if alarm requires acknowledgement. 6. Continue to indicate unacknowledged alarms after return to normal. D. Event Processing: Automatically initiate commands, user defined messages, take specific control actions or change control strategy and application programs resulting from event condition. Event condition may be value crossing operator defined limit, change-of-state, specified state, or alarm occurrence or return to normal. E. Automatic Restart: Automatically restart field equipment on restoration of power. Provide time delay between individual equipment restart and time of day start/stop. F. Messages: 1. Automatically display or print user-defined message subsequent to occurrence of selected events. G. Reports: 1. Manually requested with time and date. 2.5 LOAD CONTROL PROGRAMS A. General: Support inch-pounds and SI (metric) units of measurement. B. Automatic Time Scheduling: 1. Self-contained programs for automatic start/stop/scheduling of building loads. 2. Support up to seven (7)normal day schedules, seven (7) "special day" schedules and two (2)temporary day schedules. 3. Special days schedule shall support up to 30 unique date/duration combinations. 4. Each load assigned at least 16 control actions per day with 1 minute resolution. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC : 23 0923 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 5. Time schedule operations may be: a. Start. b. Optimized Start. C. Stop. d. Optimized Stop. 6. Minimum of 30 holiday periods up to 100 days in length may be specified for the year. 7. Create temporary schedules. 8. Broadcast temporary"special day"date and duration. C. Start/Stop Time Optimization: 1. Perform optimized start/stop as function of outside conditions, inside conditions, or both. 2. Adaptive and self-tuning, adjusting to changing conditions unattended. 3. For each point under control, establish and modify: a. Occupancy period. b. Desired temperature at beginning of occupancy period. c. Desired temperature at end of occupancy period. D. Night Setback/Setup Program: Reduce heating space temperature setpoint or raise cooling space temperature setpoint during unoccupied hours; in conjunction with scheduled start/stop and optimum start/stop programs. E. Trend logging: 1. Each control unit will store samples of control units data points. 2. Update file continuously at discretely assignable intervals. 3. Automatically initiate upload request and then store data on hard disk. 4. Time synchronize sampling at operator specified times and intervals with sample resolution of one minute. 2.6 HVAC CONTROL PROGRAMS A. General: 1. Support Inch-pounds and SI (metric) units of measurement. B. Optimal Run Time: 1. Control start-up and shutdown times of HVAC equipment for both heating and cooling. 2. Base on occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal requirements, and interior room mass temperature. 3. Start-up systems by using outside air temperature, room mass temperatures, and adaptive model prediction for how long building takes to warm up or cool down under different conditions. 4. Operator commands: a. Define term schedule b. Add/delete fan status point. c. Add/delete outside air temperature point. d. Request HVAC point summary. 5. Control Summary: a. HVAC Control system begin/end status. b. Heating/cooling mode status. c. Optimal run time schedule. d. Start/Stop times. e. Occupancy and vacancy times. 6. HVAC point summary: a. Control system identifier and status. b. Point ID and status. c. Outside air temperature point ID and status. d. Calculated optimal start and stop times. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC : 23 0923 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to the control units and to the operator work station. Verify that field end devices, wiring, and pneumatic tubing is installed prior to installation proceeding. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not subject to excessive vibration. B. Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to Section 23 0993. C. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 2717. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works REFRIGERANT PIPING : 23 2300 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping. B. Refrigerant. C. Valves. D. Strainers. E. Flexible connections. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. B. Section 23 5400 - Furnaces. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ARI 710- Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Dryers; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2004. B. ASHRAE Std 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems;American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2004. C. ASHRAE Std 34- Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2004. D. ASME (BPV IX)- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004. E. ASME 816.22-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005). F. ASME 816.26-Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1988. G. ASME 831.5- Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001. H. ASME B31.9- Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004 (ANSI/ASME B31.9). I. ASTM B 88-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003. J. ASTM B 88M -Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube(Metric); 2005. K. ASTM B 280-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service; 2003. L. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding Society; 2004 and errata. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works REFRIGERANT PIPING : 23 2300 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicated otherwise. C. Refrigerant Charging(Packed Angle)Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve. D. Strainers: 1. Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. E. Replaceable Cartridge Filter-Driers: 1. Use vertically in liquid line adjacent to receivers. 2. Use filter-driers for each solenoid valve. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support, connection requirements, and isolation for servicing. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of piping, and locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories. Maintain and provide Record Documents in accordance with Section 230500. E. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spare parts lists. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum five years of experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX)and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME (BPV IX). 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place. B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation. C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until connected into system. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works REFRIGERANT PIPING : 23 2300 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, H58 hard drawn or 060 soft annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy. B. Copper Tube to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B 88(ASTM B 88M), Type K(A), annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper. 2. Joints: Flared. C. Pipe Supports and Anchors: 1. Conform to ASME B31.5. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 6. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.2 REFRIGERANT A. Refrigerant: R-410a. 2.3 VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hansen Technologies Corporation: www.hantech.com. 2. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com. 3. Danfoss Automatic Controls: www.danfoss.com. B. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern,forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating;for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. C. Service Valves: 1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve,flared or solder ends,for maximum pressure of 500 psi. 2.4 STRAINERS A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: 1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psi. 2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Circuit Hydraulics, Ltd: www.circuit-hydraulics.co.uk. 2. Flexicraft Industries: www.flexicraft.com. 3. Penflex: www.penflex.com. B. Corrugated bronze hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure of 300 psi. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works REFRIGERANT PIPING : 23 2300 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. F. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 7. For insulated piping, provide sheet metal sleeve around outside of insulation a minimum of 12 inches long. Support insulated piping with pipe clamp and unistrut. G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. I. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing. J. Insulate piping; refer to Section 22 0719. K. Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant. L. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME 831.5. B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psi using halide torch. Test to no leakage. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works REFRIGERANT PIPING : 23 2300 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing. 1. 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, and 7/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. 1-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS : 23 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 3300 -Air Duct Accessories. B. Section 23 3700 -Air Outlets and Inlets. C. Section 23 0593-Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. B. SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. Maintain and provide Record Drawings in accordance with Section 23 0500. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating. B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS : 23 3100 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation (Airsan Accoustiturn or equal). C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. 2.3 MANUFACTURED METAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages,reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. C. Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible. D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. E. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. F. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 3.2 SCHEDULES A. Ductwork Material: 1. Low Pressure Supply: Galvanized Steel. 2. Return and Relief: Galvanized Steel. 3. General Exhaust: Galvanized Steel. 4. Outside Air Intake: Galvanized Steel. B. Ductwork Pressure Class: 1. Low Pressure Supply: 1 inch. 2. Return and Relief: 1 inch. 3. General Exhaust: 1 inch. 4. Outside Air Intake: 1 inch. C. Ductwork Seal Class: 1. Supply: SMACNA Seal Class C. 2. Return and Relief: SMACNA Seal Class C. 3. General Exhaust: SMACNA Seal Class C. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES : 23 3300 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Duct test holes. C. Volume control dampers. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 0548-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. B. SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. C. UL 33- Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003. D. UL 555-Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2006. E. UL 555S-Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1999. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. 2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 3. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. B. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2.2 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES : 23 3300 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 2.3 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 3. Greeneheck. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. End Bearings: Exceprt in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearing. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. D. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. C. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. D. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment; see Section 22 0548. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works HVAC POWER VENTILATORS : 23 3423 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceiling exhaust fans. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 0548-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section 15820- Duct Accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AMCA 99-Standards Handbook;Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2003. B. AMCA 210-Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1999(ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51). C. AMCA(DIR)-[Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program;Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; http://www.amea.org/licenses/search.aspx. D. AMCA 300-Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2005. E. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data;Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2006. F. UL 705- Power Ventilators; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Carnes Company: www.carnes.com B. Greenheck: www.greenheck.com. C. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works HVAC POWER VENTILATORS : 23 3423 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 D. PennBarry: www.pennbarry.com. 2.2 CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Performance: As scheduled on the drawings. B. Fan Unit: High-efficiency centrifugal blower, permanently lubricated motor with neoprene anti- vibration motor mounts, integral backdraft damper and birdscreen. C. Accessories: Roof caps and other accessories as scheduled or indicated on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate the installation of the roof penetrations and roof caps with the roofing work and the Contractor. C. Provide control interlocks as indicated on the drawings. Control devices and wiring to comply with Division 16 requirements. D. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS : 23 3700 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers. B. Grilles and Registers. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ADC 1062: GRD -Test Code for Grilles, Registers & Diffusers; Air Diffusion Council; 1984. B. ARI 890-Standard for Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2001. C. ASHRAE Std 70-Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006. D. SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Contractor and Vendor to review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit product data, and schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles: 1. Carnes Company: www.carnes.com. 2. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. 3. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com. 4. Metalaire: www.metalaire.com. 5. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. 2.2 GENERAL A. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the diffusers, registers and grilles. The performance data shall be derived from tests conducted in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS : 23 3700 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. See Diffuser, Grille, and Register Schedule on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets, matte black finish color. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES : 23 4000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Disposable, extended area pleated panel filters. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE Std 52.1 -Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1992. B. UL 900-Standard for Air Filter Units; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter frames, and filter gages. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for operation, changing, and periodic cleaning. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one spare set of disposable panel filters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILTER MANUFACTURERS A. American Filtration Inc: www.americanfiltration.com. B. AAF International/American Air Filter: www.aafintl.com. C. Camfil Farr Company: www.camfilfarr.com. 2.2 DISPOSABLE, EXTENDED AREA PLEATED PANEL FILTERS A. Manufacturer: Camfil Farr 30/30 or equal. B. Media: UL 900 Class 2, pleated, lofted, non-woven, reinforced cotton and synthetic fabric; supported and bonded to welded wire grid, with EPA registered and environmentally safe antimicrobial preservative. 1. Frame: Cardboard. 2. Nominal thickness: 2 inches. C. Rating, per ASHRAE Std 52.1: 1. Dust spot efficiency: 25-30 percent. 2. Weight arrestance: 90-92 percent. 3. Initial resistance at 250 fpm face velocity: 0.08 inch WG. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES : 23 4000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 2.3 FILTER FRAMES AND HOUSINGS A. General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of 16 gage galvanized steel or extruded aluminum T-section construction with necessary gasketing between frames and walls. Filter access doors to include hinges, continuous gasketing, and positive locking devices. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets. C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent)are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set. D. Deliver one extra set of air filters to Owner Representative. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works FURNACES : 23 5400 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Forced air furnaces. B. Refrigerant cooling coils. C. Air cooled condensing units. D. Controls. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 0548-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section 15086- Duct Insulation. C. Section 23 3100- HVAC Ducts and Casings. D. Section 15820 - Duct Accessories. E. Section 26 2717- Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections and installation and wiring of thermostats and other controls components. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Section 23 4000 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices. B. ARI 210/240- Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 1994. C. ARI 270-Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment;Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 1995. D. ARI 520-Positive Displacement Condensing Units; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 1997. E. NFPA 54 -National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. F. NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. G. ASHRAE Std 15-Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1994. H. NFPA 211 -Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. I. ASHRAE Std 23- Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1993. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works FURNACES : 23 5400 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Unit efficiencies shall comply with the State of Oregon Energy Code requirements. 1.6 WARRANTY A. See Section 23 0500 for additional warranty requirements. 1. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing. B. Provide one year manufacturers warranty for control board and solid state ignition modules. C. Provide ten year manufacturers warranty for heat exchangers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier Corporation: www.carrier.com. B. Lennox Industries Inc.: www.lennox.com C. The Trane Company: www.trane.com. 2.2 CONDENSING GAS FIRED FURNACES A. Units: Self-contained direct-vent, condensing gas furnace, packaged factory assembled, pre- wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, heat exchanger, burner, controls, air filter, and accessories; wired for single power connection with control transformer. 1. Air Flow Configuration: Upflow. B. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner. C. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct drive, or belt drive with adjustable variable pitch motor pulley. D. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel welded construction, condensing type. E. DX Coil: Provide DX coil as part of the package. See Schedule for capacity. F. Gas Burner and Burner Safety Controls: 1. Induced draft, monoport type burner. 2. Redundant gas valve train provides 100 percent safety gas shut-off; 24 volt combining pressure regulation, safety pilot, manual set(On-Off), pilot filtration, automatic electric valves. 3. Electronic pilot ignition, with hot surface igniter. 4. Design certified by the American Gas Association. G. Operating Controls: 1. Supply Fan Control: Energize from bonnet temperature independent of burner controls, with adjustable timed off delay and fixed timed on delay, with manual switch for continuous fan operation. Provide continuous low speed fan operation. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works FURNACES : 23 5400 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 H. Air Filters: 2 inch thick glass fiber, disposable type arranged for easy replacement in side access housing in mixed air duct. I. Performance: 1. Minimum 95 percent annual fuel utilization efficiency rating, GAMA certified. 2. Refer to Furnace Schedule on the Drawings. 2.3 CONDENSING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. The Carrier Corporation; www.carrier.com. 2. Lennox Industries Inc.: www.lennox.com 3. Lennox Industries Inc. 4. Performance: a. Refer to Condensing Unit Schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Install gas furnaces in accordance with NFPA 90A, the manufacturers instructions, and State of Oregon requirements. C. Provide vibration isolators for each furnace. Refer to Section 15072 Vibration Isolation. D. Provide flexible duct connections at mixed air inlet and supply outlet duct connections. Refer to Section 15820 Duct Accessories. E. Install gas fired furnaces in accordance with NFPA 54. F. Electrical Characteristics: G. Provide direct vent assembly and vent connections, comply with State of Oregon requirements. H. Provide gas piping connections, including gas cocks, gas pressure regulators, test tees, drip legs, union connections, and flexible connectors. I. Provide air filters with side service access. Maximum 500 fpm air filter face velocity. Refer to Section 15860 Air Cleaning Devices. 1. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment under provisions of Section 26 2717. J. Mount counterflow furnaces installed on combustible floors on additive base. K. Pipe condensate drain to nearest floor drain. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATION UNITS : 23 7313 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged energy recovery ventilation units. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 4000 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ABMA STD 9- Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990(R2000). B. AMCA 99-Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2003. C. AMCA 210-Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1999 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51). D. AMCA 301 -Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data;Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2005. E. ARI 410-Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils;Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2001. F. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005. G. SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition with Addendum No. 1. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0500 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Published Literature: Indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, gages and finishes of materials, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames. 3. Fans: Performance and fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM. 4. Sound Power Level Data: Fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity. 5. Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATION UNITS : 23 7313 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. C. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier B. Greenheck. C. Carnes. D. Loren Cook. 2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Polypropylene heat exchanger core with air filters on both incoming air connections. B. All internal electrical components shall be factory wired for single point power connection. All electrical components shall be UL Listed, Approved or Classified where applicable and wired in compliance with the National Electrical Code. C. All internal electrical components shall be factory wired for single point power connection. All electrical components shall be UL Listed, Approved or Classified where applicable and wired in compliance with the National Electrical Code. D. Performance: See Drawings. E. Frost Control: When the outside air temperature drops below 23 degrees F the outside air port closes for approximately 6 minutes every hour. 2.3 CASING A. Unit shall be of internal frame type construction of galvanized steel. Frame and panels shall be G90 galvanized steel. All panels exposed to the weather shall be a minimum of 18 gauge galvanized steel. Where top panels are joined there shall be a standing seam to insure positive weather protection. All metal-to-metal seams shall be sealed, requiring no caulking at job site. B. Finish: baked enamel. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS A. All components shall be easily accessible through a hinging door with suitcase style latches for core, exhaust, supply, and filter compartments. 2.5 FANS A. Centrifugal fans to be double width, double inlet, single fan forward curved type. All blower wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. B. Fan and motor assemblies shall be mounted to unit base with neoprene isolators. C. Ground and polished steel fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearing pillow blocks. D. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (1-10) life in excess of 100,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speeds. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATION UNITS : 23 7313 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2.6 MOTORS AND DRIVES A. Separate motors for exhaust and supply blowers shall be provided. B. Motors shall be energy efficient, complying with EPACT standards, for single speed ODP and TE enclosures. Belt-drive motors shall be factory mounted to an adjustable motor plate having two heavy-duty adjusting bolts for alignment and belt tension. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast type, keyed and securely attached to the fan wheel and motor shafts; 10 horsepower and less shall be supplied with an adjustable drive pulley. Energy wheel motors and direct-drive motors shall have integral overload protection. C. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy-duty type, matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase, and enclosure. 2.7 FILTERS A. Supply and Exhaust Air Filters: Disposable, extended area pleated panel filters. Refer to Section 15860. 2.8 DAMPERS A. Provide outside air damper, factory-mounted in outside air intake. Damper shall open when outside air fan is energized. B. Provide exhaust air damper,factory-mounted in exhaust air intake. Damper shall open when exhaust air fan is energized. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 26 00 01 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. The intent of Divisions 26, 27 and 28 Specifications and the accompanying Drawings is to provide a complete and workable facility with complete systems as shown, specified and required by applicable codes. Include all work specified in Division 16 and shown on the accompanying Drawings, including appurtenances, connections, etc., in the finished job. B. The Division 26, 27 and 28 Specifications and the accompanying Drawings are complementary and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Items shown on the Drawings are not necessarily included in the Specifications and vice versa. C. Imperative language is frequently used in Division 26,27 and 28 Specifications. Except as otherwise specified, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. D. Provide complete ground systems as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Include conduit system, transformer housings, switchboard frame and neutral bus, motors, and miscellaneous grounds required. E. Clearly and properly identify the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the function of each item of equipment connected under this work. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. The General and Supplemental Conditions apply to this Division, including but not limited to: 1. Drawings and Specifications. 2. Public Ordinances, Permits. 3. Payments and fees required by governing authorities for work included in this Division. 4. Change Orders. B. Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Division. C. All Sections of Division 26, 27 and 28 Electrical Specifications, are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any Section of Division 26, 27 and 28. D. Where specified materials or methods exceed minimum standards allowed by applicable codes, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: A. The latest adopted revisions of the publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 26 00 01 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 1. International Building Code(IBC). 2. National Electrical Code(NEC). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 5. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA). 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 8. Underwriters Laboratories(UL). 9. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.). 10. International Fire Code(IFC). 11. Oregon Administrative Rules(OAR). 12. Oregon Structural Specialty Code. 1.4 SITE VISITATION: A. The Contractor shall visit the site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing conditions and all other factors that may affect the execution of the work. Include all related costs in the initial bid proposal. 1.5 COORDINATION OF WORK: A. Conduct work in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for proper installation of all items of equipment. Consult the Drawings of all other trades or crafts to avoid conflicts with cabinets, counters, equipment, structural members, etc. In general, the architectural drawings govern but conflicts shall be resolved with the Architect prior to rough-in. B. Verify the physical dimension of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space. Coordination of the equipment to fit into the available space and the access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor's responsibility. C. Prepare detailed layout drawings for panel layouts in electric rooms or closets, utilizing dimensioned shop drawing data of equipment to be furnished. Provide additional wiring details at switchboards, motor control centers, and other areas where work is of sufficient complexity to warrant additional detailing for coordination. Submit layout drawings for approval prior to commencing field installation and shall be included with shop drawings. D. Coordinate rough-in and wiring requirements for all equipment provided under other divisions of the work and requiring electrical connections with equipment supplier and installer. Make installation and connections in accordance with rough-in and wiring diagrams provided for Contractor's use. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 26 00 01 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 Arrange raceways, wiring, and equipment to permit ready access to switches, motors, and control components. Doors and access panels shall be kept clear. E. Coordinate all aspects of the electrical, telephone, and other utility services with the appropriate serving utility. No additional compensation will be allowed the Contractor for connection fees or additional work or equipment not covered in the Drawings or Specifications which are a result of policies of the serving utility. F. Coordinate underground work with other contractors working on the site. Particular coordination shall be performed with contractors installing storm sewer, sanitary sewer, gas,water and irrigation lines to avoid conflicts. Common trenches may be used with other trades, providing clearances required by codes and ordinances are maintained. 1.6 WARRANTY: A. Provide a written warranty covering the work done under this Division as required by the General Conditions. Incandescent lamps will be excluded from this warranty. B. Apparatus: 1. Free of defects of material and workmanship and in accord with the Contract Documents. 2. Built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. 3. Operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration. C. Systems: Any system damage caused by failures of any system component shall be included. 1.7 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS: A. The Drawings that accompany the Division 26, 27 and 28 Specifications are diagrammatic. They do not show all offsets,fittings, or accessories that may be required to install work in the space provided and avoid conflicts. Follow the Drawing as closely as is practical and install additional bends, offsets,fittings, and accessories where required by local conditions from measurements taken at the jobsite. The right is reserved to make minor field order changes in outlet location prior to roughing-in without additional cost to the Owner. B. Lower case letters adjacent to devices or luminaires indicate switching arrangement or circuit grouping. Numbers adjacent to devices indicate circuit connection. C. The intent of the branch circuiting and switching shown shall not be changed nor homeruns combined without the approval of the Architect. Feeder runs are not to be combined or changed. D. Cross or hash marks on conduit runs indicate quantity of No. 12 copper branch circuit conductors unless otherwise noted. Where such marks do not appear, provide quantity of circuit conductors to the outlets shown to perform the control or circuiting indicated. Include ground, travelers and switchlegs as required by the circuiting arrangement. 1.8 SUBMITTALS: LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 26 00 01 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 A. Coordinate with the requirements of Section 01. B. Submit five copies of electrical shop drawings and equipment data in expandable folders equal to Smead No. 1524E within 45 days from notice to proceed. Each submitted section shall include data on all equipment requiring submittals for that section. Include in each folder a complete index for all Sections and materials requiring submittals. C. Include manufacturer's detailed specifications and data sheets to fully describe equipment furnished. Assure that all deviations from the Drawings and Specifications are specifically noted in the submittals. Failure to comply will automatically void any implied approval for use of the equipment on this project. D. Review and recommendations by the Architect or Engineer are not to be construed as change authorizations. If discrepancies between the materials or equipment submitted and the Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after the data is processed,the Contract Documents will govern. E. Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept of the project and the information given in the construction documents. The contractor is solely responsible for, and this review does not include: confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating the work with that of other trades and performing all work in safe and satisfactory manner. Corrections or comments made on the submittal during review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with the requirements of the construction documents or with its responsibilities listed herein. F. The Installation Drawings called for under submittals shall show all outlets, devices, terminal cabinets, conduits, wiring, and connections required for the complete system described. Prints of these drawings shall be submitted prior to starting installation. The Contractor submitted drawings will then form the basis for installation. G. Record in-progress drawings shall be kept up to date as the work progresses showing all changes, deviations, addendum items, change orders, corrections, or other variations from the Contract Drawings. The marked up drawings shall be kept at the jobsite and available for the Architect's review. At the completion of the work, all deviations from the installation drawings shall be incorporated on the reproducibles to indicate"as-built"conditions. The drawings shall then be submitted to the Architect as Record Drawings for the system. 1.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Coordinate with the requirements of Section 01. B. Prior to the date of Substantial Completion, prepare detailed operating and maintenance manuals for equipment and systems installed. Operating and Maintenance Manuals will be used for training of and use by the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the systems. C. Format of the manuals shall be based on a separate manual or chapter for each class of system as follows: 1. Secondary distribution system. 2. Low voltage distribution system. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 26 00 01 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 3. Standby power system. 4. Egress lighting system. 5. Security system. 6. Lighting systems, including lamps. 7. Lighting control system, interior and exterior. 8. Wiring devices, i.e., GFI receptacles and cable reels. D. Content of each manual or chapter shall include but shall not be limited to the following: 1. Description of system. 2. Operating Sequence and Procedures: a. Step-by-step procedure for system start-up, including a pre-start checklist. Refer to controls and indicators by nomenclature consistent with that used on panels and in control diagrams. b. Detailed instruction in proper sequence,for each mode of operation (i.e., day-night, staging of equipment). C. Emergency Operation: If some functions of the equipment can be operated while other functions are disabled, give instructions for operations under those conditions. Include here only those alternate methods of operations (from normal)which the operator can follow when there is a partial failure or malfunctioning of components or other unusual condition. d. Shutdown Procedure: Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after operation. If a particular sequence is required, give step-by-step instructions in that order. 3. Preventive Maintenance: a. Provide a schedule for preventive maintenance. State the recommended frequency of performance of each preventive maintenance task such as cleaning, inspection, and scheduled overhauls. b. Cleaning: Provide instructions and schedules for all routine cleaning and inspection with recommended lubricants. C. Inspection: If periodic inspection of equipment is required for operation, cleaning, or other reasons, indicate the items to be inspected and give the inspection criteria. d. Provide instructions for lubrication and adjustments required for preventive maintenance routines. Identify test points and given values for each. 4. Manufacturers' Brochures: Include manufacturers'descriptive literature covering devices and equipment used in the system, together with illustrations, exploded views, and renewal parts LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 26 00 01 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 lists. Manufacturers' standard brochures shall be edited so that the information applying to the ACTUAL installed equipment is clearly defined. E. Submit two draft copies of the complete operating and maintenance manual for review to the Architect for approval. F. Submit three copies of the final operating and maintenance manuals bound in 3-ring binders with tabs and index at least five days prior to the inspection for Substantial Completion. 1.10 CONTRACT COST DATA: A. Furnish to the Architect a cost breakdown of the Electrical Work. B. The cost breakdown shall include separate amounts for material, labor and mark-up for each CSI specification section included. Include cost data with the shop drawings submittal. 1.11 CHANGE ORDERS: A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied with a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, Contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Electrical products installed in this project shall be listed by a recognized testing laboratory or approved in writing by the local inspection authority as required by governing codes and ordinances. B. Materials shall be new, of the best quality, and American made. The materials shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA,ANSI, U.L. or other applicable standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Provide a complete properly operating system for each item of equipment called for under this work. Installations shall be in accord with the equipment manufacturer's instructions, the best industry practices and the contract documents. Where a conflict in these guides appear, the Architect shall be requested to provide proper clarification before work is roughed in and the Architect's decision will be final. Work installed without such clarification shall be removed and corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 26 00 01 Water Building Renovation Page 7 February 5, 2007 B. Make installation in a neat,finished, and safe manner according to the latest published NECA Standard of Installation under competent supervision. C. Install intumescent material around ducts, conduits, etc., to prevent spread of smoke or fire where installed in sleeves or block-outs penetrating rated fire barriers. The penetration sealing system must be capable of passing a 3-hour test per ASTM E-814(UL 1479)and must consist of a material capable of expanding nominally eight times when exposed to temperatures of 250-350°F. An alternate method utilizing intumescent materials in caulk and/or putty form may be used. 3.2 NOISE CONTROL: A. Outlet boxes at opposite sides of partitions shall not be placed back to back nor straight through boxes be employed, except where specifically permitted on the Drawings by note to minimize transmission of noise between occupied spaces. B. Conduit shall be routed along corridors or other"noncritical'space to minimize penetrations through sound rated walls. All penetrations through sound rated partitions shall be grouted solid and airtight. Conduit and its associated attachment shall not rigidly connect(i.e., bridge) independent wall structures. Flexible connections or attachments are required. C. Contactors, transformers, starters, and similar noise producing devices shall not be placed on walls which are common to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on the Drawings. Where such devices must be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, they shall be shock mounted or isolated in such a manner as to effectively prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the occupied space. D. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers, and like equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced. 3.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including incidental wiring, materials, devices, and labor necessary for a finished working installation. B. Verify the location and method for connecting to each item of equipment prior to roughing-in. Check the voltage and phase of each item of equipment before connecting. C. Make motor connections for the proper direction of rotation. Minimum size flex for mechanical equipment shall be 1/2 inch except at small control devices where 3/8-inch flex may be used. Exposed motor wiring shall be jacketed metallic flex with 6 inches minimum slack loop. Pump motors shall not be test run until liquid is in the system. D. Control devices and wiring relating to the HVAC systems will be furnished and installed under Division 23, 24 and 35 except for provisions or items specifically noted on the electrical Drawings or specified herein. 3.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT: LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 26 00 01 Water Building Renovation Page 8 February 5, 2007 A. Each fastening device and support for electrical equipment, luminaires, panels, outlets, and cabinets shall be capable of supporting not less than four times the ultimate weight of the object or objects fastened to or suspended from the building structure. B. Properly and adequately support luminaires installed under this work from the building structure. Supports shall provide proper alignment and leveling of luminaires. Flexible connections where permitted to exposed luminaires shall be neat and straight, without excess slack, attached to the support device. C. Support all junction boxes, pull boxes, or other conduit terminating housings located above the suspended ceiling from the floor above, roof, or penthouse floor structure to prevent sagging or swaying. D. Conduits: 1. Support suspended conduits 1 inch and larger from the overhead structural system with metal ring or trapeze hangers and threaded steel rod having a safety factor of 4. Conduits smaller than 1 inch, installed in ceiling cavities, may be supported on the mechanical system supports when available space and support capacity has been coordinated. 2. Anchor conduit installed in poured concrete to the steel reinforcing with No. 14 black iron wire. E. Powder actuated or similar shot-in fastening devices will not be permitted for any electrical work except by special permission from the Architect. 3.5 ALIGNMENT: A. Install panels, cabinets, and equipment level and plumb, parallel with structural building lines. Switchgear panels and all electrical enclosures shall fit neatly without gaps, openings, or distortion. Properly and neatly close all unused openings with approved devices. B. Fit surface panels, devices, and outlets with neat, appropriate trims, plates, or covers without overhanging edges, protruding corners, or raw edges to leave a finished appearance. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Include cutting, patching and restoration of finishes necessary for this work. Surfaces damaged by this work and spaces around conduits passing through floors and walls shall be neatly patched and finished to match the adjacent construction including painting or other finishes. Clean up and remove all dirt and debris. This work shall all be performed to the satisfaction of the Architect. B. Where equipment installations or connections require the installation of an access panel, arrange with General Contractor to provide a properly sized and installed access panel similar to those used for mechanical equipment access. 3.7 PROTECTION OF WORK: A. Protect all electrical work and equipment installed under this Division against damage by other trades, weather conditions, or any other causes. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Basic Electrical Materials and Methods:26 00 01 Water Building Renovation Page 9 February 5, 2007 B. Switchgear, transformers, panels, luminaires, and all electrical equipment shall be kept covered or closed to exclude dust, dirt, and splashes of plaster, cement, or paint and shall be free of all such contamination before acceptance. Enclosures and trims shall be in new condition,free of rust, scratches, and other finish defects. Properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Architect, if damaged. 3.8 MAINTENANCE OF SERVICE: A. Electrical service shall be maintained to all functioning portions of the building throughout construction, except as noted below, during all normal working hours of the building occupants. Outages to occupied areas shall be kept to a minimum and be pre-arranged with the Architect or Owner's Representative. This Contractor will be liable for any damages resulting from unscheduled outages or for those not confined to the pre-arranged times. B. Signal and communication systems and equipment shall be kept in operation wherever these serve occupied or functional portions of the building. Outages of these facilities shall be treated the same as electrical power outages. C. Telephone services where required during the construction work will be maintained by the Owner's communications personnel. This work shall be coordinated with the Owner's Representative and Architect in such a manner that service, as required by the building occupants, can be readily installed and maintained. D. Include all costs for temporary facilities, overtime labor and necessary provisions to maintain electrical services in the initial bid proposal. Temporary wiring and facilities, if used, shall be removed and the site left clean before final acceptance. 3.9 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE: A. Remove or relocate all electrical wiring, equipment, luminaires, etc., as may be encountered in removed or remodeled areas in the existing construction affected by this work. Disconnect electrical service to hard wired equipment scheduled for removal under other Divisions of Work. Wiring which serves usable existing outlets shall be restored and routed clear of the construction or demolition. Safely cut off and terminate all wiring to be abandoned and remove to leave site clean. B. Existing concealed conduits in good condition may be reused for installation of new wiring where available. Existing undamaged, properly supported surface conduits may be reused where surface conduits are called for, provided that the installation meets all workmanship requirements of the Specifications. Where new wiring is added or existing wiring disturbed in existing branch circuit raceways, all existing wires shall be replaced with new. C. Removed materials not scheduled for reuse shall become the property of the Contractor for removal from the site, except for those items specifically indicated on the Demolition Drawings for salvage or reuse. Neatly store salvaged items at one location at the site where directed by the Owner's Representative. D. Salvage properly operating circuit breakers from panels scheduled for removal and use to replace faulty or inadequate breakers in existing panels scheduled to remain. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 26 00 01 Water Building Renovation Page 10 February 5, 2007 3.10 COMPLETION AND TESTING: A. Upon completion, systems shall be tested to show the equipment installed operates as designed and specified, free of faults and unintentional grounds. The system tests shall be set up for as many at one time as possible to work into construction phasing. Tests shall be done in the presence of the Architect or his representative, and shall be scheduled 48 hours in advance. B. Ajourneyman electrician with required tools shall be available to conduct all tests, with or without the equipment factory representative present. C. Systems shall include, but not be limited to the following systems: 1. Standby power 2. Fire alarm 3. Security 4. Lighting control systems 5. Emergency egress lighting 6. Megger testing 7. Ground electrode test 8. GFI receptacles testing 9. Stand-by generator testing D. A written record of performance tests shall be compiled, dated, witnessed, and submitted along with operating and maintenance data to the Architect prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Conductors and Connectors: 26 05 19 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Conductor sizes shown on Drawings are sized for copper and shall be considered minimum for ampacities and voltage drop requirements. B. Conductors for special systems shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer except as noted. C. Deliver conductors to the job site in cartons, protective covers, or on reels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product data. B. Test reports. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS -60OV: A. Type: 1. Copper: No. 12 AWG minimum size unless noted otherwise, No. 8 and larger, Class B concentric or compressed stranded. B. Insulation: 1. Copper: THW, THHN, THWN unless noted or specified otherwise. XLP where required for low leakage. C. Thru wiring in fluorescent luminaires shall be rated for 90 degree C minimum. D. Manufacturers: Alcan, General, Essex, Rome, Southwire, or equal. 2.2 POWER LIMITED WIRING: A. Copper, stranded or solid as recommended by the system manufacturer. B. Insulation shall be appropriate for the system and location used. 2.3 CONNECTORS -600V AND BELOW: A. Branch Circuit Conductor Splices: Live spring type, Scotchlok, Ideal Wire Nut, Buchanan B- Cap, or 3M Series 560 self-stripping type. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Conductors and Connectors: 26 05 19 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. Cable Splices: Compression tool applied sleeves, Kearney, Burndy, or equal with 600V heat shrink insulation. For cable splices in sub-terrain/underground vaults or any wet locations shall be provide with 600V 3M Series DBR-6 or approved. C. Terminator Lugs for Stranded Wire: 1. No. 10 Wire and Smaller: Spade flared, tool applied. 2. No. 8 Wire and Larger: Compression tool applied, Burndy, Anderson, or equal. Set screw type terminator lugs supplied as an integral part of switches and circuit breakers will be acceptable for terminating only copper conductors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTORS: A. Pulling compounds may be used for pulling all but low leakage type XLP insulated conductors on isolated power systems. Clean residue from the conductors and raceway entrances after the pull is made. B. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. Pulling shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications regarding pulling tensions, bending radii of the cable, and compounds. A dynamometer shall be utilized on all high voltage cable pulls to insure that the maximum allowed cable tension is not exceeded. The Architect and Engineer shall be notified prior to all cable pulls. Record the maximum strain of each pull. C. Conductors entering terminal or junction boxes mounted on hermetically sealed refrigeration compressor motors shall be copper. D. Make up and insulate wiring promptly after installation of conductors. Wire shall not be pulled in until all bushings are installed and raceways terminations are completed. Wire shall not be pulled into conduit embedded in concrete until after the concrete is poured and forms are stripped. E. Wire devices external to isolating panels with copper stranded conductors having a cross-linked polyethylene insulation or equivalent with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less. Minimum insulation wall thickness shall be 1/32" for#10 and #12 AWG and 5/64" for#8 AWG and larger conductors. Wiring shall be color coded in accordance with NEC and appropriate NFPA Standards. F. Minimum insulation wall thickness shall be 1/32" for#10 and #12 AWG and 5/64" for#8 AWG and larger conductors. Wiring shall be color coded in accordance with NEC and appropriate NFPA standards. 3.2 CONNECTORS: A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a tool applied spade flared lug when terminating at a screw connection. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Conductors and Connectors: 26 05 19 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 B. All screw and bolt type connectors shall be made up tight and retightened after an eight hour period. C. All tool applied compression connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations and physically checked for tightness. 3.3 COLOR CODING: A. Secondary service, feeders, and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded. Phase color code to be consistent at all feeder terminations, A-B-C left-to-right, A-B-C top-to-bottom, or AB- C front-to-back. Color code shall be as follows: 208Y/120 volt Phase Black A Red B Blue C White Neutral Green Ground* * Grounds for isolated ground receptacles shall be green with yellow tracer. B. Use solid color compound or solid color coating for No. 12 and No. 10 branch circuit conductors and neutral sizes. C. Phase conductors No. 8 and larger color code using one of the following: 1. Solid color compound or solid color coating. 2. Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above. 3. Colored as specified using 3/4-inch wide tape. Apply tape in half overlapping turns for a minimum of three inches for terminal points and in junction boxes, pull boxes, troughs, manholes, and handholes. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable stating size and insulation type. D. Switchlegs, travelers, etc., to be consistent with the phases to which connected or a color distinctive from that listed. E. Color coding of the flexible wiring system conductors and connectors shall be the manufacturer's standard. F. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the existing wiring system. 3.4 TESTS: A. Perform insulation resistance tests on all phase and neutral conductors of feeders and circuits over 100 ampacity, 480 volt and below, with a 1000 volt megger. The written test report listing the results of the test to be submitted to Architect. Equipment which may be damaged by this test shall be disconnected prior to the test. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Grounding: 26 05 26 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide complete ground systems as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Include conduit system, transformer housings, switchboard frame and neutral bus, motors, and miscellaneous grounds required. B. Continue existing system as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUND CONDUCTORS: A. Bare or green insulated copper for interior systems. B. Bare copper for underground or exterior systems. 2.2 CONNECTORS: A. Cast, set screw or bolted type. B. Form poured, exothermic welds. C. Grounding lugs where provided as standard manufacturer's items on equipment. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Grounding Conductors: Sized in accord with Article 250, Tables 250-122 and 250-66 of the National Electrical Code. B. Grounding Conductor Connectors: Made up tight and located for future servicing and to insure low impedance. C. Ground the electrical system, the cold water service, structural steel, and transformers to the building ground grid. D. All Plug-in Receptacles: Bonded to the boxes, raceways, and grounding conductor. E. Provide equipment grounding conductor in all PVC conduit runs. F. Provide ground bonding to above ground portion of metal gas piping per NEC 250-104(b). G. All separately derived systems shall be solidly grounded to the nearest water piping. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Grounding: 26 05 26 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 3.2 EQUIPMENT: A. Provide separate green insulated equipment ground conductor in all non-metallic and flexible electrical raceways. Effectively ground all luminaires, panels, controls, motors, disconnect switches, exterior lighting standards, and noncurrent carrying metallic enclosures. Use bonding jumpers, grounding bushings, lugs, buses, etc.,for this purpose. B. Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances to panels and equipment enclosures and bond bushings to enclosures with minimum No. 10.AWG conductor. Connect the equipment ground to the building system ground. Use the same size equipment ground conductors as phase conductors, up through No. 10 AWG. 3.3 GROUND RESISTANCE TEST: A. Ground electrode resistance test shall be accomplished with a ground resistance direct-reading single test meter utilizing the Fall-of-Potential method and two reference electrodes. Perform test prior to interconnection to other grounding systems. Orient the concrete-encased ground electrode to be tested and the two reference electrodes in a straight line spaced fifty (50) feet apart. Drive the two reference electrodes five(5)feet deep. B. Test results shall be in writing and shall show temperature, humidity and condition of the soil at the time of the tests in the case where the ground resistance exceeds 5 ohms. The Engineer will issue additional instructions. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings: 26 05 33 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide raceways and conduits of specified types for all electrical systems wiring, except where clearly shown or specified otherwise. All fittings, boxes, hangers and appurtenances shall be included. B. Size raceways and conduits as specified. Where no size is indicated, conduit may be the minimum code permitted size for the quantity of conductors installed, based upon NEC tables for conductors with type THW/TW insulation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALLIC CONDUITS: A. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC): Smooth surfaced heavy wall mild steel tube of uniform thickness and temper, reamed and threaded at each end and protected inside and out with galvanizing, sherardizing, or equivalent process. GRC shall comply with NEC Article 346. B. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC): Smooth surface, intermediate wall mild steel tube of uniform thickness and temper, reamed and threaded at each end, and protected inside and out with galvanizing, sherardizing, or equivalent process. IMC shall comply with NEC Article 345. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Smooth surface, thin wall mild steel tube of uniform thickness and temper, galvanized or sherardized on the outside, and enameled on the interior. EMT shall comply with NEC Article 348. D. Flexible Conduits (Flex): 1. Flexible Metallic Conduit: Interlocking single strip steel construction, galvanized inside and out after fabrication. Flex shall comply with NEC Article 350. 2. Liquid Tight: Similar to flexible metallic conduit, except encased in a liquid tight polyvinylchloride or equivalent outer jacket over the flexible steel core, and shall comply with NEC Article 351. 2.2 NON-METALLIC CONDUITS: A. Underground Ducts: 1. PVC, Encased Burial: Type EB for concrete encasement, shall meet or exceed the current requirements of EB-20/ASTM F512, NEMA TC-6 and U.L. 651. Rate for use with 90°C wire. 2. PVC, Direct Burial: Type DB suitable for direct burial, shall meet or exceed the current requirements of DB-20/ASTM F512 and NEMA TC-6. Rate for use with 90°C wire. B. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Type II PVC Schedule 40, suitable for use with 90°C rated wire. Conduit shall conform to UL Standard 651 and carry appropriate UL listing for above and below ground use. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings:26 05 33 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 2.3 WIREWAYS: A. Troughs: Steel, painted, square in cross section, preformed knock-outs on standard spacing, screw cover. B. Fittings: Tees, elbows, couplings as required for configuration shown on the Drawings. 2.4 FITTINGS: A. GRC and IMC: 1. Threaded Locknuts: Sealing type where used with NEMA 2, 3, 3R,4 and 12 enclosures. 2. Threaded Bushings: 1 1/4 inch and larger, insulated, grounding type as required under Section 16450. 3. Threaded Couplings: Standard threaded of the same material and as furnished with conduit supplied. Erickson type couplings may be used where required to complete conduit runs larger than 1 inch. B. EMT: 1. Connectors: Steel compression ring or steel set screw type for conduit termination, with insulated throat, suitable for conditions used. Use lay-in grounding type bushings where terminating grounding conductors. 2. Couplings: Steel compression ring or steel set screw type, concrete tight. C. Threadless: GRC and IMC couplings and box connectors may be steel threadless, compression ring or set screw type for use with conduits 1 inch and smaller where installed in poured concrete locations or where limited working space makes threaded fittings impractical. D. Weatherproof Connectors: Threaded. E. Expansion Couplings: Equal to O.Z.type EX with jumper. F. Seal-Offs: With filler fiber, compound, removable cover. 2.5 METALLIC BOXES: A. Flush and Concealed Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears for device ring mounting, knock-out plugs, mounting holes, fixture studs if required, RACO or equal. B. Surface Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings; cast steel or aluminum with threaded hubs or bosses for use on walls. C. Large Boxes: Boxes exceeding 4-11/16 inches square when required shall be welded steel construction with screw cover and painted, steel gauge as required by physical size, Hoffman, Circle AW or equal. D. Systems: Boxes for systems devices shall be as recommended by the systems manufacturer, suitable for the equipment installed. Equip with grounding lugs, brackets, device rings, etc., as required. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings: 26 05 33 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Conceal all conduits in finished spaces. Concealed conduits shall run in a direct line with long sweep bends and offsets. GRC and IMC embedded in concrete below grade or in damp locations shall be made watertight by painting the entire male thread with Rustoleum metal primer or equal before assembly. B. Route exposed conduit parallel or at right angles to structural building lines and neatly offset into boxes. Conduits attached directly to building surfaces shall closely follow the surfaces. Conduit fittings shall be used to "saddle" under beams. Drilling or notching of existing beams, trusses on structural members shall be coordinated with Architect prior to commencing. C. GRC and IMC terminations at boxes, cabinets, and general wiring enclosures shall be rigidly secured with double locknuts and bushings or approved fittings. Conduit shall be screwed in and shall engage at least five threads in hub where conduit boxes with threaded hubs or bosses are used. Insulating bushings shall be used for conduits 1-1/4 inches or larger. D. Keep conduit and raceways closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete, or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before installation of wire and at the time of acceptance. E. Pack spaces around conduits with polyethylene backing rods and seal with polyurethane caulking to prevent entrance of moisture where conduits are installed in sleeves or block-outs penetrating moisture barriers. 3.2 CONDUIT: A. GRC may be used in all areas for wiring systems. GRC shall be installed for wiring underground in cast concrete construction, in damp locations, and in hazardous areas for serving fire pump controllers and where subject to mechanical injury with threaded fittings made up tight. IMC may be used in locations not in contact with earth or fill. B. EMT may be used in all other dry protected locations. Provide green equipment bonding conductor where used for power circuit feeders 2-inch and larger. EMT, whether exposed or concealed, shall be securely supported and fastened at intervals of nominally every 8 feet and within 24 inches of each outlet, ell,fitting, panel, etc. C. Flex shall be used for connections to vibration producing equipment and where installation flexibility is required with a minimum 12 inches slack connection. Limit flex length to 36 inches for exposed equipment connections and 72 inches in concealed ceiling and wall cavities. PVC jacketed flex shall be used in wet locations, areas subject to washdown, and exterior locations. D. PVC Type II Schedule 40 may be used underground and in and under interior slabs, poured concrete walls, and where scheduled or noted on the Drawings. Make connections with waterproof solvent cement. Provide GRC at 60 degree and larger bends and where penetrating slabs. 3.3 RACEWAYS: LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings: 26 05 33 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 A. Surface metal wireways may be installed at locations to serve motor starters or other control devices where required by a multitude of wiring interconnections or physical layout. 3.4 FITTINGS: A. Metallic raceways and conduits shall be assembled continuous and secured to boxes, panels, etc., with appropriate fittings to maintain electrical continuity. All conduit joints shall be cut square and reamed smooth with all fittings drawn up tight. B. Crimp-on, tap-on, indenter type, malleable iron or cast set screw fittings shall not be used. 3.5 BOXES: A. Boxes and outlets shall be mounted at nominal center line heights shown on the drawings. Adjust heights in concrete masonry unit (CMU) walls to prevent devices or finish plates from spanning masonryjoints. B. Outlet boxes shall be of code required size to accommodate all wires, fittings, and devices. Provide multi-gang boxes as required to accept devices installed with no more than one device per gang. Equip all metallic boxes with grounding provisions. C. Flush wall switch and receptacle outlets used with conduit systems shall be 4 inches square, 1- 1/2 inches or more deep, with one or two-gang plaster ring mounted vertically. Where three or more devices are at one location, use one piece multiple gang the box or gang box with suitable device ring. D. Wall bracket and ceiling surface mounted luminaire outlets shall be 4-inch octagon 1-1/2 inches deep with 3/8-inch fixture stud where required. Wall bracket outlets to have single gang opening where required to accommodate fixture canopy. Provide larger boxes or extension rings where quantity of wires installed requires more cubic capacity. E. Junction boxes installed in accessible ceiling or wall cavities or exposed in utility areas shall be a minimum of 4 inches square, 1-1/2 inches deep with appropriately marked blank cover. F. Boxes for the special systems shall be suitable for the equipment installed. Coordinate size and type with the system supplier. G. Provide pull boxes where shown for installation of cable supports or where required to limit the number of bends in any conduit to not more than three 90 degree bends. Use galvanized boxes of code required size with removable covers installed so that covers will be accessible after work is completed. H. Recessed boxes shall be flush with finished surfaces or not more than 1/8-inch back and be level and plumb. Long screws with spacers or shims for mounting devices will not be acceptable. No combustible material shall be exposed to wiring at outlets. I. Covers for flush mounted boxes in finished spaces shall extend a minimum of 1/4-inch beyond the box edge to provide a finished appearance. Finish edge of cover to match cover face. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Conduits, Raceways, Boxes, Fittings: 26 05 33 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 J. Boxes installed attached to a stud in sheet rock walls shall be equipped with opposite side box supports equal to Caddy #760. Install drywall screw prior to finish taping. Methods used to attach boxes to studs shall not cause projections on the face of the stud to prevent full length contact of sheet rock to the stud face. 3.6 PULL WIRES: A. Install nylon pull lines in all empty conduits larger than 1 inch where routing includes 25 feet or more in length or includes 180 degrees or more in bends. B. Where conduits requiring pull lines are stubbed out and capped, coil a minimum of 36 inches of pull line and tape at termination of conduit for easy future access. Label pull lines as to conduit starting or terminations point and intended future use. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Identification: 26 05 53 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Clearly and properly identify the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the function of each item of equipment connected under this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LABELS: A. Pre-printed: Permanent material pre-printed with black on white, with adhesive backing, Brady, 3M or equal. B. Laminated Plastic: 3-ply laminated plastic, black with white letters, for 208/120V equipment and red with white letters for 480/277V equipment. Lamicoid or equal. C. Clear Plastic Tape: Black 12 point Helvetica medium characters machine imprinted on clear tape, Merlin, Kroy or equal. D. Plastic Tape: Black or red with white letters, adhesive backing, field printed with proper tool, Dymo-tape or equal. E. Wire Markers: White with black numbers, adhesive backed tape on dispenser roll, Brady, 3M or equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS: A. Indicate panel number with laminated plastic labels. Indicate voltage phase and feeder source, feeder wire size, and feeder breaker or fuse size with plastic tape labels on the inside of the panel door. B. Provide typewritten panel directories, with protective, clear transparent covers, accurately accounting for every breaker installed including spares. Schedules shall use the actual room designations assigned by name or number near completion of the work and not the space designation on the Construction Drawings. 3.2 EQUIPMENT: A. Label all disconnect switches, motor starters, relays, contactors, and time switches indicating equipment served with plastic tape labels. B. Where the controlling device is remote mounted from the serving panel, include the serving panel designation and circuit number with additional plastic tape labels. 3.3 DEVICES: LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Identification: 26 05 53 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 A. Label each receptacle plate with preprinted clear plastic press on labels with 3/16" minimum black letters indicating serving panel and circuit number. Clean all oils, dirt and any foreign materials from plate prior to label application. B. Receptacles connected to a GFCI protected circuit downstream from the protecting device shall be so labeled. 3.4 RACEWAYS AND BOXES: A. Label all pull boxes and junction boxes for systems with paint or marker pen on box cover identifying system. Where box covers are exposed in finished areas, label inside of cover. Covers shall be color labeled as follows: 208Y/1 20V wiring - black; fire alarm - red; communications -green; security-blue. B. Label each end of pull wires left in empty conduits with tags or tape indicating location of other end of wire. 3.5 SYSTEMS: A. Complex control circuits may utilize any combination of colors with each conductor identified throughout, using wraparound numbers or letters. Use the number or letters shown where the Drawings or operation and maintenance data indicate wiring identification. B. Label the fire alarm and communication equipment zones, controls, indicators, etc., with machine printed labels or indicators appropriate for the equipment installed as supplied or recommended by the equipment manufacturer. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Secondary Distribution System:26 20 00 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Tie new panelboards into existing secondary power distribution system as specified herein and shown on drawings. Secondary distribution system shall be fully rated. Series rating shall not be acceptable. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop drawings. B. Product data. C. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Match existing manufacturer: General Electric. 2.2 BRANCH PANELBOARDS: A. Branch Circuit Panels: Bolt-in circuit breaker type with aluminum or copper bussing. Panels shall be fitted with flush lift latches and locks keyed alike, same as existing. Deliver all panel keys to the Owner at completion of the project. B. Main Circuit Breakers: Equip panels indicated with main circuit breakers sized as scheduled and mounted behind door at top of panel. Back feeding of branch circuit breakers is not acceptable. C. Branch Circuit Breakers: Molded case, thermal magnetic type. Breakers shall have short circuit capacity rating to withstand the maximum short circuit duty which can be expected at the breaker location in the electrical system. Breakers mounted in branch panelboards shall be of the bolt-in type. Circuit breakers used for switching duty shall be UL listed for that purpose and marked "SWD". Minimum short circuit rating for any circuit breaker: 10,000 A.I.C.for 120V and 208V breakers. D. Wiring Gutters: A minimum of 4 inches wide except where feeder conductors enter where a minimum of 6 inches clear shall be provided. Feeder conductors to enter directly in line with lug terminals wherever practicable. Provide separate feeder studs for each feeder conductor compression lug. E. Cabinets: Flush doors with concealed hinges and mounting clamps equal to Square D Mono Flat, or ITE Decor trim. Surface panels shall have metal face trims with no sharp edges or corners. Finish surface panel tubs to match face trim. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Secondary Distribution System: 26 20 00 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 F. Ground Bus: Provide a grounding bus with termination capacity for the grounding conductor sized for the branch circuit equipment grounding conductors in isolated ground 208Y/120V panels identified by suffix IG. Grounding bus shall be bonded to the panel cabinet. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install the secondary distribution system assemblies and equipment as specified, parallel and square with the building lines. B. Neatly lace and secure the conductors of the feeder circuits individually at maximum 2 foot intervals. The cable lugs shall not support the weight of the cables. 3.2 BRANCH PANELBOARDS: A. Install panelboards plumb and level, 6'-0"to top unless noted otherwise. B. Equip selected breakers with mechanical locking devices such that they may be locked in the "on" position. Selected breakers shall include those serving alarm systems, fire suppression systems, communications systems and other critical loads directed. C. Install a spare 3/4-inch conduit from flush panels for each three single pole breakers or spaces provided. Terminate conduits above accessible ceiling or as directed. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Wiring Devices and Plates:26 27 26 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide wiring devices and plates or blank plates only for all outlet boxes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product data. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Wiring Devices and Plates: Hubbell, Leviton, Pass &Seymour. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Wiring devices shall be specification grade, with special devices as specified and required. Furnish a matching cap for all special purpose devices that do not have the common 120 volt NEMA 5-20R configuration. B. All lighting switches and duplex receptacles installed shall have similar appearance characteristics unless noted otherwise. 2.3 WALL SWITCHES: A. Line Voltage Switches: 20 ampere, 277 volt, quiet type, back and side wired. Verify finish color with architect. Hubbell CS-1221 series. B. Switch with pilot, lighted clear toggle, Hubbell HBL-1221-PL. C. Momentary Contact Switches: 15A, SPDT, center off. Verify finish color with architect. Hubbell HBL-1556. 2.4 RECEPTACLES: A. Normal Power Duplex: 3-wire, 2-pole grounding, steel backstrap, NEMA 5-20R, back and side wired. Verify finish color with architect. 1. General Application: Hubbell CR-5362 series. B. Ground Fault Interrupting Duplex: NEMA 5-20R. Verify finish color with architect. UL 943, Class A. Hubbell GFR-5352A series. C. Special Purpose Receptacles: As noted on Drawings with NEMA configurations. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Wiring Devices and Plates: 26 27 26 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 2.5 PLATES: A. Flush Finish Plates: .040"thick, type 302 stainless steel, brush finish. B. Surface Covers: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel, 1/2" raised industrial type with openings appropriate for device installed. C. Weatherproof: Standard duplex GFI receptacle. Hubbell WP26MH.cover mounted horizontally with hinges up. Special purpose receptacles. Hubbell WP723D. D. Identification: Identify receptacle plates with press on labels indicating serving panel and branch circuit number. 2.6 CABLE REELS WITH PORTABLE OUTLET BOX: A. Manufactuer: Hubbell HBI-45123R,Aero-Motive or approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines. Wall mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at centerline height shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings or shown/specified in the architectural drawings, details, and elevations the centerline of all receptacles shall be 18 inches above finished floor and the centerline of all light switches shall be 48 inches above finished floor per ADA. For all above counter devices, verify exact mounting heights with architectural drawings, details, and elevations. B. Finish plates and devices are not to be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or splattered finish plates and devices will not be accepted. C. Provide weatherproof device covers on devices at all exterior locations and damp or wet label areas. 3.2 CORD CAPS: A. All special plugs provided with the receptacles shall be given to the Owner in their cartons with a letter stating the date and the Owner's representative that received the materials. 3.3 COORDINATION: A. Refer to Architectural elevations, sections and details for exact locations. B. Coordinate with equipment installer the locations and methods of connection to devices mounted in cabinets, counters, work benches, service pedestals and similar equipment. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Wiring Devices and Plates: 26 27 26 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 3.4 TESTING: A. Receptacles shall be tested for line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground faults. Correct any defective wiring. B. Test all GFI receptacles and replace defective units. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Disconnect Switches: 26 28 16 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide switches of proper characteristics as disconnecting means. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Indicate field dimensions, description of materials and finishes, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures. B. Product Data. C. Operating and Maintenance Data. 1.3 WORK IN RELATED SECTIONS A. 26 05 53 Identification PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. General Electric, Siemens, Square D, Cutler Hammer or Approved. 2.2 DISCONNECTS: A. Safety and disconnect switches shall be NEMA type HD (heavy duty), quick-make, quick-break, dual rated with electrical characteristics as required by the system voltage and the load served. Switches shall be equipped with a defeatable cover interlock and indicating handle that will accept a minimum of three padlocks. B. Enclosures shall be NEMA I for indoor use, unless specifically noted otherwise and NEMA 3R where installed exposed to the weather or designated by the subscript"WP". C. Disconnects shall be fusible or non-fusible as designated on Drawings. D. Rejection Fuse Clips: Provide for fusible switches (30 to 600A) to prevent the installation of Class H and Class K non-current-limiting fuses. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. Provide all code required disconnect switches under this work, whether specifically shown or not. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Disconnect Switches: 26 28 16 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 B. Provide one manufacturer for all disconnect switches on the project. C. Disconnect switches shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be square with the building structural lines. D. Install fuses in all fused switches. E. Provide identification as specified in Section 26 05 53. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Lighting: 26 51 00 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide all lighting outlets as specified with a luminaire of the type designated and appropriate for the location. Outlet symbols on the Drawings without a type designation shall have a luminaire the same as those used in similar or like locations. B. Where a luminaire type designation has been omitted and cannot be determined by the Contractor, request a clarification from the Engineer and provide a suitable luminaire type as directed. C. Coordinate installation of luminaires with the ceiling installation and all other trades to provide a total system that is neat and orderly in appearance. D. Install all remote ballasts in enclosures as required by luminaire specified. Remote mounted ballasts shall be located within the distance limitations specified by the ballast manufacturer. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. The provisions of Section 26 00 01 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, apply to work specified in this section. B. Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices and Plates 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The lighting design for this project was based on luminaire types and manufacturers as specified. B. Other "Or Equal' Manufacturers and Products: Submit Substitution Request, complying with requirements of Section 01 Product Options and Substitutions. C. Equality shall be determined by the following luminaire characteristics. Lack of data on any characteristic shall constitute justification for rejection of the submittal. 1. Performance a. Distribution. b. Utilization. C. Average brightness/maximum brightness. d. Spacing to mounting height ratio. e. Visual comfort probability. 2. Construction a. Engineering. b. Workmanship. C. Rigidity LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Lighting:26 51 00 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 d. Permanence of materials and finishes. 3. Installation Ease a. Captive parts and captive hardware. b. Provision for leveling. C. Through-wiring ease. 4. Maintenance a. Relamping ease. b. Replacement of ballast and lamp sockets. 5. Appearance a. Light tightness. b. Neat, trim styling. C. Conformance with design intent 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 26050: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Product Data. 3. Photometric Reports consist of a minimum of: a. Candlepower Distribution Curves. b. Coefficient of Utilization Table. C. Zonal Lumen Summary. 4. Certification of lamp ballast compatibility. 5. Operation and Maintenance Data. 6. Operational Sample upon request. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Recessed luminaires shall have trims which fit neatly and tightly to the surfaces in which they are installed without leaks or gaps. Where necessary, install heat resistant non-rubber gaskets to prevent light leaks or moisture from entering between luminaires trim and the surface to which they are mounted. B. Recessed luminaires installed in fire rated ceilings and using a fire rated protective cover shall be thermally protected for this application and shall carry a fire rated listing. C. Luminaires installed under canopies, roofs or open areas and similar damp or wet locations shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for damp or wet locations. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Lighting: 26 51 00 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 D. Aligners: Ball type with nominally 45 degree movement either side of center. Provide white stem aligner canopies where installed in finished areas. 2.2 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES: A. Doors 12" X 48" and larger: Flat metal equipped with mitered corners, rotary cam or spring assisted latches to hinge from either side. B. Diffusers 12" X 48" and larger: Extruded of clear acrylic plastic, 0.125" minimum overall thickness, 0.045 minimum unpenetrated thickness, pattern 12 with flat sided prisms unless otherwise specified in the luminaire schedule by catalog number or remarks. Concave prisms will not be acceptable. C. Finish: Baked white dry polyester powder, unless otherwise specified with a minimum average reflectance of 85% on all exposed and light reflecting surfaces. Steel components shall be prepared for finishing with a 5-step zinc phosphating process. D. Ship all parabolic luminaires with a protective plastic wrap around parabolic louver to prevent dust buildup during construction. E. Ballasts shall operate a maximum of two lamps in each luminaire. Three and four lamp ballasts shall not be provided. 2.3 COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES: A. Ballasts: High power factor, suitable for lamp type(s) specified and switching controls indicated on drawings. B. Dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified. C. Recessed: Equip with through wire junction box. Box, ballast and replaceable components shall be accessible from the ceiling opening. D. Reflector Cones: Of uniform gauge aluminum, free of spinning marks or other defects and have an integral trim flange. Color as specified in Luminaire Schedule and of the Alzak®process. All luminaires using Alzak® reflector cones to be supplied by the same manufacturer unless directed otherwise in Luminaire Schedule. Reflector cones shall be the low irridescent type. E. Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire Schedule. All concealed interior and exterior luminaire surfaces to be matte black. 2.4 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LUMINAIRES: A. Ballasts: Pulse start, high power factor, constant wattage auto-transformer type, suitable for lamp type specified. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Lighting: 26 51 00 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 B. Luminaire dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified. C. Reflector Cones: Of uniform gauge aluminum,free of spinning marks or other defects and have an integral trim flange. Color as specified in Luminaire Schedule and of the Alzak®process. All luminaires using Alzak® reflector cones to be supplied by the same manufacturer unless directed otherwise in Luminaire Schedule. 2.5 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS: A. Electronic: Electronic program start ballasts shall meet the requirements of UL 935 and shall bear the appropriate UL label and have the same physical dimensions and mounting arrangement as those of their core and coil counterparts. Tandem wiring between luminaires may be used to minimize the number of ballasts while accomplishing the switching requirements shown on the drawings. Advance Mark V and Mark VII, or equal. Ballasts shall have the following electrical characteristics. 1. Withstand input power line transients as defined in ANSI C62.41. The ballasts shall tolerate a line voltage variation of± 10%. The power factor shall be 90% or higher. The lamp crest factor shall measure 1.7 or less. The average Ballast Factor (BF) shall be a minimum of 92.5% under ANSI C82.2 conditions unless otherwise noted on drawings. 2. Total harmonic distortion of the input current to the electronic ballast shall not exceed 10% of the input current and comply with FCC rules and regulations Part 18 concerning the generation of both EMF (electromagnetic interference) and RFI (radio frequency interference). 3. The electronic ballasts shall be Class "A' sound rated and UL Class "P" thermally protected. The ballast shall be provided with an internal fuse to protect the electrical power supply from internal component failure. The ballast shall also be short-circuit protected in the event of miswiring. 4. Ballasts shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for five years. The warranty shall include either a $10 replacement labor allowance or complete replacement including labor by an agent of the manufacturer. B. Ballasts used in enclosed and gasketed luminaires listed for use in wet locations shall be of Type I construction. C. Ballasts shall be rated for the expected ambient temperature in which they are installed. All exterior installed ballasts shall be rated to start the lamps at 00 F. D. Systems using tandem wired luminaires shall be labeled accordingly. Label shall be in the lamp compartment of each luminaire and identify the function of that luminaire. 2.6 LAMPS: A. Lamp each luminaire with the suitable lamp cataloged for the specific luminaire type and as indicated as manufactured by General Electric, Phillips, Osram/Sylvania, Venture or approved equal. All fluorescent lamps shall be of the same manufacturer. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Lighting: 26 51 00 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 B. Fluorescent lamps: T-5 and T-8 lamps shall be 48" 32 watt, inside tri-phosphor coated, 3500 Degress Kelvin color temperature or as required' by luminaire specified in the luminaire schedule. Provide low mercury content and extra life lamps, 30,000 average hours. General Electric or equal. C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Of wattage and configuration indicated in Luminaire Schedule, Tri-Phosphor, 3500°K color temperature. Lamps shall be single ended dual pin plug-in base, except those used with dimming ballasts, which shall utilize the 4-pin configuration. D. Metal halide lamps: Of wattage, base style, color and type indicated in Luminaire Schedule. Provide pulse start lamps. 2.7 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT LAMP POWER SUPPLY: A. Manufacturers: Bodine, Iota, Lithonia B. Description: Self-contained battery-operated power supply for operating one T8 or compact fluorescent lamp for a minimum output of 90 minutes. Full lumen output. C. Provide access hatches, for emergency battery backup ballasts, adjacent to recessed 6-inch or less diameter downlights installed in inaccessible ceilings. Full lumen output. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Determine ceiling types in each area and provide suitable accessories and mounting frames where required for recessed luminaires. Luminaire catalog numbers do not necessarily denote specific mounting accessories for type of ceiling in which a luminaire may be installed. B. The Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans shall take preference as to the exact placement of the luminaires in the ceiling. C. Leave luminaires clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in operation. If luminaires are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the work, the Contractor shall clean them at no additional cost. D. Level luminaires, align in straight lines, and locate as shown on the architectural elevations and reflected ceiling plan. The final decision as to adequacy of support and alignment, will be given by the Architect. The fixtures shall be supported by separate means from the building structure and not from the ceiling system, ductwork, piping or other systems. E. Aim luminaires to provide the lighting pattern for which the luminaire is designed and as directed by Engineer. F. Manufacturer's labels or monograms shall not be visible after luminaire is installed, but must be included for future reference. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Lighting: 26 51 00 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 3.2 WIRING: A. Recessed luminaires served from a junction box above the ceiling may be connected with 3/8" flex, 2 No. 18. Provide 3 No. 18 wires where dual circuiting is called for. Provide ground continuity. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. i i Tigard Public Works Water i iRenovation LRS #06044 ISSUED FOR BID By Jason Tuenge, LC, LEED AP REYES ENGINEERING INC. Professional Consulting Engineers r` FEATURES: • REMODELERS • Easy to install remodeling system. SGRM • .063 Heavy gauge reflector,self HORIZONTAL FLUORESCENT flange/white flange standard. I SERIES • Remodel ring made of 20 gauge galva- RING STYLE nized steel for corrosion resistance. • Many finishes available on reflectors and JUNCTION �x flanges. y� • Return flange on ring for positive"stop", SLOTS FOR REFLECTOR, RETAINING GRI ERSr T, and aid in"trimming out"ceiling CLIPS(4) opening. • Mounting hardware provided. ; • Options include extended whip length, dimming ballasts,emergency ballasts and 2 circuit wiring. g r • Junction box removable, 13"whip Stan dard 5 • Electronic ballast 120/277. -10%thd f HOUSING • UL Listed 10.75 SO 7.0 75 - sAo L_5,25n, UU75J �65.-57I; .5 Illl; 7.5 I 9.0 UU�I I9.5 9:5-1025�J opeNng open 9 openi9 opening opeNnq e »o e e e e E) 7 FITS 5" FITS 6"-711 FITS 711-8" FITS 9" FITS 9"-10" Dimensions shown are nominal. Spectrum Lighting is continually improving products and reserves the right to make changes that will not alter performance or appearance. ORDERING REMODEL FIXTURES FITS SIZE CAT. O WATTAGE BALLAST REFLECTOR 511 SGRM5H 1 lamp up to EX- 120/277 V AR5610CL(OPEN) 5"Aperture 26 Watts PLT Electronic AR5620PA(LENS)- 611_71' SGRM7H 2 las up to EX- 120/277 V AR7510CL(OPEN) 7"Aperture 26matts PLT Electronic AR7520PA(LENS)' 711_$1' SGRM8H 1 or 2=u up to EX- 120/277 V AR8610CL(OPEN) 8"Aperture 42 Watts PLT Electronic AR8620PA(LENS)` 911 SGRM9H 1 or 2=s u to EX- 120/277 V AR9410CL OPEN 9"Aperture 42 Watts PL Electronic AR9420PA(LENS)` 1011 SGRM10H 1, 2, OR 3 lamps up to EX- 120/277 V AR9610CL(OPEN) 10"Aperture 42 Watts PLT Electronic AR9620PA(LENS)` 2 lamps up to 57WPLT EXAMPLE: SGRM8H 12X32 JEX AR8610CL White splay with prismatic acrylic lens(PA) r� is standard on lensed CF fixtures SPECTRUM RUM L10"T11--jo, INC. COMMERCIAL 9 ARCHITECTURAL UGHTIHG 994 Jefferson Street . Fall River, MA 02721 . 508.678.2303 FAX 508.678.2260 SG-RMH-05 A COLD-WEAT ICE-420-EM-B HER APPLICATIONS CATI QNS FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY BALLAST LUMEN OUTPUT (One 10W-70W Lamp) 1300 Lumens (Two 10W-32W Lamps) 650 Lumens per Lamp LAMPS OPERATED 10-42,57, and 70 Watt 4-pin Rapid Start Compact Lamps including Twin, Triple, Quad Tube, 2D&Straight EMERGENCY OPERATION 90 Minutes (1) 10W-70W or(2) 1OW-32W The ICE420-EM-B from IOTA Engineering is a UL Listed fluorescent emergency ballast for use in cold-weather applications that allows the same fixture to be used for both normal and emergency operation.In the event of a power failure,the ICE-420-EM-B switches to the emergency mode and operates one ortwo of the existing lamps for 90 minutes.The ICE420-EM-B can be used with 10W to 70W 4-pin compact fluorescent lamps,providing an initial output of up to 1300 lumens for one or two lamps,and features lamp selector leads for optimizing the light output for designated lamp types.The unit contains a battery, charger, and inverter circuit in a single can,in addition to temperature control circuitry and an internal heating element.The heating element and temperature control circuitry protect the battery pack from freezing during normal AC operation and allows the battery pack to reach acceptable operating temperatures before reactivating the charging circuit.The ICE-420-EM-B is designed for installation directly within the wireway. CASE DIMENSIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Input Voltage............................................. 120/277V, 60Hz TOP Input Wattage ........................................................3.5 Watts Wattage Draw (when heating element is on) .....100 Watts a LENGTH: 131/8° ,; Lamps Operated .....................1OW-70W 4-pin Rapid Start Compact Lamps, including Twin Tube, SIDE Triple Tube,Quad,2D&Straight Emergency Operation......... (1) 1OW-70W or(2) 1OW-32W �................ .... MOUNTING CENTER: 12 3/4" -..__...._...y; 90 minutes Initial Illumination........................................... 1300 lumens (2)lamps 650 lumens each lamp HEIGHT: 1 1/2" 0END Operating Temp ............... ...................-18°to 55° C Approval............................................................. U.L. Listed WIDTH: 2 3/8" Weight..................................................................... 3.6 lbs. U.L.Listed Time delay enhancements Long life high temperature recyclable Ni-Cad battery Open circuit isolation Painted steel case Includes test switch and charge indicator accessory kit 90 minute emergency operation Selectable lamp leads for optimizing light output Dual voltage 120/277V, 60Hz for desired lamp type Internal Heating and Temperature Control Meets or exceeds all National Electrical Code and Life Damp Location Rated Safety Code Emergency Lighting Requirements 5-Year Warranty.See Warranty Page for details. Suitable for use in enclosed and Basketed fixtures International Voltage Models available MODEL NO: ICE-420-EM-B TYPE: '.A PROJECT: ffa& &A COMMENTS: ENGINEERING P.O.BOX 11846 TUCSON,AZ85734 (520)294-3292 - FAX(520)741-2B37 IOTA REV 081506 www.iotaengineering.com SAMPLE SPECIFICATION Emergency lighting shall be provided by using a fluorescent fixture and lamp(s)rated for exterior installation conditions equipped with an IOTA ICE-420-EM-B fluorescent emergency battery pack.The ICE-420-EM-B shall consist of a high temperature, maintenance-free nickel cadmium battery, charger board and an electronic circuit enclosed in a 13 3/8"x 2 3/8"x 1 1/2"vandal-resistant painted steel case.The unit is designed for installation in the wireway or on top of the fixture. A long-life LED charge indicator light and test switch shall be included.The fluorescent EM pack shall operate one 10w- 42w,57w,or 70w or two 10w-32w twin,triple,quad tube,2D or straight 4-pin fluorescent lamps.The ICE-420-EM-B shall provide reduced illumination for a minimum of 90 minutes in the emergency mode with a total initial output of 1300 lumens, and will feature selectable lamp leads for optimizing light output for the designated lamp type.The ICE-420-EM-B shall have 3.5 watts of input power with the heating element off, 100 watts (.83 amps)with the heating element on, and a battery capacity of 24 watt hours.The ICE-420-EM-B is UL Listed and meets or exceeds all NEC and Life Safety Code Emergency Lighting Requirements.The ICE-420-EM-B is warranted for a full five(5)years from the date of purchase. _ ne TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 9ATTERYTEMP.CHARGE CONTROL WATTAGE DRAW AMPS WATTS 3S .. 100 ..... __.... _._...... 15' SS- TEMP.(CELSIUS) .111' 5- 15- Sr TEMP-(CELSIUS) CURRENT FLONSTNROUGH BATTERY CIRCUIT®*SC MIN. :L OPTIONS AVERAGE;LUMENRATINGS* TEST KIT CONFIGURATIONS LAMP 1 LAMP 2 LAMPS ❑ TBTS 13W PL CF 4-PIN 600 675 ❑ TWO-PIECE(TEST SWITCH AND CHARGE INDICATOR) - 26W PL CF QUAD 4-PIN 600 950 26W PL CF QUAD 4-PIN 725 1200 32W PL CF QUAD 4-PIN 1050 1250 VOLTAGE RATINGS 42W PL CF QUAD 4-PIN 1300 57W PL CF QUAD 4 PIN 1160 ❑ 120/277V 60HZ (STANDARD) 70W PL CF QUAD 4-PIN 1200 F282 D/42 4-PIN 800 850 ❑ 220V 50HZ F382 D/42 4-PIN 850 1125 ❑ 240V 60HZ 'Rated lumens measured @ 25° C. ❑ 120V 50HZ REMOTE MOUNTING When battery packs are remote mounted,the remote distance can not exceed'h of the distance from ballast to lamp specified by the A.C.ballast manufacturer.For example,if the A.C.ballast manufacturer recommends no more than 25'remote distance, then the battery pack should not exceed 12'12'.The maximum allowable remote mounting distance is 50'from the lamp. IOTA REV 032806 B IAL,IT, L/GMT/NGS Catalog Number Notes Type FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS INTENDED USE Ideal where high brightness and good illumination levels are required such General-Purpose Strip as retail,light industrial and warehouses. ATTRIBUTES Fixture can be assembled with snap together components and requires no °0 tools.Available in one lamp or two lamp configuration. CONSTRUCTION Heavy-duty channel, die-formed from code-gauge steel. Optional aluminum construction available. RAPID START Sturdy channel cover secured by captive quarter-turn latch for easy ac- 2',3',4' or 8' length cess to wireway. 1 or 2 lamps Combination endplate/channel connector furnished with each fixture. FINISH Five-stage iron phosphate pretreatment ensures superior paint adhesion L and rust resistance. Painted parts finished with high-gloss, baked white enamel. r ELECTRICAL SYSTEM O D Thermally protected, resetting, Class P, HPF, non-PCB, UL Listed and CSA �� Certified ballast is standard. Sound rating depends on lamp/ballast combi- ° W nation. AWM,TFN,THHN wire throughout, rated for required temperatures. INSTALLATION Specifications For unit or row installations,surface or suspended mounting. Length: 18"(457) LISTING 24°(610) 120V, 277V and MVOLT are UL Listed and CSA Certified (standard). 347V is (millimeters). 36°(914) locations. CSA Certified(see Options). NOM Certified (see Options). Suitable for damp All dimensions are inches(millimete Specifications subject to change with- 48"(1219) WARRANTY out notice. 72"(1829) Guaranteed for one year against mechanical defects in manufacture. 96"(2438) Width: 4-3/8"(111) Fixture Depth: 2-1/16'(52) ORDERING INFORMATION Example:C 2 32 120 GEB Choose the boldface catalog nomenclature that best suits your needs and write it on the appropriate line. Order accessories as separate catalog number. C Series Number of Lamp type Voltage Options C General- lamps 15 15W TS T12(18')2 120,277,347, ES Energy-savingballasts(30W or 4OW lamps only) purpose strip 1,2 15PH 15WPH T12(18')' MVOLTS GEB Electronic ballasts,<20%THD For tandem double- Not included 17 17W T8(24") Others available GEBIOIS Electronic ballasts,<10%THDinstant-Start length unit,add prefix T. Example:Tc 20PH 20W PH T12(24')' HPF High power factor ballasts 115W and 20W only) 20 20W TS T12(24')' LPF Low powerfactor ballasts 05W,2OWand3OWonly) 25 25W T8(36') EL Emergency batterypack(nominal 300 lumens) 30PH 30W PH T12(36')' GLR Internal fast-blowfuse(add X for external) 30 30W RS HPF T12(36') GMF Internal slow-blow fuse(add X for external) 32 32W T8(48') CSI 6'cordset,NEMA 5-15P SJT,U-ground plug,120V 40 40W T12(48°)" CS3 6'cordset,NEMA L5-15PSJT,twist-lock plug,120V PLF_ Plug-in wiring;specify 1,2 or3 branch circuits and Accessories hot wires(A=Black,B=Red,C=Blue,AB or AC) Order as separate catalog numbers. AL Aluminum housing,white enamelfinish SQ_ Swivel-stem hanger(specify length in 2"increments). CSA CSA Certified(only required for347V) 1B Ceiling spacer(adjusts from 1-1/2"to 2-1/2"from ceiling). NOM NOM Certified CONLGC 12°screw-on channel connector. WGCUN Wireguard,4'white? HC36 Chain hangers(1 pair,36"long). HRC HookWT-bar hanger(flush to ceiling). NOTES: HRCt Hooker"T-bar hanger(1-1/2"from ceiling). 1 PH ballasts available in low power factor 120V only. WGCSMB Wireguard,4'white for symmetric reflector.' 2 Specify HPF or LPF in options section for 120V,HPF WGC{6SR Wireguard,4'white for asymmetric reflector.' standard on 277V. 3 Order 2 for 8'fixtures. CSMR48M Symmetric reflector,4'white,T'aperture' 4 LPF is available for residential buildings only. CASR48WH Asymmetric reflector,4'white,5-3/4"wide 3 5 MVOLT available with GEB101S only. Fluorescent Sheet# C-RS STRP-100 C Rapid Start MOUNTING DATA DIMENSIONS For unit or raw installation,surface or suspended mounting. Inches(millimeters).Subject Unit installation - Minimum of two hangers required. to change without notice. Aluminum channels have different mounting details: Row installation-Two hangers per channel required. One per 48', 72' and 96' have only two 7/8' K.O.'s 6'from each end fixture plus one per row if CONLGC installed. 24° and 36' have only two 7/8' K.O.'s 3-1/4'from each end Hooker® (HRC) and HC Hangers - Minimum two per channel 36 � (unit and row) 24 (914) -(610) I 6 - 31/4-►'.- See ACCESSORIES below for hanging devices. D + (152) (83) 4-3/8 D- E-•-•---•-•- --Eo-- (111) F o 43/8 - } . 3-1/4 6 (11-i) E F of &HR (83) (152) ->. �-4-1/4 6 6 (1081 (108) (152) (152)sQ 21 rl (71 x1 5 10 _r (83)7521 (254) (83) -� o-E E D 481) D F •----- D - - D ----F -p - O - (1 )� (108)� 52 2-1//16 2-1/1 (�� r 217516 (51) E 215/16 72 (1829) 3-1/4 6 y (63) 2-112 (152) 4-3/8 4. D E --.- FI •---•---- D (111) (G.35) (1 ) --E - •-D •----- ---�} ------ D F Eo 4-3/8 11111 F_-14-1/4 1-6-►I (108) (128 9) - (152) 96 (2438) 3-1/4 --� 6 -► (83) 0=11/16(17)Dia.K.O. i (152) E=7/8(22)Dia-K.O. 4-3/8 D E •-•--------- H •-------•--- F=1-1/4(32)Dia.K.O. (111) -E D •-------•-----•---•- �- D F Eo H=2(51)Dia.K.O. I r 4-1/4 (12 89) 1-6-1(12) (108) PHOTOMETRICS Calculated using the zonal cavity method in accordance with IESNA LM41 procedure.Floor reflectances are 20%. Lamp configurations shown are typical.All data based on 25°C.Full photometric data on these and other configurations available upon request. C140 CS240 C232 Report LTL 5423 ReportLTL 18235 Report LTL 5181 Lumens per lamp-2925-Lum.eff.-94.6% Lumens per lamp-3200-Lum.eff.-90.1% Lumens per lamp-2900-Lum.eff.-92.9% Coefficientof Utilization Coefficientof Utilization Coefficient of Utilization Floor 20% Floor 20% Floor 20% Ceiling 80% 70% 50% Ceiling 80% 70% 50% Ceiling 80% 50% 30% Wall 70% 50% 30% 70% 50% 30% 50% 30% 10% Wall 70% 50% 30% 70% 50% 30% 50% 30% 10% Wall 70% 50% 30% 50% 30% 10% 50% 30% 10% 1 96 90 85 91 86 81 79 75 72 1 92 87 83 88 83 79 86 73 70 1 95 90 85 91 86 82 79 76 73 2 86 76 69 81 73 66 67 61 56 2 83 75 68 79 72 66 65 60 56 2 85 77 70 81 74 67 67 62 58 3 77 66 58 74 63 55 58 51 46 3 75 65 58 71 62 55 57 51 46 3 78 67 59 74 64 57 59 53 48 4 70 58 49 67 56 47 51 44 38 4 69 57 49 65 55 47 50 44 39 4 71 59 50 67 56 48 52 45 40 5 64 51 41 61 49 40 45 37 32 5 62 50 42 59 48 40 44 37 32 5 64 51 43 61 49 41 45 38 33 10 42 29 21 40 28 21 26 19 15 10 41 29 22 39 28 21 26 19 15 10 42 30 22 40 29 21 26 20 16 Zonal Lumens Summary Zonal Lumens Summary Zonal Lumens Summary Zone Lumens %Lamp %Fixture Zone Lumens %Lamp %Fixture Zone Lumens %Lamp %Fixture 0-30 400 13.7 14.5 0-30 906 14.2 15.7 0-30 842 14.5 15.6 0-40 679 23.2 24.6 0-40 1544 24.1 26.8 0-40 1436 24.8 26.6 0-60 1348 46.1 48.7 0-60 3017 47.1 52.3 0-60 2810 48.5 52.1 0-90 2263 77.4 81.8 0-90 4578 71.5 79.4 0-90 4357 75.1 80.8 90-180 503 17.2 18.2 90-180 1187 18.6 20.6 90-180 1033 17.8 19.2 0-180 2766 94.6 100.0 0-180 5765 90.1 100.0 0-180 5390 92.9 100.0 Energy(Calculated in accordance with NEMA standard LE-5) ANNUAL LAMP LAMP BALLAST LER.FL ENERGY COST' DESCRIPTION LUMENS FACTOR WATTS 86.2 52.79 WT8 F32 2900 .88 55 `Comparative yearly lighting energy cost per Iwo lumens �• 1./THON/A LAGAMYVG Fluorescent Lighting fluoresscent An,rMculiyBrandsCompany One Phone: 2-90ay,Conyers,GA 30012 Phone:770-922-9000,800-315-4963,Fax:770-602-1531 Sheet#:C-RS ©1996 Acuity Lighting Group,Inc.,Rev.07/06 www.lithonia.com Tigard Public Works Common Work Results for Communications 270500 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install complete raceway system and backboards for telephone/data equipment and devices as noted on the Drawings. B. Coordinate incoming service with telephone utility and comply with all telephone utility requirements. C. Comply with TIA/EIA Standards 569 and 607, latest edition. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Wall Outlet Boxes: 4-inch square,2 5/8-inch deep, minimum,with single-gang mud ring unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. B. Conduits: 1-inch minimum size with larger sizes indicated on the Drawings. Provide PVC Schedule 40 with steel sweep ells for direct-buried conduit runs. C. Backboards: 3/4-inch 8-foot high, fire rated fir plywood,width as shown on the Drawing. D. Grounding busbar: 2-inch by 10-inch by 1/4-inch solid copper. Wall mount with insulated standoffs per TIA/EIA-607. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Conduit bends shall be large radius field bends or factory ells. Cast type fittings or sharp bends shall not be installed unless specifically approved by the systems installer. No section of conduit shall be longer than 100 feet or contain more than 180 degrees of bend between pull points or pull boxes. B. Where conduits are shown stubbed into a terminal area, stub 6 inches above floor or 12 inches down from ceiling at the appropriate terminal board location, terminating in insulating bushings. C. Provide a pull wire in all conduits longer than 15 feet or with more than 90 degrees of bend. D. Protect all existing telephone/data equipment and devices that will remain in service during construction from mechanical injury and dust entry. E. Paint front and ends of all terminal boards with two coats of enamel to match interior color specified by the Architect. F. Coordinate with system supplier for phasing and work scheduling. G. The inside radius of a bend in conduit shall be at least 6 times the internal diameter. When the conduit size is greater than 2 inches, the inside radius shall be at least 10 times the internal LRS Architects, Inc Tigard Public Works Common Work Results for Communications 270500 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 diameter of the conduit. For fiber optic cable, the inside radius of a bend shall always be at least 10 times the internal diameter of the conduit. H. Provide all low voltage conduit stub-outs with insulated bushings. I. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, provide#6CU ground minimum per telephone utility requirements. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc Tigard Public Works Structured Cabling 271000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Backbone (riser)cabling and connecting hardware from telecommunications vaults to the Entrance Facility(EF)and between the EF and the Main Cross-Connect(MC)and distribution fields in the Telecommunications Room (TR), as shown on Drawings. B. Horizontal (distribution)communications wiring and connecting hardware from the TR to user outlets throughout the site. C. Supporting hardware, labeling, identification and grounding, as required to provide a standard ANSI/TIA/EIA compliant cabling system. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 260500, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Section 270500, Common Work Results for Communications. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B, Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard. B. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. C. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings. D. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. E. BICSI, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, latest edition. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a standards-based Category 6 structured cable system to serve all backbone and horizontal communication systems requirements as specified herein and shown on Drawings. Closely follow all ANSI/EIA/TIA, IEEE and ISO standards that apply to backbone and horizontal communication systems. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Shop Drawings. LRS Architects, Inc Tigard Public Works Structured Cabling 271000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 C. Test Reports. 1. Copper cables: Provide electronic(CD)and hard copy test reports from an ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B Cath cable system testing device for all backbone and horizontal twisted pair cable runs. Test backbone cables for Cat3 or Cat6 performance, as appropriate. Test all Cat6 cables for NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT at each end of the cable,wire map, length, attenuation, attenuation to crosstalk ratio, impedance, structural return loss, DC loop resistance, noise and propagation delay skew. Submit test data in virgin format, as output by the testing device. Test reports that have been modified in any way, as with a word processor, will not be acceptable. Repair, replace and reterminate all cables that do not meet the specified requirements. Retest and repair cable systems as necessary until the entire cable system meets all specified requirements. 2. Fiber Optic Cables: Test all fibers in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 standards. Provide as a minimum, OTDR test results in the form of a printed waveform and text table at 1300 nm. Test all fiber strands and connector systems for end-to-end attenuation. Include the results of any unsatisfactory tests,with an explanation of how the problem was corrected. Clearly label connector and fiber loss on all test waveforms. D. Installation and record drawings. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Upon completion of the installation, provide a manufacturer's extended product warranty with a minimum 15-year assurance of compliant performance with any current or future application based on ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B for the backbone and horizontal cable system infrastructure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers shall have a recognized certified installer program in place for the system components proposed. Cable approved with the system installed. Provide products with UL listing. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Provide system components that are necessary to construct a complete and operable system that meets the Specifications. B. Jacks: ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B,T568B, Cat6, unshielded. C. Faceplate: Coordinate color and finish with Architect. D. Cable: 1. Horizontal: 100 ohm, Cat6, 24AWG, 4-pair unshielded twisted pair, one, two or four cables to each outlet, as noted on Drawings. LRS Architects, Inc Tigard Public Works Structured Cabling 271000 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2. Twisted Pair Backbone: 100 ohm, Category-3, 24AWG, multiple-pair cable with an overall shield,ARMM or GFMW, as-required. 3. Fiber Backbone: 24-strand enhanced grade 62.5/125-micron premises distribution cable with maximum attenuation of 3.0 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm. Minimum bandwidth is 200MHZ-km at 850 nm and 500MHZ-km at 1300 nm. E. Termination Blocks: Cat6, 110-style, with mounting legs and wire management troughs, wall-mount. F. Equipment Rack: Homaco, Chatsworth or approved, 19- by 84-inch double-sided, freestanding equipment rack with EIA standard mounting holes. G. Patch Panels: 1. Twisted Pair: Provide fully loaded multi-port patch panel with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568- B, T568B Cat6 unshielded jacks. 2. Fiber Optic: Provide 19-inch rack-mounted fiber patch panels in the TR as required to terminate all fibers. Fully load fiber panels with 568SC bulkhead connectors. H. Wire Management: 1. Termination Blocks: Provide a minimum of one wiring trough between each 300-pair set of 110-style termination blocks. Provide at least one wire manager block at the top and at least one at the bottom of each column of termination blocks. Square off empty column spaces with wiring troughs to provide a continuous wire management path across the width of the termination field. 2. Panels: Provide a minimum of one double row wire management panel between each patch panel and equipment item that uses patch cords. Provide at least one single row wire management panel at the top and at the bottom of each column of patch panels and equipment. For enclosed cabinets or wall-mounted racks, wire management panels shall have vertical management as an integral part of the panel. Back management must be provided where not integral to the connector patch panels. 3. Equipment Racks: Provide a minimum of one 6-inch wide vertical wire manager between adjacent equipment racks and at each end of each row of adjacent racks. I. Patch (Jumper) Cords: 1. Twisted Pair: Provide unshielded Cat6 patch cords for all telecom outlets. Provide cable lengths for a neat and organized equipment rack at the TR and 10 feet at each terminal. Provide at least one voice or data patch cord, as appropriate, in the TR and at least one workstation connection cord for each user workstation location. 2. Fiber Optic: Provide sufficient duplex fiber optic jumpers (patch cords)with 568SC connectors at each fiber termination point to cross-connect the number of fibers terminated there. Provide lengths for a neat appearance, not to exceed 15-feet. J. Cross-Connect Wire: Category-3, 24AWG twisted pair. LRS Architects, Inc Tigard Public Works Structured Cabling 271000 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 K. Miscellaneous: Provide supporting hardware, cable ties, labels, racking and the like. Provide cable supports rated for Cat6 cable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS A. The installers of the cable system must be Certified Installers, individually registered and trained by the manufacturer for the products submitted to meet the Specifications. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Twisted Pair Backbone Cabling: 1. Install Category-3 24AWG multiple twisted pair backbone cable with overall shield for close-coupled grounding and bonding per ANSI/EIA/TIA-607;ARMM indoor, GFMW outdoors. 2. Terminate twisted pair backbone cabling on 110-style IDC connectors at both ends. Terminate and support all cables in compliance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 standards. Label all cables in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-606. B. Fiber Optic Backbone Cabling: 1. Install the specified fiber optic cable between the telecommunications vault and patch panels in the TR, as shown on Drawings. 2. Terminate fiber optic cable in approved weatherproof splice case in the telecommunications vault 3. Terminate fiber optic cable in rack-mounted fiber optic patch panels in the TR using 568SC style bulkhead connectors. 4. Provide innerduct for all fiber optic cable runs. 5. Install, terminate and support all cables in compliance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 standards. C. Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling: 1. Install horizontal cabling consisting of four 4-pair 24AWG Cat6 unshielded twisted pair cables for each user outlet unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 2. Terminate all cables onto ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B T568B unshielded 8 pin modular jacks at each end. The modular jacks will mount in multi-port patch panels at the TR and in 4-port single gang faceplates or an approved substitute at each user location. D. Supporting Hardware, Labeling and Identification: 1. Install patch panels and wire managers in 19-inch racks in the TR. Coordinate placement of equipment with Owner. 2. Bond all cabling, equipment racks, cable trays and other hardware to the ground bus in the TR per ANSI/EIA/TIA-607. 3. Provide proper bracing and wire management from the backboard to any freestanding equipment racks, per the Oregon UBC. 4. Support, identify and label all cabling per ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 Specifications. Provide independent support from building structure for all components. LRS Architects, Inc Tigard Public Works Structured Cabling 271000 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 5. Seal all conduits entering from outside the building and install listed firestop material in all conduits and sleeves as required to satisfy NEC and local codes. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc Tigard Public Works Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection 281000 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. Section 260500, Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 260533, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical. 3. Section 270500, Common Work Results for Communications. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide security and access control system for selected entrance and exit portals to allow entry for authorized persons and deny entry to unauthorized persons. B. Integrate to existing alarm notification system to notify monitoring personnel in event of intrusion detection. 1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Magnetic card readers will allow access via selected portals when a valid PIN code is entered. B. Card readers will be controlled from a security control panel. C. Request-to-exit sensors will be located at access-controlled doors to allow hands-free egress. D. Door contacts and automatic door locks will be installed at selected exterior doors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's specifications for all devices and components. B. Provide layout of security devices on reproducible architectural floor plan. C. Provide wiring diagrams indicating low voltage and line voltage requirements. D. Closeout: Provide final product data, record drawings (as-builts), operating instructions and maintenance manuals defining system features, procedures and troubleshooting guidelines at completion of project. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Provide components that are UL listed for this application and ADA compliant. B. Manufacturers: GE Security, Hirsch, Detection Systems, DMP, Radionics, Northern Computer, or approved. 2.2 SECURITY CONTROL PANEL A. The security control panel will be equipped with a 2-line 48-character liquid crystal display (LCD). B. Provide security panel with a touchpad for complete operator interface to the control panel. LRS Architects, Inc Tigard Public Works Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection 281000 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 C. Provide system status information and alarm zone identification at control panel on the LCD. 2.3 PROXIMITY CARD READER A. Provide ADA compliant reader with a bi-color LED which is illuminated red or green to indicate operational status. B. Reader may be located up to 500 feet away from main controller. C. Proximity reader will allow access by presenting a card within 4-inches of the reader. 2.4 REQUEST TO EXIT SENSOR D. Provide a passive infrared sensor for hands-free egress. E. Provide sensor with adjustable pattern and 0.25 to 60 second adjustable latch time. 2.5 MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACTS A. Provide 3/4-inch diameter self-locking magnetic contacts. B. Coordinate with architectural door hardware requirements. C. Manufacturer: Sentrol 1078 Series, or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all devices as directed by manufacturer's instructions. Complete all electrical connections to control circuits, locks, card readers and other low voltage devices. B. Program the security and access control system to meet the functional and operational requirements of the Owner. 3.2 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Test each individual portal to verify proper operation. B. Verify that all equipment operates as required to meet the requirements of this Section. C. Repair or replace any part of the system that fails to perform properly at no cost to the Owner. 3.3 TRAINING A. Provide Owner with manufacturer's operating instructions. B. Provide factory trained representatives to instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation of the system equipment. C. Demonstrate to Owner all system features and operations. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc Ln O cY Y O N C' C.O 00 O N -Zt CD [b O N CD Cb O N N O a) U N ct CD 00 — •- N N N - N O LC7 N co Q QQZ M O fn Cn Cn fn Cn Cn Cq CA cn Cn Cn N W tJ W W W W W W W W W W W1 . Cn U fr H J J J J J J J J J J J W LL U U U U U C) U U U U U C7 CJ CJ O H d Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Z Z Z W W F- F- F- F- U U _Z ¢ ❑C Cl- CL CL CL w Cl- CL CL CL CL CL F- F- F- 4 Q fr F- U W W W W W W W W W W W S S S W = Q W F- J Cn U UUUUUUUUUUC (DcmfCL7CF- = F- � Z U p W W W W W W W W W W W W 1-4 p p Q Q Lr O Q -< p Cr Lr Lr Lr Lr m Lr Lr Lr LL Lr J J J W W (C.�7 M U W Cn n W W F- Y � o N O M Cl) M z � Ln J p LU J= cn cn Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn F- F- O LL W W W W W W W W W W W O 0 0 O U p Z J J J J J J J J J J J J J J JLD LU U' Cl) U U U U U U U U U U U L CCM O QQ ¢ QQQQifs QQQZZZC7C7J JJ Cn W W C a F- F- F- F- F- CL F- F- CL - Z Z Q W W p CL CL CL d d w w a W W LL F- F- F- m Q m O W W W W W W W W W W W S S S F- F- W W W O —m LU L.) UUUuuuc-3c-) UL) L) cDcmcm ¢ ¢ z zz8 C/) Z p W W W W W W W W W W W . . . W W W W W O Z_ �2 CL' CL m = m CL CL m CL CL CL J J J S S CJ C7 cm m Q i--i O O O O O O O O O O O M LC] O O w w O O O CO N m m N O m = CD w CO O O w = w CO w w CD w C, Q C- O O L- r M M N O M O m O M O O Ln LCJ M Cn CD CS) co w O O LCA O � N w 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m 0 0 0 0 0 = = (= O O CU �- U CL N N C4 N N N CV . . . N N N N N N N = N N N U \ O m co Q - C=l M N W O WQ e— M N z C/) = Q m U ¢ m U Q m U Q m U Q m U Q m U Q m U > M Lo to w LL o m cc ZD z L L o 0 CD - — — — — — — — — — — .- C-4 J Z F- Cn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D 0 0 0 0 0 = O = O C/) U p J U LL N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N = N = N J wm > F- O 0 0 W 0 0 W W 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lo OO 0 0 0 0 0 F- CO Cb W N LO Cb C D N O CM m = C.Dm N O COCCO 0 0 0 0 0 Q M O O L- LC) O O C- O M Ll7 M — — 0 0 0 0 — N O W } = a Z Z Z CU O S Y 0- Q m U Cc Y Q) ^ C/) Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn t/) w w co C/3 C/) `+ O W W W W W W W W W W W W W m m J J J J J J J J J J J J J UUUUUUUUUL) L) u CD m co U LUpw ¢ QQQQQQQQQ ¢ ¢ ZZC (D z ¢ F- F- F- CL >- O CL w C, CL CL CL (3- d C W CL CL F- F- �--+ F- F- LL } J m O W W W W W W W W W W W W S S F¢- F- S S W Lu F- H C) U U U U U U U U C) U U U C7 CD 1.1J Q C 7 C7 U W W [r Lr CL C'L [L C'L Cr m Lr CC Lr C'L J J S S J J m Cn CO O U W CL W U o CJ) LU w O O ~O z � ¢ N N M O - - n CD of O N Cr M M Cl) J N U p Cn CJD LD 2-1 Cnw V) Cl) Cn Cn Cn CIO C/) Cn w p U W O W W W W W W W W W W W i W zz H J J J J J J J J J J J W U- F- I J Q F- U U U U U U U U U U U C.D C D C7 L o LU U p Z N W CL Cl ,--� Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Z Z W W i••-i t-ti CL CL .-+ U U J J U Z C/D u W CL Cl- w w w Cl- w w w W LL F- F- Q Q W � Cn Z CD U U' LL) LL) W W W W W W W W W S S Z Z W = W = 1-) Z W W O O Cn -U U U U U U U U U U U CJr C CL (r F = F- = UZ U p p ti S W (]._ W W W W W W W W W W W �--� O p H W -J F- LL p Cr L'L Cr C'L Cr Cr Lr Cr Cr LL Lr J -j J LL W U3 Cn Cn C7 U J J J W Q < Q Q Q O pW Y e- M LC7 L� CTi M L[7 CJS e- M Ln L- M .- J O O O C1 J W U M to f- C7) �--• c- N N N N N M co M M M �• Q F- F- F- C- N @ F- Lr) O LCIY O N S CO m O N CO CO O N -:r CM CO O N N O r- U C14CO co — N N N N N M M CO M M � -:r N O N ( N('4 f Q .. .. pz CLU LU3 pp pp J . = F- U H F-Q- F- UJW W W w Z Q m W W = S = = W W W w w W U W W = z m = = CL = = m = m = = pmmUUUU F- J w U U W = = W = = W = = W = = = Q Q Q Q Q Q Z U p W W W O CL O_ d d d D_ 0 ¢ <C O m = O O O O U to fn Cn to Cn fn to LU CL) O~ Y M M �- _ Z N N N a) Cn ca p Q Lu LCI oma... w W 0 O O O O OUpz N J .J J J J J J N M U ULu F- zw H zp Q Q Qp Cl- W = �E 9wW W W W W mc)u Q m O W W W W W W Wm U U U U —c� wc) L) U2T z z z zQmdQQQQ Cn Z M W W W W W W W d CL CL a W Z = = C7 CD C.7 LO C7 co co V) cn Cn Cn Q Oo -�r 't -*- -*- - erv -Zi- vcr0000000 � Eg: vv co to to to cm co cc co cm cm cocci jL n LO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 m m m m m LO � r` M co CL M M M M e— .— CD co O N Cl) O O til = - Ln = - Lf) = - Ln = - O O O O O O O UO CL N N _ _ '- _ _ _ _ `- _ = N N N U (O m Q O L N W =3 W Q O O. O z cC/1) w Q Q m U Q m L) Q m U Q m U Q m C-) Q m U Q m U ' CO CO N L; r` r` m S M N O z Lu m r` r- O F- -< n - M M — . JZ F- w 000tH = = LC) _ = OOOOco 00000o Cn U p J U CL N " CV _ _ _ = N N N N N N N N JQ LU � > O F- 0 0 0 Ir 'czr '-t �t N N m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cr cY � co co CO co CO cc X) LO LCI co = cc O LO LP) L.c) m m m m m m m m c0 M M M 12') CW a) OCo = Co wamc� a) + p p o w w w C) O O m m J J J J J J pLo LS) LLJiQ Q ¢ J J Z Z co C.7 C) L J r m a d d = m F- F- r- --i9 W W W w LU r J m O W www w = = F- F- F- F- F- U CD LD Q Q Q Q UU W U U U Z Z LU uU Z m Q Q Q Q p W W W W W i•-C t-•c W W W W W d LL d, d d W Q OC S CC U) L J J = _ _ = CJ w Cn Cn Cn Cn C!) r, r- LCI U U- LL zY O WLU U r` p U W W a O O C) Z C7 m n z m Y M M `r J N N N �E N m � �--� O O m fr Cr C/) J Z Cn Cn Cn O O CL W W W p z z W O W W LU p w F- F- F- w UUCJ) C.7O ¢ www LU C-) N F- o- w Q Q Q Q p z z w = = x F- LU C D z V www _ _ � _ _ = = F- UL-)uLu LU UC-)LLJ 2 � LU O O Cn U U U W = = W = = L C 3 i--� O O O Q ¢ Q Q Q z U p p m W W w W H H J J J CL. (L d a. c- --j F- W p Cr C'L ❑C O O J J m m m U Cn Cn N w Cn U J J _l W Q Z U CD Wm W Y M Lr) t� C7I M LCI r� QI M Lo r'- O J O O O M W J LL- L) M L.0) r- a) .- '2 L2 N N N N N M M M M M F- F- N Lf) O M O N - Ca o O CN CN o CD o O N M O N N O LO N tD o N N N M N N M M M M M 'C*' CT O CD N M Q F- zz Q Q W O = i--� O - ZD CL Z Q U CL W W W F- m -� CC C) M - � ' QQ � z U W d CL CL O CD U U cn W Cn U Q W Q co co cc C/) O z U y Q Q J Q LU Q Q H O d O O O U cmLLJ ELI LL, Z Q . m O W W = = = m C.7 O C. LU U Z Z Q Q Q Z �z-+ O CJ C.7 CLO Uj W co U) 0 Q �•-+ c,0 CD tD CD o O O N N N N d -I*- o o N N CL N N - - .- � Q) VIJ Lo O N V> O = O = 0 0 0 47 '- U CL LO = Ln = N N N L) O m 00 Q .. o W 7 W Q O Ln Ln Z CO = Q m U Q m U Q m U QM U Q m U Q m U Q m U > No v CD W CL a7 M M cc fJ' O CO co O Z Lu O F~- Q O_ N N --1 2! w o = o = 00000 Cn U ZD J U CL LC) = LC) = N CV N CV N J wm � O F- O co to cocn00000LLJ � v v v v N N N N (n D Q Z Z Z a� O = CL. Q m U o O O cc co J J Q J J Luz W a Q LU LU LU LU U.1 > J m O W W Cr L]C CC cc C1 4- �--+ W U Z Z Q Q Q Q Q W O CJ C.D cn C/D cn w U) cn V' d' C U W IL . W U o T T O C/J LL O O O Z O Y aoi m m O Cr N N N Q U O O wo W J — p f--i U ¢ �--� LU LU LU Uj LU ui cn Z U = N = C'L Cr L'L Cr Cr Zz O W W 2O CL CD W O O d O U C] C] -� F- L.L. p U U C/] W Cn w C/1 U J _l J W ¢ 4 Q Q Q � OY M Ln 1- m M Lo Il- a) M Lo 1, cn J O O O CL J L.L. U M Ln I� m .-- .- .- N N N N . M M M M M Q U Q F- Ln O NY O N Ct GO w O N ct CO w O N CD O O N N O O U N V CO w — r-- — N CV N N N C`M C'M C•M M CO er q*- O Cl) N N N H Q Z W Q Q CLJ Z Z ¢ Cn C7 =ZD 2f cc: cm CD CD -- =) CL Z Z I-- F— — Q U CrF— U SS W = = CCSSSSScc: S0= O= 000UUU I— J C/) CJ" cj:) �•- = = aaaaaaa ¢ ¢ aaaaaaa Z U p W �-••i �--� Q a.. CL CL LL GL CL CL LL CL CL CL C- CL d CL CL CD— < p J J 3 C/J Cn Cn m to fn Cn Cn N to Cn N to Cq fn tq LL- 00 a) O a' ; ; a z <i- h Q J Q if� LU N J H W p C7 co co ;; LLJ W M cm LLJ co O cm 2 S W C= CC CC G= Gr Q= S W S W CC: Cr Cr S CC GC m Cj p p aCD W u LDc) z :x :z C/) Z W CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL LL CL CL CL CL Z —= J J CD w co Cn Cn Cn W cn en cn Cn Cn co Cn Cn Cn Cn Q t-r O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O EN: N ^ O O O r- M M M cn d to to co mr n C" O ^ n N fn O O LO = - O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Cil U CL N N n = = N N N N N N N N N N L) \ O w W :E N W W ¢ O O O z cn cn > Q ¢ mu ¢ mu ¢ mc) amc) ¢ mu ¢ mu ¢ mc) C-4 = M CO W CL N O] Cr C!) — — N z w Cn r-a CD CL •- •- •- M M — .-- .- e- — — — — — — e- O Z a w 0 0 0 0 = - O = - O O O O O O O O O C O O C/3 U = J U W CV N N CD = = O = = N N N N N N N J W --> O �E ^ ^ H O 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F— Q LO CO CO CO CO CO CO W a O CL. Q m U co N 17 C/3Q Q # # - O W O O co m J J J zzp Q J J d } Q p CL. W Wcc: CCW W W W W W W W W W W W W o u ¢ a z z a ¢ Q ¢ a a Q ¢ a a a a M W Cl- d W W CL a_ CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL W m Cn Cn CD C7 co Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn W W Cn Cn �r -:I- LL. :I-LL LL O O O � W lc :"j U � .•-- U W W O p O~ Z ¢ o0 � � v } w m o ti x 76 w 3 pW Qz I— V W LW UpZ m � CL 0- Q m F— W C_�J C= CL W W ccn L) W W W W W W W W W W W W W w 2! :a u W pCOCcn = _ _ = Cr CC CC Cr Cr 0= = C> uC.) C) u z Ww i. m W W a_ � o= W .. a_ a_ 0- a- o0- a a- CLa- a JF- CL O CC Cn W a. p Cn Cn Cn w Cn w Cn Cn w Cn Cn Cn UJ JJ Q O pw Y M Lr� r� m M r� a� M Lr� m J 0 0 0 0- J W U •- M LO n m � � � � N N N N N M M M M M -�I- Q H F C� O O CO Y O� r N - - - O N '� CO Cb O N M M O N O O O U N � CG) (b N N N N N M M M M M M C' O C7) N N Q .. C) CC CC CJ" I— Zz = O O O Z Q Q w O w w Q p Qp0 op I~— W 3 ZD Z � H CU Q Q ¢ Q cm W C3 F¢ LU— = w W W J Cn O Z Q CC CL _ _ = W W F W J �--� m F- U W H CC = _ _ _ = = = = W CC = Q W = CL W = _ F- J CIO U �--� W = = W = w = = F- Q Q 1- = Q �d- z c) = w CL CL o w > > > ~ O �--� Q p Cr 0 O O Cn w Cn W C7 W CL U ¢ w Q M N W Y O O CO N F•- 00 co CS) CM cc uj z O d W O O O 0 0 O V p Z O. C� U J J J J J {--' Zzz H zpz w H Z Q J Q H J a O W W . Q C, CL �--� m CL F- W W CC W m U p p ¢ CJ W OU Lu LU LLJ U Q Z Z CC [r W W m z Wz O w w w w w �--c CL CL W W d O C7 C7 C7 J W w C7 C7 Cn Z ¢ � oo ::I- Ir �rcra• v � -�r �rd oocn00coorrr �R: N r CD co CG C0 CD CO CO CO CO N C" 00 Cb O n) m Q r 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Q) O Ln 62.1 N N N Cn (bM Q CL • . 6) CT! CL M M M NM M M N O N N N Cn 0 0 0 = = O = = O = = O O O O Ln = O Ln = _ CU U CL N N N = = N = = N = = N N N N N = N N = _ L.) O m 00 ¢ O N z cn cwn j Ln o ct ¢ Q m U Q m U < m U Q m U Q m U Q m U Q m U m cc (M= C" r o LL Cl r rn cm = C) 00 N r ::D Z w N N N Cn U d - - - - - N N N N OJ ~ Cn 0 0 0 0 0 0 = O = O = O = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cn UC-) CL N N N N N M = N = Ln = to = N N N N N CV CV N J W S CD� � O O O O O N w m m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CD 0 0 0 0 cr N 'r Ln CD O M O O cD co CD CD K** O M Q Ln r Ln w LO m m Ln Ln Ln cn O w Ca O 2 - _ pp W Q m U co CU --+ w C/3w Q Q Q C/3 UD UD * # # # O W w w O O O W W W m m J J J J J J J J J Lu Cl- > Q C] Cl- CL a- F- H Cr H CL CL_ d W W w W W 'r}- �--� W � U U U CLU LU LU ='M Lu LU LiJ .) C.D Z Q Z Z U U U Q Q G Q Q LU LU LU LU uj LLI LU CL CL CL CL a- wQ cc [r ❑CJJCD 2 C.7 C.7 CC CC CCwwWCnCn Cn00O Ln U LL. CL C7) 00 LU M M LU U N N N Cn CL U w W X/ O o O Q Z Q M N C:) Y Cp co co O 00 00 m m r r r Q U Ln N O Z Cn Cn Cn Cn Cn M p U O w w w W W W w CL w (/) - J J J J J J p F- J O U U U CJ co U U U Lu U p Z � w m CL. QQQZZQQQ F-- LU C7 [� a- CLCL — w w www w Z ME U www = = H = p = p = wL1J W = = = = = Z F5 Lu LU 00 Cn c0C-) u (DLOLL. J = J = UUUQQaQQ ZCUpp i . = W w w W H H - W w W w w CL CL CL CL w ¢ Li p Cr Cr Cr J J J w 3 Cr CC [r N C/J C/) Cn w U Q Q Q ¢ O wo Y M Ln r mM Lr) r o� M Ln r rn J O O O CL CL J LL. U N N N N N M M M C'J MKj- Q � H O tt7 O •- Y O N CD C10 O N CD Cb O N V' CD Cb O N N O U N cD Cb N N N N N M M M M M O co N N N Q CC CC Cn C) F- O O O ¢ ¢ w w w o 0 0 cn c� S H J F- p pQ O CL Q W Q Q Q z Q U C= CL S = = = W W W W W W W W W W U W F- = Cr = _ cc = = CC CIC CC: CL p� U U U U U F- J w H W = W = W = - Q Q Q Q ¢ Q Q 9 Q 9 Q Q Z C-) ZD W W > CL CL LL [L CL CL CL CL O �--� Q p CC O O O Co Co to to to N W Cn cq Cn Q Cn CJ) N w L9 L9 O Y m CD co co r- r. O co MM z v� J p cc p O Q W LU� J J JO JO F- Wz O CJ" [h :z CDp co W F- Z Q J J p OLLJ W p CL. H = W W W W W W W W W W m U p p Q O W F- W W W CC CC CC CIC CC U U U U U - cO W c� C) z z ¢ a ¢ ¢ aaQa ¢ ¢ z p w w w W W CL CL CL CL CL CL CL o_ CL CL Z H CC CD N Co to to to Cn N Cn Co Co ¢ cc 000v 'r Z*- va- v --:rd �r0000000000 � � N CD CO CD CD c.0 CD CD CD CD CD jt` � Cb O Cb C70 O Cb O O CA C13 N O O N a) O ' N Cn O O Lf) _ - Ln = - Ln = - o 0 (D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N U CL N N N N N c) 00 O LU :3 N W ) W Q cfl �--• C9 ZCn ¢ QmcU ¢ mC) QmU ¢ mCU ¢ mUamU ¢ mU = CV) om S r- oo a0 W CL N M co CC (� N — Cl) z Lei Cn H C.0 Cl- .- .- — — N N N - O Z F- Cn O O O o 0 0 = 0 0 = O = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Co Z O O C:) W N N N N N M = N LP) = lCJ = N N N N N ¢ W m _ ~O O O O N N .:I, d' 0 0 0 0 0 Co O O o 0 0 0 0 0 N O (N LO Lf) co c0 o cD CD cD CD mCD CD Q I- O) i- Cb 00 co cm Q) o M M W � � � � � � �• d- v .- Q Z Z Z Y O pp pp Q m U ---' Cn Cn W ¢ wQ Q Q Q Q * * * # o W W W O W O O O Cl O p7 m J J J J J J J J J J cLLJmLLJ Q Q Q Z_ Z J Q J J J J J CL Y Q O CL CL CLF- F- m CL W W W W W W > J m O W W W = S W W W W W W W = CC U U U U F- LJ U U U U CC) CD a U Z Z Z Z Z a ¢ Q Q Q Q p W W W H H W W W W W W W CL CL CL CL CL CL W Q CC CC cc: JJC'J• LC C7 C7 mmCJCoCnCotoCnO CnOo O U W CL � W W U CL U W W CJ C] O Z Q CS) CJ) N L9L'! to cc r- C/)CD 0- M M M CC 0- � O J W O W W W WF- F- � N Cd Z H J J J CC: Q Q p F- Es: O <C F- U U U C' cm W W W U p Z CL a_ W CL Q ¢ ¢ Z Z F- S S F- W CJ Cn U H CC d CL CL. F- CL W W O Y Y W W W W W WW W Z U W W W S S F- = uJ p = C) = Q U U cc CC C) U U U Z W W OO w C-) C-) C7 C7 LL = UJ = J = SOOQQQQ ¢ Q ZL) H CC W W W W H H H W W W X J J CL CL CL a. CL CL W ~Q W p C� Cr CC J J J CC B:: 3 W m m UD V) Co U) C/) C/3 U ¢ ¢ ¢ Q O pWM L17 t` a) MLO n C" J 0 0 0 N CL J W U M t.t] I� C7) .- .- .- N CV " N N M M M Cl) M Q F- F- F- r CL F- C=) O M Y O ^ � CO 00 O O N U N �• c0 w 00 O 00 Ln Cl) c0 Q F- LU zz ¢ ¢ W O m Cn C.7 O — O Z 0= F- C) O O a__ w Z Q U DC N N W CC F- U - - - - U = J c = J = = Q e e O �--� Q d a N U Q LL. LU w Y a) 04 D7 N N 3 Cl) Cm C13 LU im a) t H H O d zz c) Men Q 0 W m QUO'' Q m O zW zW cc Cn Z Q LU U O Z d ¢ � 000tocot0000 nmm N N N CO O O.. O L C.. M Cl) M � eh M O T M M ICM CM a) U CL N = o = _ _ _ L) O CO co � + N W O W Q M N a z Cn ¢ Q co U Q O] C) Q M U = tri o 2 co --:r W d r• O M cr U Q1 e- O = z LU a O Q d M M M J I-- K O = = LL7 = = O = = Cn U J U d CO = = N = c O = e J L2: SU m � O r F- O O O F- M M M N N N Q ^ ^ M M M M W � � r, r• r• M (1) O 2 cc CLQO] U m .• O] D] J Q J ?• J_ O OWz OZW W LLJ W CO U z Z C7 W O QJ U LL- d j W O c� W U V O ? U 2L O O O z M cO O qr m r r z ¢ cn o V)i C/) ¢ w - J H Q F- CL Z H W C) OUD Z O ,a-,,,� z O W LU O U NZzWU zW -+ O C) W z = = z ' = Cl1 = = ZC) GQ zJ F-- W O d W ¢ O UW Y M Lt7 r J 0 0 0 C/D 0- —1 LL. U - M Ln r mrn 2 I- O L.D C:) 0 Cl) O O N It = O O N V• CD W O N O O U) U N -c*- CD W - N - CV N N M M NM M M 'r �r CD O r LO M CD r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r Q JJ zJ zJ zJ ZJ zJ zJ zJ zJ ZJ ZJ ZJ JJ zJ zJ Jz zJ zJ --- -- F— 000000000000000000 Qaw aaaaa OC) rH- H O Cl- M H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H O !- U H !- Cn Cn Nfn Cn f!J VJ fA fn Cn (rJ Cn Cn Cn to Cn Cn VJ Z ¢ cc: N F— J M J = = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Z U O W Z ❑C m m m m m m m m m m 2 m m m m m m O - Q O a_ a_ a a_ a. a. a. a. a_ a_ a_ a. a. a_ a. a_ a_ a. a. U ¢ W w C) to C r o a. O cc Ln.to U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ a ¢ ¢ a ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ a ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ CL a_ a_ a_ a. a. CL a a_ a_ a_ a_ CL a a_ a_ a_ a_ Cn Cn N N Cn CrJ Cn cn Cn C/) O Cn cn N cn En W Cn J Q ca ¢ W Y O LL C.0 07 M z7 cn W O W W Q W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W cc U O Q m O W m Cr m LL m m CC m m LL O m m 5 m m m U W U Q ¢ Q ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ Q Q ¢ Q Q ¢ ¢ Q Q ¢ ¢ wz a FS a. a_ a. a. a a_ a_ a. a. a_ a_ a a_ a_ a_ a_ a_ a_ zH z cocncncncncncnwcn (nWC/3WwcnCIO 0 0 0 0 0 ¢ m rn m r r r CL en r N co . r M M CL M - - - r - - - - o r r O ' r N Cn LCA _ = O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U O N w CD Q O W 7 N W ¢ O T N Z Q Q m U Q m U ¢ m CU Q CO U ¢ m U ¢ m U Q m U > N o LO = ch O Ir LJ [1 Ln r co = N O O =) Z Ll.l N N N (n O M M .-- •--- - r- OU J U d. N = = C:) ; 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .�_I W M O ^ a-- CD CD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W CZ Q Z Z Z O C- Q m U co N �+ O cc m U.jzOz CL >- Q = W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W » M O W W LC m m m m Lr m Lr m fr m m m CC W u z z ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ o O O a_ a_ a_ a_ a_ a_ a_ a a_ Cl- n a_ a_ a_ a_ W Q Z Z fn to flJ VJ Cn NCn cn Cn Cn Cn Ntn Ntn Cnr M U U- a. g r cm r W ¢ ooreo W _U O S Cn a_ O O CD z W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL cnCnCnCnCnCnVJcnNcnCnCnCnCnW j OCD CD Y co r O CD LCA CD �, (n rrrrrrrrrrrrrrr QC/D r5FSFSss6666EEE66E N (n W O_ WW WWCnCnCnCncncnCnCnCnCnCn W O0a F- _ � EF5aaaaEEaaaEF56 1Uoz W H �--• CnCnCnCnCnNCnCnCnCnC/7CntnCnCn UZQH m N H H H H H H H H 1--1 I-1 H H H H H Wz Cn 00 cn J = = J = = OOOOOCD C) C) 0000 R W z Z = = cr- cc = = = cc = ctcccc = = cc O W Q Ll- a. a_ a_ a_ a_ a_ Cl- a. a_ a. W a_ a. a. a. a_ Cl- U Q Q Q N ¢ O OW Y M (r-3 M Ln r a� M Ln r m —j 0 0 0 f� 0- J Ll._ U M LC) r (7] .- '- �-- .- N CV N N N M M M MF- U O O N Y O N -:r W O O N -;t = O O N dr CC) CSI O N O - - N N N N N O r- N M N Q F- U-1 W O Cn O Z+ S a Zf LU LLJ LLJ LU LU LU OF- U H F- -i W ¢ ¢ aa ¢ ¢ CL CL CL o - Q a wccoU) ccoccow U Q LL. w Y rn w o z cY v/i J p cc Q W ZZ O zz F- WZ CJ co M QLLJ p Wcc: W W W W W m U � CLU U ¢C'J' W L) ¢ ¢ g Q ¢ Q zz o CLCL °'iv°"icai� v°-i m CLc. 00 . CL . m O (2) U CL N N N N N N v O az co Q o W N W zN ¢ Qcou mci ML) ML) mUamUQmU > cooer S Q7 CD N w CL m O Z w CL N N .- i Co 0 = o = o o cA U J U CL N = N = N N J w m > O H O N N r, �r O O F- N N t` n Q O O Cn T W a. c � QZZZ a) O S Y CL Q m U co a) � o Cb Cb zm Z Z c LU >Q O �~-- I~- w C.0 > -c m O S S = = F- �--. W U CJ U' ¢ Q CL W O J J (/) (n Cn CD Co 0 U_ w CL CO O O > W N w U O ? Cn SCL Ocm LIJ H Z O Y 0 0 0 O M M C Cr U O O W C') w CCl- Z Z F- W Z CD U Z Q Cr F- F- W W Wz Z m cn 0 LU 0 N CSO = CC Q Q Z U G CM OC W LU :z O J J (n C/) C-) --j Q O OW CLL- C/) ]C M LC'i 1� O M U.") r.-, 07 M O n C7� J O O O L J w U M L, I� Q1 .- •- .- �- N N N N N M M M M M F- J (/J O O I- Y O N CD fb O N = O O N � = w O N O O m U N 'C CD CO ^ ^ N N N N N M M M M M eY O Cl) cli N ^ Q ¢ ¢ W O W W W O U CL.F - f- F— z Q U a_ a_ a. W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W C'L F- U W W W [r Lr Lr = Cr Cr Cr CC = = = m CC Lr pC LL Cr 2! C-) o � � � nnnnnnnCL COc°- nnnnnnnnn U Q w ¢ Lo Ln Lo to Y Cn m ^ w Ln LO ca .°'. O z 3 a, c O m co w Q C=D LLJ LLJ LU L) C3 J J J h- LLI zZ U" ch pW < F— < SO W W F— C) a_ a. a. W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W m U Cl p Q O WW W C'L L'L Cr C'L Cr CL' = CC = = Cr CL Cr CL = = = = — co W U U U U Q Q ¢ Q Q ¢ Q Q ¢ Q Q ¢ ¢ Q ¢ Q a Q cn z p w w w a. a_ a. a_ a_ a. a_ a. a_ a. a. a_ a_ a. a. a_ a. a- Z ¢ S.-, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 g cfl cm cc jM M M Cn N N Liz CL M _ f\ a_ ^ .- - ^ .- - ^ r- ^ ^ r- ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ .- - r- � N N O N Cn O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 47 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N L) O co eo ct . o M N N W =3 W j m LCI) O m U Q m U ¢ m U � c LUrl Cn CL CJ. , N N V) FZ-. C_J CL ^ ^ N ^ .- ^ ^ .- ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ OJ Z ¢ C/30 0 0 0 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cn Z O O O � N N N N = N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Q W :� �:> ^ O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O F— G) 'r � O O Q Ul) to Lf) LO W ^ ^ Q Z Z Z Cl) O a_ ¢ m U Y CD UD p WW p] Cy] J J CzDLij Z Q Q (DCL ]- Q CD CL Cl- H W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W } J O S W W F— CC CL cc = CC cc CL' Cr cc CC m m m m cc Cr _ F- wu COLL) U ¢ ¢ Q ¢ Q ¢ ¢ Q ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ Q ¢ ¢ W W W CL CL CL C1. a_ a_ CL CL a_ a_ d- a. CL d_ CL. CL W J CC m S C/) W W C/) W Cn W W N W W W W W W W d N N 00 U LL M M -:r W N N N W U = O p ~O z ¢ LL-) Ln U-) m ^ Q in in ca W Q N } Q (b C/) J Z S W O LU J J W C!) W U zp Z 3 a ti F- VQ- LD UZQ CL a_ CV W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W Wz m cn z mi U S W W C7C CC CC CC m m Lr CC Cr OC CC m Cr C C Cr CL 2-1 O W W 0 0 W CD U U = = Q ¢ Q Q ¢ Q ¢ ¢ Q Q a Q a ¢ Q Q 6 U p o S W — W W3 CL. CL. Cl- CL. aCL. CL. Cl- a- a_ a. CL. Cl- CL. CL. a_ J LL- O J m CC W w Cn Cn UO w C/) Cn co w C/7 W C/) w Cn w c/) U Q ¢ Q J F— F— F— Q O �w M Ln r Y r� a� J O O O O ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ N N N N N M M M M M �' Q F— F- -:C Tigard Public Works Concrete Paving: 32 1313 Water Building Renovation Page 1 February 5, 2007 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place exterior reinforced cement concrete paving including, but not limited to, the following.- 1. ollowing:1. Walkways. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product specified. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mixture. C. Reinforcement Shop Drawings: 1. Submit steel reinforcing placement drawings prior to fabrication of reinforcing. 2. Identify and dimension each type of reinforcing bar. D. Test Reports: Submit copies of laboratory and field test reports for concrete work. E. Ready-Mix Concrete Batch Ticket: 1. Provide a batch weight ticket with each truck for inspection agency. 2. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 Batch Ticket Information. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Engage an experienced installer who is familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Ready-Mix Concrete Manufacturer: Comply with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Source Limitations: Provide each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, and each aggregate from one source. D. Comply with ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Comply with requirements in CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement. F. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to standards of governing authorities for paving work on public property. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Material: APA Grade"B" or better plywood, metal, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. B. Form Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Concrete Paving: 32 1313 Water Building Renovation Page 2 February 5, 2007 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. C. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. D. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82. E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. B. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. C. Water: ASTM C 94. D. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260. E. Chemical Admixtures: 1. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 2.4 CURING MATERIALS A. Clear Waterborne Membrane Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. B. Moisture Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion and Isolation Joint Filler Material: 3/8 inch nominal thickness. 1. ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. 2. ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to requirements; for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. C. Concrete Surface Cleaner: Heavy Duty Concrete Cleaner, by ProSo Co., or approved. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Concrete Paving: 32 1313 Water Building Renovation Page 3 February 5, 2007 2.6 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience, and as follows: 1. Minimum of 5-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete. a. Fly Ash: Limit percentage by weight to 25 percent. 2. Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch maximum. 3. Proportion cement, sand, aggregate and water in a workable mix to provide a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days, in conformance with ACI 318-771. 4. Concrete Slump: Between 2 inches and 4 inches at time of placement. 5. Air Entrainment Admixture: Include 5 percent(plus or minus one percent) of Admixture. 6. Water Cement Ratio: 0.45 maximum. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Certified by materials supplier to meet compressive strengths specified and conforming to ASTM C 94. 1. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes. 2. When air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify substrates are set to proper lines and grade. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to verify subbase is firm and stable. 1. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1.2 inch require correction according to requirements in Section 31 2000, Earth Moving. 2. Remove standing water. B. Proceed with placement of pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 3.2 EDGE FORMS A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. B. Treat forms with approved and nonstaining form oil or wax immediately before placing concrete. Do not use materials that will adhere to or discolor concrete 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing of Reinforcing Bars" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. I i B. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Concrete Paving: 32 1313 Water Building Renovation Page 4 February 5, 2007 C. Installed welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane'of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement, and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hours, unless pavement terminates at expansion or isolation joints. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Butt Joints: Use epoxy bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened of partially hardened concrete surfaces. 3. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate 1/2 of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Expansion or Isolation Joints: Form expansion and isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips, as follows: 1. Width of Joint: 1/2 inch, unless otherwise indicated. a. 3/4 inch where new concrete surfacing abuts other pavement. 2. Extend joint fillers to full depth of pavement if joint sealant is not indicated. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. a. Fill top of joint flush with pavement with pourable, self-leveling traffic sealant specified in Section 07 9200. 4. Locations: a. Transversely in walks at a distance of six to eight feet in from curbs that occur at walk-ends. b. Transversely in walks opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. C. Elsewhere at such locations that distance between transverse expansion joints does not exceed 25 feet. d. Where pavement abuts poles, posts, driveways, boxes, concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects which protrude through, into, or against pavement. e. Adjacent to other new or existing pavements. D. Contraction Joints: Form contraction joints of weakened plane, sectioning concrete into areas indicated. 1. Space at a maximum of 5 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form joints to a depth of 1/3 of thickness of concrete and to a width of approximately 1/8 inch. 3. Tool joint edges smooth. 4. Provide sawed joints only with approval of Architect. 5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate 1/2 of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Concrete Paving: 32 1313 Water Building Renovation Page 5 February 5, 2007 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. B. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. C. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. D. Do not use concrete that does not reach its final position in forms within 1-1/2 hours after introduction of water to mix at batch plant. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. F. Place concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. G. Consolidate concrete, during and immediately after placing according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, and tamping. H. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. I. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1, and as follows: 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 45 degrees F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F and not more than 80 degrees F at point of placement. 3. Do no use calcium chloride, salt, or other material containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. J. Warm Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301, and as follows: 1. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength caused by air temperatures above 75 degrees F. 2. Maintain a concrete temperature of not more than 75 degrees F at point of placement: 3. Fog stray forms, reinforcement, embedded items, and subgrade with cool water immediately prior to concrete placement. 4. Cover reinforcement steel with water soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before concrete is placed. 5. Protect placed concrete from shrinkage crack damage until protected by curing procedure. 3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Give consideration to location and character of concrete, weather and other conditions influencing setting of concrete and materials used in mix in determining time for removal of forms. 1. Comply with recommendations, precautions and requirements of ACI 347and ACI 318. 2. In any case, do not remove forms for a period of 4 days following placement of concrete. LRS Architects, Inc. i Tigard Public Works Concrete Paving: 32 1313 Water Building Renovation Page 6 February 5, 2007 3.7 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Floated Finish: Comply with ACI 301, Paragraph 11.7.2. 1. Provide floated finish for slab surfaces to receive washed and broomed finish. 2. Begin floating when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. 3. Check surface plane with a 10 foot straightedge at two or more angles during or after first floating. 4. Cut high spots and fill low spots during floating to level to class B tolerance, 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 5. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture. B. Broom Finish: Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 11.7.4. 1. Medium-to-Fine Texture: Draw a soft bristle broom across float finished concrete perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture 2. Medium-to-Course Texture: Striate float finished concrete 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. 3.8 CURING A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 1. Comply with ACI recommendations for cold weather and hot weather protection during curing. B. Cure concrete by one of the following, or a combination of methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep concrete surfaces continually moist for not less than 7 days with water, continuous water-fog spray, or use of water saturated absorptive cover kept continuously wet. 2. Moisture Retaining Cover Curing: Cover concrete with moisture retaining cover with sides and ends lapped and sealed by waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Not to vary more than 1/4 inch when tested with a 10 foot straight edge. 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. 1. Notify testing and inspection agency 24 hours prior to delivery and placement of concrete. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Public Works Concrete Paving: 32 1313 Water Building Renovation Page 7 February 5, 2007 2. Concrete strength tests for quantities less than 50 cubic yards will not be required when waived by Architect. B. Do not place concrete or reinforcement in footing forms until compacted soil and aggregate materials within forms have been examined. C. Do not place concrete in formwork until reinforcing steel has been examined. D. Ready Mixed Concrete Inspection and Testing: 1. Sample each truck load of ready mixed concrete, complying with ASTM C172. 2. Perform one slump test for each truck load of ready mixed concrete, complying with ASTM C 143. 3. Perform one air content test for each set of compressive strength specimens, complying with ASTM C 231. 4. Make one set of 3 of compressive strength specimens for each day of structural concrete pouring or each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each class of concrete, complying with ASTM C 31. a. Test one specimen in accordance with ASTM C 39 after curing 7 days, one specimen after curing 28 days, and retain one specimen for testing after 35 days or as directed by Architect. 5. Batch Ticket: a. Receive a batch weight ticket from each truck; batch ticket to comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 for Batch Ticket Information. b. Verify water/cement ratio. 1) No water may be added if load is at specified ratio. 2) Reject truck if ratio does not conform. 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Reconstruct damaged pavement for entire length between regularly scheduled joints. 2. Dispose removed concrete of in legal manner at no additional cost to Owner. B. Protect concrete pavement from damage and discoloration. 1. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. C. Clean discolored concrete. 1. Apply concrete cleaner, in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, to remove oil residues, scum, excess mortar, and the like. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc.